Home

UDC3300 (DC33NB) for Nuclear Service Manual, 51-52-25-86

Contents

1. Topic Page 3 1 Overview 35 3 2 Configuration Prompts 36 3 3 How to Get Started 39 3 4 Configuration Tips 40 3 5 Configuration Procedure 41 3 6 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 43 3 7 Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 45 3 8 Setpoint Ramp Rate Programming Set Up Group 47 3 9 Accutune Set Up Group 49 3 10 Algorithm Data Set Up Group 51 3 11 Output Algorithm Set Up Group 55 3 12 Input 1 Parameters Set Up Group 56 3 13 Input 2 Parameters Set Up Group 57 3 14 Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group 58 3 15 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group 59 3 16 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group 61 3 17 Options Parameters Set Up Group 63 3 18 Communications Parameters Set Up Group 64 3 19 Alarms Parameters Set Up Group 66 3 20 Display Parameters Set Up Group 68 3 21 Calibration Group 69 3 22 Maintenance Group 70 3 23 Status Group 71 3 24 Configuration Record Sheet for Basic and DMCS Models 72 3 25 Configuration Record Sheet for Extended Model 74 To assist you in the configuration process there are prompts that appear in the upper and lower displays These prompts let you know what group of configuration data Set Up prompts you are working with and also the specific parameters Function prompts associated with each group Figure 3 1 shows you an overview of the prompt hierarchy As you will see the configuration data is divided into 15 main Set Up gr
2. 7 2 1 OVGIVIGW erit e tenebre lt hien etit ro et edle bemus 7 2 2 Model Number 2 12 2 32 MOUM a i codo ee PR edi 13 24 Wiring iaa vende eme etin eim e ita det 15 2 5 Wiring Diagrams etia ies 18 2 6 Control and Alarm Relay Contact 34 SECTION 3 35 35 3 2 Configuration Prompts sssssssssssssseeeenenneeeen nennen nnne nente 36 3 3 How To Get Started neret entree 39 3 4 Configuration Tips nnne nennen nennen nnne 40 3 5 Configuration 2 4 0 0200 eene 41 3 6 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up 43 3 7 Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group Cascade or Two Loops 45 3 8 SP Ramp SP Rate or SP Programming Set Up 47 3 9 Accutune Set Up Group nnne 49 3 10 Algorithm Data Set Up Group sssssssseeeeeeeen enne 51 3 11 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up 55 3 12 Input 1 Parameters Set Up 56 3 13 Input 2 Parameters
3. X0 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 X0 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X1 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 X1 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X2 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 X2 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X3 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 X3 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X4 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 X4 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X5 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 X5 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X6 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 X6 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X7 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 X7 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X8 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 X8 INPUT VALUE X AXIS YO VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 YO INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y1 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 Y1 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y2 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 Y2 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y3 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 Y3 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y4 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 Y4 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y5 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 Y5 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y6 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 Y6 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y7 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 Y7 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y8 VALU2 0 00 to 99 99 Y8 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 103 60 00 0 00 gt oO 4 2 Example of Eight Segment Characterizer 100 Y AXIS 7 7 7 7 22 o ooo Output rom Characterizer TE AERE 70 00 Disabled Input Characterizer X AXIS 100 22673 104 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Table 4 5 Algorithm Group Definitions Continued Lower Display Upper Display Para
4. 261 Table 9 22 Aux Out Communications Board Replacement Procedure 262 Table 9 23 MCU Output Board Replacement Procedure 22 4 263 Table 10 1 Parts Identification a a a aaa aa aaae T Teha aeania 266 Table t0 2 Parts NOUShOWH e Rene ate aii aia Adin tiie 266 Table 11 1 Manual Tuning Procedure for Simplex 268 Table 11 2 Manual Tuning Formulas eese esee eene nennen nnne nennen nennen 269 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual xi Acronyms interne aia Distributed Manufacturing Control System T Electromagnetic interference pile High intensity discharge iT IDE sag Metal Oxide Varistors Dec Normally closed or normally open Iber EE Proportional Integral and Derivative pop Resistance capacitance REL ui atte pa T ens Radio frequency interference FAT tdt eO tere act eben Resistance Thermometer Device SCR T EE Silicon controlled rectifiers Nn Universal Digital Controller Parameters PROPR BD dateien ates Phan ortam nt Proportional Band GAIN testo dh eral e UR EDT Ae I M CIL Gain FATEIMIINS iios eiat Ib c mM LE Rate in Minutes as ue e Reset in minutes repeat inten editt nt
5. Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display OUT RATE Output Change Rate ENABLE DISABL Section DISABL 4 11 ATTENTION Does not apply to 3 Position Step Control algorithm PCT M UP Output Rate Up Value 0 to 9999 per minute 0 PCT M DN Output Rate Down Value 0 to 9999 per minute 0 OUTHILIM High Output Limit 5 0 to 105 of output 100 OUTLoLIM Low Output Limit 5 0 to 105 of output 0 0 Hi LIM High Reset Limit Within the range of the output limits 100 0 I Lo LIM Low Reset Limit Within the range of the output limits 0 0 DROPOFF Controller Dropoff Value 5 to 105 of output 0 DEADBAND Output Relay Deadband Time Duplex 1 0 5 0 to 25 0 On Off Duplex 0 0 to 25 0 Position Prop and 3P Step 0 5 to 5 0 OUT HYST Output Relay Hysteresis 0 0 to 5 0 of PV Span for On Off 0 5 control FAILMODE Failsafe Mode NO LAT NO LAT LATCH FAILSAFE Failsafe Output Value for all Set within the range of the output 0 0 outputs except 3P Step limits O to 100 Failsafe Output Value for PCT motor goes to closed position Step 100PCT motor goes to open position MAN OUT Power up Preset Output for Within the range of output limits Manual Output AUTO OUT Power up Preset Output for Within the range of output limits Automatic Output PBorGAIN Proportional Band or PB PCT GAIN Gain Units GAIN MINorRPM Reset Uni
6. 151 5 6 Operating 224222 4 1 0000 nennen nennen nennt 152 NUI 156 5 8 Setpoint Ramp 159 5 9 Single Setpoint 160 5 10 Using Two Sets of Tuning 164 5 11 Alarm 167 5 12 Two Loops of Control Overview 168 5 13 Configuring Two Loops of Control 173 5 14 Monitoring Two Loops of 176 5 15 Operating Two Loops of Control sss 177 5 16 Three Position Step Control Algorithm 2 178 5 17 Input Math 179 5 18 Digital Input Option Remote 4 040 0 182 5 19 Auto Manual Station sssssssssssssses eee 186 5 20 Fuzzy Overshoot 189 5 24 ACGULUTIO uiti conie et 190 5 22 Carbon Potential i ree i SR ERR HERE SERERE NEL ERR uda 198 5 23 Health Watch er ERR 200 SECTION 6 SETPOINT RAMP SOAK PROGRAMMING 201 6 1 OVERVIEW E 201 6 2 Program Contents ccccccceceesceceeeeeceeeeeeaeceeneeseaeeeseaeee
7. Input 1 Input 2 SIN Input 3 be I Computer Setpoint Override alata Deviation PIDSETX reiten ert nte bed cett eb rop tuta Tuning Parameter Set PIDS EDX Ve H HM Tuning Parameter Set zip lly Elapsed time iat Time remaining RAMPXXOM ameter rt eerte tcr b erede Minutes remaining in Setpoint Ramp xe M M Setpoint Now BIA Output Bias Manual Reset value AUTO Lower display automatically displays setpoint value in engineering units itte ttt Lower display automatically indicates output in 96 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual XV References Publication Publication Number Title UDC 3300 Limit Controller 51 52 25 56 UDC 3000 UDC 3300 UDC5000 UDC6000U DC6300 51 51 25 35 RS422 485 Communications Option Manual UDC 3000 3300 DMCS Communications Option Section of the 82 50 10 23 Gateway Manual Modbus RTU Serial Communications User Manual 51 52 25 66 Modbus RTU Serial Communications User Manual 51 52 25 70 Configuration Interface for UDC 3300 UDC 3300 Controller Spec
8. 6 PVUEVAL6 to PVEUVAL7 Scheduling 7 PVUEVAL7 to PVEUVAL8 8 PVUEVALS to High Range Limit ATTENTION When PB is configured instead of Gain in the Control group prompt PBorGAIN the displayed GAINVALn is in units of PB The lower display will still show Gain Gain Scheduling prompts are only available when PID SETS in the Control Set Up group is configured for GAIN S 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 81 4 3 Introduction Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group Tuning 2 Loop 2 consists of establishing the appropriate values for the tuning constants for Loop 2 on 2 Loop or Internal Cascade control Loop 2 is only available on Expanded Model DC330E Tuning 2 group Table 4 2 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning 2 Set Up group and prompts their definitions Table 4 2 Loop 2 Tuning Group Prompt Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection PROPBDS or Same as TUNING The definitions listed for the parameters at the left are the GAIN 3 or same as those listed previously for the Tuning Set Up GAINVALn group parameters except they are for Loop 2 RATE3MIN The table below shows you how to use them for Duplex Heat Cool applications RSET3MIN or RSET3RPM DUPLEX OUTPUT RANGES 0 to 50 TUNING SETS 2 AND 4 COOL MANRSETS 50 to 100 TUNING SETS 1 AND 3 HEAT PROPBDA or Duplex Heat GA
9. 205 Inputs 1 2 3 Wiring 400000000 215 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice 217 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Precision Resistor 218 Wiring Connections for 219 Wiring Connections for Radiamatic Millivolts or Volts except 0 to 10 Volts 220 Wiring Connections for 0 to 10 Volt 2 221 Wiring Connections for 4 to 20 MA inputs sse 222 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Current Proportional Output 228 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Auxiliary Output eese 234 Ghassis Removal sorteer ice cae a tps ee aen cQ 256 Display Keyboard 257 Removing the Printed Wiring 258 Printed Wiring Board 259 UDC 3300 Exploded recede eed ted dc Mitta deer 265 viii UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Table 1 1 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 2 3 Table 2 4 Table 2 7 Table 2 8 Table 3 1 Table 3 2 Table 3 3 Table 3 4 Table 3 5 Table 3 6 Table 3 7 Table 3 8 Table 3 9 Table 3 10 Table 3 11 Table 3 12 Table 3 13 Table 3 14 Ta
10. 29 RS422 485 Modbus Communications Option Connections 30 DMCS Communications Option Connections 2 2 31 Transmitter Power for 4 20 mA 2 wire Transmitter Using Open Collector Alarm 2 Output Model DC330X XT XXX isssssssssseeseeeenneen enne en nennen sinn sinn innen en 32 Transmitter Power for 4 20 mA 2 wire Transmitter Using Auxiliary Output Model DC330X XX 2XX or DC330X XX 5XX ssssssssesee ener ennt 33 Overview of UDC 3300 Prompt 36 Example of Mass Flow Compensation using Multiplier Divider Algorithm 100 Example of Eight Segment Characterizer 104 Operator InterfaGe eiie occi ERE E e Ro HEC dee e Eg nn 147 Functional Overview Block Diagram of a Single Loop Loop 1 or Dual Loop Controller Loop 1 and Loop 2 169 Functional Overview Block Diagram of Internal Cascade of a 2 loop Controller 170 Hi Lo Override 171 Auto Manual Station and Backup Control 186 Carbon Potential nennen entente inns 199 Ramp Soak Profil Exambpl tenia 204
11. ent elt eet anten 209 Procedures for Changing a Running Setpoint 212 Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0 and 100 Range Values 214 Equipment Needed niente ipei iine lenis 216 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath 217 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Precision Resistor 218 Input 1 2 or 3 Calibration 223 Restoring Factory 225 Set Up Wiring Procedure Current Proportional 228 Current Proportional Output Calibration Procedure 2 2 229 Position Proportional and 3 Position Step Output Calibration Procedure 231 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Auxiliary Output seen 234 Auxiliary Output Calibration Procedure sse enne 235 Error Message Prompts 239 Procedure for Identifying the Software 240 Powel up T6sls 241 Procedure for Displaying the Status Tests Results 242 Status 243 B
12. M Local Setpoint Source E E Remote Setpoint Source Automatic Bias SPT RAGK Local Setpoint Tracking SB Setpoint High Limit Setpoint Low Limit ACTION c Control Output Direction 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual xiii OUT RATE acit tto ttu e oett Output Change Rate POT M HU Output Rate Up Value PGT M DIN e ir rte E ER Ed Output Rate Down Value M High Output Limit OU TEOEIM iei eee pe iibro crore lega Low Output Limit High Reset Limit E Low Reset Limit DROPOLEE tttm ta eene etel acr Gegend edt Controller Dropoff Value DEADBAND 5 rire e Ee te Ee ee eer Output Relay Deadband FAIESAEE rh abet tn Parere e E e RU La eU xs Failsafe Output Value AUX edi Auxiliary Output One Loop Selection CUR OU T2 nid tette tendit Auxiliary Output Two Loops Cascade Selection C Digital Input 1 selections DIG clade Digital Input 1 Combinations DIG IN iceland
13. 262 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 MCU output board Follow the procedure listed in Table 9 23 to replace the following MCU output boards Basic e Current Output P N 51309401 504 e Relay Output P N 51309401 505 Expanded e Current Output P N 51309401 504 e Relay Output P N 51309401 505 Table 9 23 MCU Output Board Replacement Procedure Step Action 1 Remove the chassis from the case See Figure 9 1 2 Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis See Figure 9 3 3 Lay the boards flat and identify the MCU Output board See Figure 9 4 4 Each option board is held onto the MCU Output board with three posts Locate these posts under the MCU Output board 5 Use small pliers and squeeze the ends of each post together and push it up through the board Remove the option boards present 6 Remove the transformer connections to the Digital Input board and the Auxiliary Output Communications board if present Remove the Digital Input Board if present See Table 9 21 Remove the Auxiliary Output Communications board if present See Table 9 22 9 Remove the connector from plug WG Slide a small screwdriver under the connector and lift the release 10 Replace the MCU Output board 11 Reinstall the Digital Input board if present onto the new MCU Output board 12 Reinstall the Auxiliary Output Communications board if present onto the new MCU Outp
14. SPS SPIRI OPTIONS AUX OUT 4mA VAL 20 VAL DIGIN1 DIG1 COM DIGIN2 062 or CUR OUT2 COM P ComsTATE Com ADDR ComADDR SHEDTIME PARITY BAUD DUPLEX TX DELAY Pal sueomone SHEDSP UNITS CSPRATO CSPBIAS csP2RATO CSP2BIAS LOOPBACK ALARMS ESTA RISES ARTI DISPLAY P pecimac2 TEMPUNIT PWR FREQ CALIB 5 USED FOR FIELD CALIBRATION M AINTNCE TIME1 HRS MIN1 HRS MIN2 TIMES HRS MIN3 COUNTER COUNTS I gt COUNTERZ COUNTS2 COUNTER3 COUNTS3 RESETID RES 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual Set Up Group Function Prompts STATUS Iverson 5 FAILSF2 RAMTEST CONFTEST CALTEST FACT CRC 38 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 3 How To Get Started Read the configuration tips Read configuration procedure Set up groups Parameter explanations or definitions Configuration record sheet Read Configuration Tips shown on the next page These tips will help you to easily and quickly accomplish the tasks at which you will be working when you configure your controller Read Configuration Procedure This procedure tells you how to access the Set Up groups and the Function parameters within each of
15. 1 Put the controller in manual mode by pressing the MANUAL AUTO key Let the PV stabilize Adjust the setpoint to the desired value Put the controller in automatic mode by pressing the MANUAL AUTO key The controller will switch to automatic mode and the process will start to move toward the setpoint and will line out with the proper tuning constants A large T appears on the left side of the upper display to indicate that SP tuning is in progress SP tuning for duplex SP tuning can be done for applications using duplex heat cool control heat cool Configuring SP tuning To configure this item refer to Section 3 Configuration for duplex heat cool Set Up Group ACCUTUNE Function Prompt ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2 Select SP or SP PV using either A or V Enter the Setpoint Change Value Function Prompt SP CHANG or SP CHAN2 Verify the Process Gain Value to be 1 0 Function Prompt KPG or KPG 2 Verify Criteria selected is FAST Function Prompt CRITERIA or CRITERA2 194 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Using SP tuning at start up for duplex heat cool After SP or SP PV has been enabled use the procedure in Table 5 38 to use SP tuning at start up for duplex heat cool control Table 5 38 Procedure for Using SP Tuning at Start up for Duplex Step Action 1 Put the controller into manual mode MANUAL AUTO key Heat Zone Adju
16. 176 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 5 15 Loop operation Operating modes and setpoint source Keyboard operation Accutune Setpoint ramp or SP programming Digital inputs remote mode switching Output override Hi Lo select Operating Two Loops of Control Operation of two individual loops of control is identical to operating a single loop of control except that TUNING 2 group applies to Loop 2 only and two PID sets 3 and 4 are available TUNING group applies to Loop 1 with PID sets 1 and 2 applicable The rules for Auto Manual modes and changing setpoint sources are the same as single loop operation Note that the loop being displayed is the only loop affected by normal keyboard operation However either loop can be reconfigured when in the Set Up mode regardless of which is being displayed during normal operation Two independent loops or cascaded loops can be tuned at the same time if configured Either loop or both loops can be configured for a single setpoint ramp operation by enabling the desired loop or loops see Section 3 Configuration An or will appear when applicable depending upon which loop is being displayed The RUN HOLD operation is shown in Table 5 15 Procedure for Running a Setpoint Ramp Digital Input 2 is dedicated to Loop 2 and Digital Input 1 is dedicated to Loop 1 when two loops or Cascade control is configured Output Override allows you to s
17. RSP SRC NONE INP 2 IN AL1 IN AL2 INP 3 REMOTE SETPOINT SOURCE This selection determines what your remote setpoint source will be when toggled by the SETPOINT SELECT key or Digital Input Not available for Cascade PID Loop RSP Cascade and SP3 are mutually exclusive NONE No remote setpoint INP 2 Remote Setpoint is Input 2 AL1 Remote Setpoint using Input 1 algorithm IN AL2 Remote Setpoint using Input 2 algorithm INP 3 Remote Setpoint is Input 3 ATTENTION To cycle through the available local setpoints and remote setpoint press and hold in the SETPOINT SELECT key When the key is released the setpoint selection currently displayed will be the new setpoint selection 116 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition AUTOBIAS ENABLE DISABL AUTOBIAS is used for bumpless transfer when transferring from local setpoint to remote setpoint Auto Bias calculates and adds a bias to remote setpoint input each time a transfer is made Only available if no tracking is selected ENABLE Enables auto bias DISABLE Disables auto bias SP TRACK NONE PV RSP SETPOINT TRACKING The local setpoint can be configured to track either PV or RSP as listed below Not configurable when Auto Bias is set ATTENTION For selections other than NONE LSP is stored
18. 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 165 Switch between two This procedure is operational only if 2 PID SETS was configured at the sets via the keyboard Control Set Up group The procedure in Table 5 19 shows you how to without automatic switchover switch from one set to another Table 5 19 Procedure for Switching PID SETS from the Keyboard Step Operation Press Action 1 Access the PID until you see set display Upper Display The PV value Lower Display 1012 to change PID SET 1 to PID SET 2 or vice y versa You can use Accutune on each set 166 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 5 11 Alarm Setpoints Introduction An alarm consists of a relay contact and an operator interface indication The alarm relay is de energized if setpoint 1 or setpoint 2 is exceeded The alarm relay is energized when the monitored value goes into the allowed region by more than the hysteresis The relay contacts can be wired for normally open NO energized or normally closed NC de energized at the rear terminals See Table 2 8 in the Section 2 Installation for alarm relay contact information There are four alarm setpoints two for each alarm The type and state High or Low is selected during configuration See Section 3 Configuration for details Procedure for Table 5 20 lists the procedure for displaying and changing the alarm displaying the alarm setpoints setpoints Table 5 20
19. Do not run these lines in the same Communication conduit as AC power Use shielded twisted pair cables To Other Belden 9271 Twinax or equivalent Instruments maximum 15 120 Ohm Resistor on Last Leg 24169 30 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Figure 2 18 shows the wiring connections for the DMCS Communications option Model DC330X XX 4XX Figure 2 18 DMCS Communications Option Connections DMCS Communications DMCS is a proprietary protocol Host computer must be either the Honeywell Gateway 500 or LPM Series 9000 Master 120 Ohm Resistor Do not run these lines in the same conduit as AC power Q Use shielded twisted pair cables Belden 9271 Twinax or equivalent To Other Communication DMCS Maximum 31 drops Instruments 120 Ohm Resistor on Last Leg 24170 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 31 Transmitter power for wiring diagram example shown in Figure 2 19 Model SEMA 2 Ne DC330X XT XXX provides 30 Vdc at terminals 5 and 6 with the transmitter open collector alarm 2 output capability of driving up to 22 mA as required by the transmitter which is wired in series If the transmitter terminal voltage must be limited to less than 30 volts you can insert a zener diode between the positive transmitter terminal and terminal 5 For example an IN4733A zener diode will limit the voltage at the transmitter to 25 Vdc Configure A2
20. SOOTING Input Combination Errors Percent Carbon falls outside of sooting boundary RNG Input 1 Out of Range Out of range criteria Linear range 10 out of range Characterized range 1 out of range IN2 RNG Input 2 Out of Range Same as Input 1 IN3 RNG Input 3 Out of Range Same as Input 1 PV RNG PV Out of Range PV PV source x PV source ratio PV source bias If a Loop Input algorithm has been selected this error message will also appear when the result of the algorithm exceeds the PV limits FAILSAFE Failsafe Loop 1 Check inputs or configuration FAILSF2 Failsafe Loop 2 Check inputs or configuration RV LIMIT Remote Variable Out of Range RV RV source x RV source ratio RV source bias RH LO RH Excessive Temperature Depression Calculated RH is less than 0 SEG ERR Segment Error SP Program starting segment number is less than ending segment number CAL MTR Not calibrated Perform Position Proportional calibration 150 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 5 5 Start up Procedure Procedure The Start up procedure is given in Table 5 6 Table 5 6 Procedure for Starting Up the Controller Step Operation Press Action 1 Select the loop lrynction to toggle between Loop 1 and Loop 2 if configured LOOP 1 2 2 Select manual until indicator is ON MANUAL 2p mode AUTO The controller is in ma
21. Table 4 4 Accutune Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection FUZZY FUZZY OVERSHOOT SUPPRESSION Can be enabled or disabled independently of whether Demand Tuning or SP Tuning is enabled or disabled DISABL DISABLE Disables Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression ENABLE ENABLE ON LOOP 1 ONLY The UDC uses Fuzzy Logic to suppress or minimize any overshoot that may occur when PV approaches SP It will not recalculate any new tuning parameters ENABL2 ENABLE ON LOOP 2 ONLY Same as ENABLE except for Loop 2 only ENAB12 ENABLE ON BOTH LOOPS Same as ENABLE except for both Loops 86 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition ACCUTUNE DISABL TUNE SP TUN PV SP PV ACCUTUNE for Loop 1 DISABLE Disables the Accutune function DEMAND TUNING If TUNE is selected and tuning is initiated through the operator interface or digital input if configured the algorithm calculates new tuning parameters and enters them into the tuning group This tuning requires no process knowledge and does not require line out for initialization SETPOINT TUNING This selection tunes on setpoint changes only It employs time domain analysis to accelerate line out at any desired setpoint without prior initialization or process knowledge SP is the recommended
22. 0 00 to 99 59 PERIOD allows you to configure the length of timeout period from 0 to 99 hours 59 minutes START KEY ALARM2 START allows you to select whether the timer starts with the keyboard Run Hold key or Alarm 2 L DISP TI REM E TIME L DISP allows you to select whether time remaining TI REM or elapsed time E TIME is displayed for the timer option The time is shown on the lower display in HH MM format along with a rotating clock character If the clock rotation is clockwise elapsed time is indicated f the clock rotation is counterclockwise time remaining is indicated INPUT MATH ALGORITHMS The controller is provided with two input algorithms Each algorithm can be configured to provide a derived calculated PV or a derived Remote setpoint Up to three inputs may be applied to the calculation In addition the two algorithms may be linked to combine two calculations by configuring one algorithm to be an input to the other algorithm See Inputs A B and C for definitions per equation All algorithms operate in engineering units except Feedforward which operates in percent of output units ATTENTION For the General Math functions when Input C is set to NONE the value of Input C used in the functions is automatically set to 1 0 except for Summer where it is set to 0 0 INP ALG1 NONE INPUT ALGORITHM 1 has the following selections from which to choose
23. csse cerei usd Reset in repeats minute intesque EL cutie ee Manual Reset PROPBAND2 dtt tenete dietas ert Proportional Band 2 GAIN xcti ine cue diae Gain 2 a On te Rate 2 in Minutes eres tetto Gui uia tet e s Reset 2 in minutes repeat RSET RPM ish es cour ten ns Reset 2 in repeats minute CYC SEG vate eect fe Dues co aequale LB Cycle Time ON GOSS EG HL Cycle Time Cool SECURITY th cde etry Security Code EOGCKOLU S antro pete CC ee Configuration Lockout PVEU VAL noe er ns PV1 through PV8 Value for Gain Scheduling GAIN Gain 1 through Gain 8 Value for Gain Scheduling c tte Aue Proportional Band 3 ep cc MEET n Gain 3 in iver obti mn ebbe Rate 3 in Minutes RSETSMIN aeaa atu Reset 3 in minutes repeat MANGRS Eile I ALD E or erst Manual Reset 3 Proportional Band 4 EM Gain 4 RATE IMIN zi me Eme anb ib tds Rate 4 in Minutes RBSETAMIN este a a em ueber s Reset 4 in minutes repeat OYGSSEO eet tae tn Pee no sette Cycle Time 3 GN
24. ng Refer to Status Tests to determine which tests have failed and how to correct them Position proportional or For controller configured for Position Proportional or 3 Position Step 3 position step test control with motor position indication and Auto cal has never been done failures calibrated a prompt CAL MTR will appear suggesting that the controller be 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 241 9 4 Status Tests Introduction When required the results of these tests can be checked to determine the reason the controller has gone to Failsafe How to check the status The procedure in Table 9 4 tells you how to display the results of the tests status tests Table 9 5 lists the tests the reason for the failure and how to correct the problem Table 9 4 Procedure for Displaying the Status Tests Results Step Operation Press Action 1 Select until you see STATUS SET UP Upper Display Set Up Group Lower Display STATUS 2 Read the status Function until you see tests results LOOP 1 2 Upper Display NO orYES YES indicates a failure Lower Display FAILSAFE Successive presses of the FUNCTION key will display the results of the status tests in the following order RAM TEST CONF TEST CAL TEST FACT CRC Identify the problem and correct the failure as shown in Table 9 5 242 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Status Tests Table 9 5 lists the Statu
25. CASE Ss otav etsi du Cycle Time 4 SRAM Prestet cim raat edi n iS tee eiie Single Setpoint Ramp TIMESMIN iiit eet Single Setpoint Ramp Time SP Ramp enabled FINALE SPetr Single Setpoint Final Setpoint SP Ramp enabled SP BATE etn dta tr hona ite ise Setpoint Rate RATE UP sort statu a pete Gat ual i Mte ME Rate Up Value PATE DNs de smart Rate Down Value teet sib els Accutune AGOUTUNET reece rere ee cece Accutune Loop 2 SPECAN G iniri a lets Setpoint Change Value Loop 1 PROG GAINS etre adeste c t stu ene Process Gain Loop 1 CRITERIA emet Tuning Criteria Loop 1 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 GONT AEQ atenta eo veel late Control Algorithm CONT2 AEG crt eee eem e eir ries Control 2 Algorithm m Input 1 Algorithm CALC Calculated Variable High Scaling Factor for Input Algorithm 1 CALC LOW cnni Calculated Variable Low Scaling Factor for Input Algorithm 1 DW Her ieee Input 2 Algorithm MATH 2 tote Weighted Average Ratio or K Constant for Math Selections sienne A ETA Eight Segment Characterizer 8SEQ CLI2 E i rito eb Eight Segment Characterizer 2 TOTAPIZE atro E aan ra Totalization Function INT n rte pee
26. Monitoring two individual loops of control or internal Cascade is the same as a single loop except as indicated in Table 5 28 Table 5 28 Digital Display Indication Two Loops Indicator Loop Indication Definition none Loop 1 Upper display shows the Process Variable two loop PV for Loop 1 Lower display shows the Loop 1 cascade parameters and the PV and Output for Loop 2 Controller setpoint annunciators show the setpoint currently being used for Loop 1 L Loop 2 Upper display shows the Process Variable PV for Loop 2 Lower display shows the Loop 2 parameters and the PV and Output for Loop 1 Controller setpoint annunciators show the setpoint currently being used for Loop 2 Display of Loop or Loop 2 if configured is selected by toggling the FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 key Regardless of which loop is being displayed 1 or 2 the process variable of the non displayed loop can be shown in the lower display by repeated presses of LOWER DISPLAY key until IPVXXXX or 2PVXXXX is displayed When internal Cascade has been configured an will appear on the left side of the upper display as long as Loop 1 is operating in the remote setpoint mode Hold in the SETPOINT SELECT key until RSP appears in the lower display then release the key to select remote setpoint Switching between automatic and manual mode on either loop will not affect the internal Cascade indication
27. Rate 3 Reset 3 and Cycle 3 Time The active PID SET can be read in the lower display When the process variable is LESS than the value set at prompt SW VALUE the controller will use Gain 4 Rate 4 Reset 4 and Cycle 4 Time The active PID SET can be read in the lower display Other prompts affected SW VALUE TWO SETS SP AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER When the setpoint is GREATER than the value set at prompt SW VALUE Switchover Value the controller will use Gain 3 Rate 3 Reset 3 and Cycle 3 When the setpoint is LESS than the value set at prompt SW VALUE the controller will use Gain 4 Rate 4 Reset 4 and Cycle 4 Other prompts affected SW VALUE GAIN SCHEDULING allows you to schedule eight user defined Gain segments applied over a user defined PV range Enter Gain and PV values under Loop 2 Tuning Set Up prompts PBorGAIN selection in Control Set Up group also applies ATTENTION Gain scheduling automatically disables Accutune for this loop SW VALUE Value in engineering units within PV or SP range limits AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER VALUE This is the value of Process Variable or Setpoint at which the controller will switch from Tuning Constant Set 4 to Set 3 Only appears when PID SETS selections 2 PVSW or 2 SPSW are selected LSP S 1 ONLY TWO THREE LOCAL SETPOINT SOURCE This selection determines what your local setpoint source will be LOCAL SETPOINT The setpoint en
28. SET UP key until STATUS appears in Configuration test failed the lower display Calibration test failed Burnout configured for none and 3 Press the FUNCTION key to see what tests the input failed pass or fail then run through the STATUS codes a second time to see if the error cleared Correct according to the recommendations given in Table 9 5 INP1FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 1 1 Make sure the actuation is configured correctly integration i e cannot make analog to See Section 3 Configuration digital conversion This will happen if 2 Make sure the input is correct Upscale or Downscale burnout is selected 3 Check for gross over ranging Input not configured correctly 4 Replace factory calibration See Section 7 6 5 Replace the cold junction assembly INP2FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 2 Same as INP1FAIL above integration i e cannot make analog to digital conversion INP3FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 3 Same as INP1FAIL above integration i e cannot make analog to digital conversion SW FAIL Position Proportional input slidewire failure 1 Check motor slidewire connections 2 Recalibrate the slidewire motor position see the calibration section Section 8 3 CAL MTR Position Proportional or 3 Position Step 1 Calibrate the controller for Position Proportional Control with Motor Position Indication output Refer to Subsection 8 3 Position Auto Cal never performed Proportion
29. TIME1 TIME2 TIME3 COUNT1 COUNT2 COUNT3 ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 TYPE Select what you want Setpoint 1 of Alarm 1 to represent It can represent the Process Variable Deviation Input 1 Input 2 Output and if you have a model with communications you can configure the controller to alarm on SHED If you have setpoint programming you can alarm when a segment goes ON or OFF NO ALARM INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 PROCESS VARIABLE Loop 1 DEVIATION Loop 1 OUTPUT Loop 1 NOTE 1 SHED FROM COMMUNICATIONS Both Loops EVENT ON SP PROGRAMMING EVENT OFF SP PROGRAMMING ALARM ON MANUAL MODE Loop 1 NOTE 2 REMOTE SETPOINT FAILSAFE PV RATE OF CHANGE Loop 1 PROCESS VARIABLE Loop 2 DEVIATION Loop 2 OUTPUT Loop 2 NOTE 1 ALARM ON MANUAL MODE Loop 2 NOTE 2 REMOTE SETPOINT Loop 2 FAILSAFE Loop 2 PV RATE OF CHANGE Loop 2 LOOP BREAK Loop 1 NOTE 3 LOOP BREAK Loop 2 NOTE 3 ALARM ON TOTALIZER VALUE HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE TIMER 1 VALUE HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE TIMER 2 VALUE HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE TIMER 3 VALUE HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE COUNTER 1 VALUE HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE COUNTER 2 VALUE HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE COUNTER 3 VALUE ATTENTION NOTE 1 When the controller is configured for Three Position Step Control alarms set for Output will not function NOTE 2 Not available if Timer is enabled because Alarm 1 is dedicated to Timer output NOTE 3 When enabled the control outpu
30. The controller s output decreases as the process variable increases The local setpoint will automatically adjust itself to be within the setpoint limit range For example if SP 1500 and the SP HiLIM is changed to 1200 the new local setpoint will be 1200 OUT RATE ENABLE DISABL OUTPUT CHANGE RATE Enables or disables the Output Change Rate The maximum rate is set at prompt PCT M UP or PCT M DN Only available for PID A PID B PD MR control algorithms ENABLE Allows output rate DISABLE Disables output rate PCT M UP 0 to 9999 per minute OUTPUT RATE UP VALUE This selection limits the rate at which the output can change upward Enter a value in percent per minute Appears only if OUT RATE is enabled 0 means no output rate applied PCT M DN to 9999 per minute OUTPUT RATE DOWN VALUE This selection limits the rate at which the output can change downward Enter a value in percent per minute Appears only if OUT RATE is enabled 0 means no output rate OUTHIiLIM 5 0 to 105 of output HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT This is the highest value of output beyond which you do not want the controller automatic output to exceed Use 0 to 100 for digital output type Use 5 to 105 for current output OUTLoLIM 5 0 to 105 of output LOW OUTPUT LIMIT This is the lowest value of output below which you do not want the controller automatic output to exceed Use 0 to 100 for digital
31. ToBEGIN Reset SP DISABL SEG9RAMP Ramp Time 9 0 Program SEG1RAM Ramp Time 1 1 hr SG10SP Soak SP 10 400 P SEG2SP Soak SP 2 300 SG10 TIME Soak Time 10 Ohr 30 min SEG2TIME Soak Time 2 1hr 30 min SG11RAMP Ramp Time 11 3hrs 30min SEG3RAM Ramp Time 3 Thr SG12SP Soak SP 12 200 P SEGASP Soak SP 4 400 SG12TIME Soak Time 12 Ohr 30 min 204 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Program Record Sheet Draw your ramp soak profile on the record sheet shown in Figure 6 2 and fill in the associated information in the blocks provided This will give you a permanent record of your program and will assist you when entering the Setpoint data Figure 6 2 Program Record Sheet ESSE ge pe np pep p n ST Mf npn p qoe pg pe dep Prompt Function Segment Value Prompt Function Segment Value STRT SEG Start Seg SEGATIME Soak Time 4 END SEG End Seg SEG5RAMP Ramp Time 5 RAMPUNIT Engr Unit for SEG6 SP Soak SP 6 Ramp RECYCLES Number of SEG6TIME Soak Time 6 Recycles SOAK DEV Deviation SEG7RAMP Ramp Time 7 Value PROG END Controller SEG8SP Soak SP 8 Status STATE Controller SEG8TIME Soak Time 8 State at end ToBEGIN Reset SP SEG9RAMP Ramp Time 9 Program SEG1RAM Ramp Time 1 SG10 SP Soak SP 10 P SEG2SP Soak SP 2 SG10 TIME Soak Time 10 SEG2TIME Soak Time 2 SG11RAMP Ramp Time 11 SEG3RAM Ramp Time 3 SG12 SP Soak SP 12 P
32. algorithm PD WITH MANUAL RESET in the Algorithm Set Up group Because a proportional controller will not necessarily line out at setpoint there will be a deviation offset from setpoint This eliminates the offset and lets the PV line out at setpoint Bias appears on the lower display PROPBD2 or GAIN 2 0 1 to 9999 or 0 001 to 1000 RATE2MIN 0 00 to 10 00 minutes 0 08 or less OFF RSET2MIN RSET2RPM 0 02 to 50 00 PROPORTIONAL BAND 2 or GAIN 2 RATE 2 and RESET 2 parameters are the same as previously described for Heat except that they refer to the cool zone tuning constants on duplex models or the second set of PID constants whichever is pertinent ATTENTION Set 2 Tuning Parameters are not available when the Accutune selection for Loop 1 is SP PV CYC SEC or CYC SX3 1 to 120 ATTENTION If 1 3 second increments are used value of 120 33 seconds x 120 40 seconds maximum CYCLE TIME HEAT determines the length of one time proportional output relay cycle Defined as HEAT cycle time for Heat Cool applications CYC SEC Electromechanical relays CYC SX3 Solid state relays Cycle times are in either second or 1 3 second increments depending upon the configuration of RLY TYPE in the Output Algorithm Set Up group CYC2 SEC or CYC2 SX3 1 to 120 ATTENTION If 1 3 second increments are used value of 120 33 seconds x 120 40 seconds maximum
33. low level signal 4 20 mA Digital I O and computer interface circuits Refer to the Severe Electrical Noise Environments Appendix for additional information We recommend that you review the specifications and adhere to the operating limits listed in Table 2 1 when you install your controller Table 2 1 Specifications Design Input Accuracy 0 20 of span typical 1 digit for display Field calibratable to 0 05 of span typical 15 bit resolution typical Sampling Rate Inputs sampled six times a second Temperature Stability 0 01 of Full Scale C change typical Input Signal Failure Protection Thermocouple Inputs Upscale or downscale burnout Burnout Current 0 13 microamps Failsafe Output Level Configurable 0 100 Input Impedance 4 20 Milliampere Input 250 ohms 0 10 Volt Input 200K ohms All Other 10 megohms Maximum Lead Wire Resistance Thermocouples 100 ohms leg 100 200 and 500 RTD 100 ohms leg 100 ohm Low RTD 10 ohms leg Stray Rejection Common Mode AC 50 or 60 Hz 120 dB with maximum source impedance of 100 ohms or 1 LSB least significant bit whichever is greater with line voltage applied DC 120 dB with maximum source impedance of 100 ohms or a 1 LSB whichever is greater with 120 Vdc applied DC to 1 KHz 80 dB with maximum source of impedance of 100 ohms or 1 LSB whichever is greater with 50 Vac applied Normal Mode AC 50 or 60 Hz 60
34. no auto ranging XXX X XXX X One Place XX XX XX XX Two Places X XXX X XXX Three Places ATTENTION Auto ranging will occur for selections of one two or three places DECIMAL2 DECIMAL POINT LOCATION FOR LOOP 2 This selection determines where the decimal point appears in the display for Loop 2 XXXX XXXX No Decimal Place fixed no auto ranging XXX X XXX X One Place XX XX XX XX Two Places X XXX X XXX Three Places ATTENTION Auto ranging will occur for selections of one two or three places TEMP UNIT TEMPERATURE UNITS FOR BOTH LOOPS This selection will affect the indication and operation DEG F DEG F Degrees Fahrenheit DEG C DEG C Degrees Centigrade NONE NONE No display of units PWR FREQ 60 HZ POWER LINE FREQUENCY Select whether your 50 HZ controller is operating at 50 or 60 Hertz ATTENTION For controllers powered by 24 Vdc this configuration should be set to the AC line frequency used to produce the 24 Vdc supply Incorrect setting of this parameter can cause normal mode noise problems in the input readings RATIO 2 INPUT 2 RATIO This enables the Ratio for Input 2 to be set from the front panel Input 2 must be installed and enabled for this configuration to operate DISABL DISABLE Disables setting Ratio 2 from front panel ENABLE ENABLE Allows the Ratio for Input 2 to be set through the keyboard 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 139 Lower Display Upper Display Param
35. these groups that are shown in the Prompt Hierarchy in Figure 3 1 The Set Up groups and Function parameters are listed in the order of their appearance The list includes the name of the prompt the range of setting selections available the factory setting and the section to reference for further details if necessary If you need a detailed explanation of any prompt listed refer to Section 4 Configuration Parameter Definitions Section 4 lists the Set Up and Function prompts the selections or range of settings that you can make for each plus a detailed explanation or definition of each parameter Located on the last page of this section is a Configuration Record Sheet When you make your configuration selections record them on this sheet Then you will have a record of how the controller was configured 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 39 3 4 Introduction Configuration Tips Listed below in Table 3 1 are some tips that will help you enter the configuration data more quickly Table 3 1 Configuration Tips Function Tip Displaying Groups Use the SET UP key to display the Set Up groups The group titles are listed in this section in the order that they appear in the controller Displaying Use the FUNCTION key to display the individual parameters under each group The Functions prompts are listed in the order of their appearance in each group Scrolling To get t
36. 0 00 RSET2MIN 1 00 RSET4MIN 1 0 or or RSET2RPM RSET4RPM CYC SEC 20 CYC3 SEC 20 or or CYC SX3 20 CYC3 SX3 20 CYC2 SEC 20 CYC4 SEC 20 or or CYC2 SX3 20 CYC4 SX3 20 SECURITY 0 PVEUVAL1 0 LOCKOUT CALIB PVEUVAL2 0 AUTO MAN ENABLE PVEUVAL3 0 SP SEL ENABLE PVEUVAL4 0 RUN HOLD ENABLE PVEUVAL5 0 PVEUVAL1 0 PVEUVAL6 0 PVEUVAL2 0 PVEUVAL7 0 PVEUVAL3 0 PVEUVAL8 0 PVEUVAL4 0 GAINVAL1 1 000 PVEUVAL5 0 GAINVAL2 1 000 PVEUVAL6 0 GAINVAL3 1 000 PVEUVAL7 0 GAINVAL4 1 000 PVEUVAL8 0 GAINVAL5 1 000 GAINVAL1 1 000 GAINVAL6 1 000 GAINVAL2 1 000 GAINVAL7 1 000 GAINVAL3 1 000 GAINVAL8 1 000 GAINVAL4 1 000 GAINVAL5 1 000 GAINVAL6 1 000 SP RAMP SP RAMP DISABL GAINVAL7 1 000 TIME MIN 3 GAINVAL8 1 000 FINAL SP 1000 SP RATE DISABL EU HR UP 0 EU HR DN 0 EU HRUP2 0 EU HRDN2 0 SP PROG DISABL 74 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Group Function Value or Factory Group Function Value or Factory Prompt Prompt Selection Setting Prompt Prompt Selection Setting ACCUTUNE FUZZY DISABL ALGORITHM 8SEG CH2 DISABL ACCUTUNE DISABL continued X0 VALU2 0 ACCUTUN2 DISABL X1 VALU2 0 SP CHANG 10 X2 VALU2 0 KPG 1 00 X3 VALU2 0 SP CHAN2 10 X4 VALU2 0 KPG 2 1 00 X5 VALU2 0 CRITERIA FAST X6 VALU2 0 CRITERA2 FAST X7 VALU2 0 ATERROR Read Only NONE X8 VALU2 0 or YO VALU2 0 AT ERR2 NONE Y1 VALU2 0 Y2 VALU2 0 Y3 VALU2 0 ALGORTHM CONT ALG PIDA Y4 VALU2 0 PIDLOOPS 10r2 Y5 VALU2 0 CONT2ALG PID A Y6 VALU2 0 OUT OVR
37. 0 59 minutes SEG3RAMP or Same as above Selections are same as above SEG3RATE SEG4 SP SEG4TIME SEG5RAMP or SEG5RATE SEG6 SP SEG6TIME SEG7RAMP or SEG7RATE SEG8 SP SEG8TIME SEG9RAMP or SEG9RATE SG10 SP SG10TIME SG11RAMP or SG11RATE SG12 SP SG12TIME 48 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 9 Accutune Set Up Group Introduction The Accutune Set Up group offers these selections FUZZY Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression Uses fuzzy logic to suppress or eliminate any overshoot that may occur when the PV approaches setpoint TUNE Demand Tuning The tuning process is initiated through the operator interface keys or via a digital input if configured The algorithm then calculates new tuning parameters and enters them in the tuning group TUNE does operate with 3 Position Step Control SP SP Tuning SP tuning continuously adjusts the PID parameters in response to setpoint changes You can select tuning on minimum setpoint changes of 5 up to 15 span Perform SP tuning after you have configured the controller SP tuning does not operate with 3 Position Step Control algorithm TUN PV or SP PV PV Tuning The TUNE Demand Tuning or the SP Setpoint Tuning portions of these selections work as stated above PV Adapt will occur during Process Variable PV disturbances 0 3 span or larger which result from non linearities process dynamics load changes or other operating conditions When this co
38. 1 to OXYGEN Input 1 will automatically become OXYGEN For Dewpoint control set Input Algorithm 1 or Input Algorithm 2 to DEW PT Input 1 will automatically become CARBON The availability of Dewpoint on Input Algorithm 2 provides the capability of controlling Carbon Potential on Loop 1 and also reading the Dewpoint value from the same probe CO Compensation Receives external CO transmitter signal via Input 3 to provide online compensation fo the carbon calculation Requires that the Input 2 temperature signal be a transmitter type input 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 199 5 23 HealthWatch Introduction The HealthWatch feature puts diagnostic data at your fingertips so you can monitor vital performance status to improve your process predict failures and minimize downtime Valuable data regarding maintenance and diagnostic selections can be read by operator accessed displays Alarms can be configured to activate when the desired threshold is reached See Section 4 18 Maintenance for details on using the various HealthWatch timers and counters See Section 4 15 Alarms for details on HealthWatch maintenance alarms 200 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Section 6 Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming Option 6 1 Overview What is programming The term programming is used here to identify the process for selecting Review program data and configuration Fill out the worksheet What s in this se
39. 179 Integration rates 190 Internal Cascade control 168 Internal cascade indication 76 Key functions 4 L Line voltage wiring 9 Local setpoint source 116 122 156 Lockout 0 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group 115 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 78 Loop break 136 Loopback 134 Low scaling factor 96 Low select 95 Lower display key 149 Maintenance counters 140 timers 140 Maintenance Group 70 Manual mode 54 Manual reset 79 Manual tuning formulas 269 Manual tuning procedure 268 Manual Auto key lockout 50 Mass flow orifice constant K for math selections 96 Math algorithms 94 179 Monitoring two loop control 176 Mounting Overall dimensions 3 Mounting method 4 Mounting procedure 4 Multiplier 95 Multiplier divider 95 Multiplier divider with square root 95 Multiplier with square root 95 O Open Collector Output Connections 25 Operating limits 8 Operating parameters 149 Operation of two loop control 177 Operator interface 3 Options Set Up Group 126 Output algorithm 707 109 Output change rate 118 124 272 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Index Output override 177 Output override 2 PID loops only 149 Output Override 93 Output rate down value 118 124 Output rate up value 1 8 124 Override selector 171 Oxygen 96 P Parity 133 PD with manual reset 97 95 Percent carbon source 97 Physical considerations
40. 2 to override Output 1 TO RSP RSP annunciator blinks Selects remote setpoint DL1 2 Displays loop not being displayed at time of closure RST FB Allows Input 2 to override the internal reset value providing external reset feedback ToPURG MAN blinks and output Forces loop to manual mode with the output values set to the Output value shows in lower High Limit configuration display LoFIRE MAN blinks and output Forces loop to manual mode with the output set to the Output Low value shows in lower Limit configuration display MAN LT Forces loop to manual mode This is a momentary switch input therefore no action occurs when the switch is opened To return to automatic mode press the MANUAL AUTO key RESiot Resets the accumulated totalizer value Opening the switch has no effect 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 183 Keyboard operation Front panel keys have no effect on the digital input action in the closed state Digital inputs 1 2 Digital Input combination selections listed in Table 5 31 can be used combination selections in combination with the digital inputs 1 and 2 listed in Table 5 30 Refer to Section 3 Configuration and make your selections under the Options Set Up group function prompt DIG 1 COMB or DIG 2 COMB When 2 loop or cascade control is configured digital input 1 operates on Loop 1 and digital input 2 operates on Loop 2 unless otherwise noted Table 5 31 Di
41. 2000 F DEW PT DEWPOINT OF CARBONIZING ATMOSPHERE Use this selection if you are using any Zirconium Oxide Carbon Probe and you want to measure the atmosphere in terms of Dewpoint The range is 50 to 100 F or 48 to 38 C This algorithm requires a temperature range within the region of 1000 to 2200 F OXYGEN PERCENT OXYGEN RANGE Make this selection if you are using a Zirconium Oxide Oxygen Probe to measure Percent of Oxygen in a range of 0 to 40 Oo This algorithm requires a temperature range within the region of 800 to 3000 F ATTENTION The Carbon and Dewpoint selections will automatically set the first input actuation to Carbon The Oxygen selection will automatically set the first input actuation to Oxygen MATHK 0 001 to 1000 floating WEIGHTED AVERAGE RATIO OR MASS FLOW ORIFICE CONSTANT K FOR MATH SELECTIONS Only applicable for algorithms W AVG or General Math selections MuDIV MULT MuDIV or MULT CALC HI 999 to 9999 floating in engineering units CALCULATED VARIABLE HIGH SCALING FACTOR FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 1 Used only when either Summer Input Hi Lo or one of the General Math functions was selected as the Input Algorithm Range is used for either PV or RSP depending upon Algorithm application CALC LO 999 to 9999 floating in engineering units CALCULATED VARIABLE LOW SCALING FACTOR FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 1 Used only when either Summer Input H
42. 217 Thermocouple inputs using a precision resistor 218 RTD Resistance Thermometer Device inputs 219 Radiamatic Millivolts or Volts except 0 10 Volts 220 inputs 01010 Volts input 221 4 20 Milliamps input 222 7 5 Input 1 2 or 3 Calibration Procedure 223 7 6 Restoring Factory Calibration 225 A WARNING SHOCK HAZARD A INPUT CALIBRATION MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE CALIBRATION 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 213 7 2 Minimum and Maximum Range Values Select the range values You should calibrate the controller for the minimum 0 and maximum 100 range values of your particular sensor If you have a two input controller calibrate each input separately Select the Voltage or Resistance equivalent for 0 and 100 range values from Table 7 1 Use these value when calibrating your controller Table 7 1 Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0 and 100 Range Values PV Input Range Range Values Sensor Type oF C 0 100 Thermocouples B 0 to 3300 18 to 1816 0 100 mV 13 769 mV E 454 to 1832 270 to 1000 9 835 mV 76 373 mV E low 200 to 1100 129 to 593 6 472 mV 44 455 mV J 0 to 1600 18 to871 0 886 mV 50 060 mV J low 20 to 770 7 to41
43. 22 and 24 Terminals for Input 2 are 23 and 24 220 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 0 to 10 volt inputs Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of Input 1 or 2 See Figure 7 6 Figure 7 6 Wiring Connections for 0 to 10 Volt Inputs Input 1 Copper Leads 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 221 4 to 20 mA inputs Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of Input 1 2 or 3 See Figure 7 7 Figure 7 7 Wiring Connections for 4 to 20 mA inputs 2502 resistor assy Copper Leads 4 to 20mA Source Input 3 Wire terminals as shown below 4 to 20 mA Source eer 222 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 7 5 Introduction Input 1 2 or 3 Calibration Procedure Apply power and allow the controller to warm up for 15 minutes before you calibrate Read Set Up Wiring before beginning the procedure Make sure you have LOCKOUT set to NONE See Section 3 Configuration from initial For linear inputs avoid step changes in inputs Vary smoothly value to final 100 value Procedure The Calibration procedure for Input 1 2 or 3 is listed in Table 7 5 Table 7 5 Input 1 2 or 3 Calibration Procedure Step Description Press Action 1 Enter Calibration Mode until you see SET UP Upper Display Lower Display INP
44. 3 must be enabled ONLINE PCT CO Percent Carbon Monoxide 0 020 to 0 350 fractional percent of 0 200 CO ATM PRES Atmospheric Pressure 590 0 to 760 0 mm Hg 760 0 Compensation ALG1BIAS Input Algorithm1 Bias 999 to 9999 floating in engineering 0 000 units INP ALG2 Input 2 Algorithm NONE LO SEL NONE formulas are located in W AVG VMuDIV Section 4 F FWD VMULT FFWDMu MuDIV ATTENTION All Input A B C MULT Algorithms operate in HI SEL DEW PT engineering units except feedforward which operates in percent of range units MATH K2 Weighted Average Ratio or K 0 001 to 1000 Sie Constant for Math Selections 52 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display CALC HI Calculated Variable High 999 To 9999 Floating Scaling Factor for Input in engineering units Algorithm 2 CALC LO Calculated Variable Low 999 To 9999 Floating Scaling Factor for Input in engineering units Algorithm 2 ALG2 INA Input Algorithm 2 INP 1 IN AL1 Input A Selection INP 2 IN AL2 LP1OUT INP 3 LP2OUT ALG2 INB Input Algorithm 2 INP 1 IN AL1 Input B Selection INP 2 IN AL2 LP1OUT INP 3 LP2OUT ALG2 INC Input Algorithm 2 NONE LP2OUT Input C Selection INP 1 IN AL1 INP 2 IN AL2 LP1OUT INP 3 PCT H2 Hydrogen Content for 1 0 to 99 096 1 0 Dewpoint ALG2 BIAS Input Algorithm2 Bia
45. 3300 controller has a Position Proportional control output control calibrate the controller so that the increase and decrease relays operate properly with respect to the position of the external feedback slidewire Three position step Three Position Step Control Output Models with Motor Position control Indication Model Numbers DC330X EE XXX X2 DC330X AA XXX 02 This model must have its output calibrated per the entire procedure to ensure the displayed output slidewire position agrees with the final control element position Three Position Step Control Output Models without Motor Position Indication Model Numbers 330X EE XXX X0 DC330X AA XXX X0 This model only requires that the Motor Time be entered as shown in the calibration procedure FULL CALIBRATION IS NOT REQUIRED Equipment needed None Connections Apply power and allow the controller to warm up 30 minutes before you calibrate Leave all field wiring connected to the rear terminals Auto mode vs manual There are two ways in which to calibrate Position Proportional or 3 mode Position Step control AUTO mode or MANUAL mode Rules for auto mode vs The Auto mode selection must be done at least once before the manual manual mode mode will operate properly Failure to use the Auto mode procedure will prevent the controller from going into automatic control mode Displayed values During the Auto mode calibration procedure the values being displayed are used only to indi
46. 4 6 Algorithm Data Set Up 90 4 7 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up 107 4 8 Input 1 Parameters Set Up 110 4 9 Input 2 Parameters Set Up 113 4 10 Input 3 Parameters Set Up 114 4 11 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group 115 4 12 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group 121 4 13 Options Set Up Group ssssssssssssseeeeenennenn enne 126 4 14 Communications Set Up 132 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4 15 Alarms Set Up O OUD s nec edet tu E 135 4 16 Display Parameters Set Up 139 417 Calibration Data ert ett Ee dise e tpe eerta 140 4 18 Maintenance Set Up 140 4 19 Status Test ee rette me mtt Po det be 142 SECTION 5 OPERATION enirn rain aa trn nno Rr enne rape 143 EET ERR 143 5 2 How to Power Up the 144 5 3 Entering a Security 146 5 4 Monitoring Your 0 0 0 eene 147 5 5 Start up Procedure
47. Action 1 In Manual Mode adjust the output to bring the PV Process Variable near the desired value Set the Rate time to 0 minutes and set the Reset time to the maximum value 50 00 minutes or set repeats min to the minimum value to minimize reset action If applicable set the CYCLE TIME to 4 seconds and DEADBAND to 0 5 Increase GAIN decrease PB significantly Try a factor of 10 Adjust the local setpoint to equal PV and switch to Automatic control mode Increase the setpoint by 5 or 1096 and observe the process variable response If the PV oscillates continue to Step 7 If it does not oscillate return to the original setpoint and increase GAIN decrease PB again by a factor of 2 and repeat Step 5 Compare the oscillations with the figure below Pattern A Pattern B Pattern C Amplitude Process Variable Time for one cycle Time 20778 If the oscillation matches pattern A go to Step 8 If the oscillation matches pattern B increase GAIN decrease PB by a factor of 2 and repeat Steps 4 to 6 If the oscillation matches pattern C decrease GAIN increase PB by a factor of 0 8 and repeat Steps 4 to 6 The amplitude of the cycle is immaterial but all of the elements of the loop must be within the operating range i e the valve must not go full open or closed Record the current value of GAIN or PB and measure and record the value of time for one completed oscillation
48. CYCLE TIME 2 COOL is the same as above except it applies to Duplex models as the cycle time in the COOL zone of Heat Cool applications or for the second set of PID constants CYC2 SEC Electromechanical relays CYC2 SX3 Solid state relays Cycle times are in either second or 1 3 second increments depending upon the configuration of RLY TYPE in the Output Algorithm Set Up group 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 79 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition SECURITY 0 to 4095 SECURITY CODE The level of keyboard lockout may be changed in the Set Up mode Knowledge of a security code may be required to change from one level to another Select this number here copy it and keep it in a secure location Entering 0 disables the security code feature NOTE The Security Code is for keyboard entry only and is not available via communications Can only be changed if LOCKOUT selection is NONE LOCKOUT NONE CALIB CONF VIEW MAX LOCKOUT applies to one of the functional groups Configuration Calibration Tuning Accutune DO NOT CONFIGURE UNTIL ALL CONFIGURATION IS COMPLETE NONE No lockout all groups are read write CALIB AII groups are available for read write except for the Calibration and Keyboard Lockout groups CONF Tuning SP Ramp and Accutune groups are read write All other groups are read only
49. Calibration and Keyboard Lockout groups are not available VIEW Tuning and Setpoint Ramp parameters are read write No other parameters are viewable MAX Tuning and Setpoint Ramp parameters are available for read only No other parameters are viewable AUTO MAN DISABL ENABLE MANUAL AUTO KEY LOCKOUT Allows you to disable the Manual Auto key Disable Enable Can only be viewed if LOCKOUT is configured for NONE SP SEL DISABL ENABLE SETPOINT SELECT KEY LOCKOUT Allows you to disable the Setpoint Select key Disable Enable Can only be viewed if LOCKOUT is configured for NONE RUN HOLD DISABL ENABLE RUN HOLD KEY LOCKOUT Allows you to disable the Run Hold key for either SP Ramp or SP Program The Run Hold key is never disabled when used to acknowledge a latched alarm 1 Disable Enable Can only be viewed if LOCKOUT is configured for NONE 80 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection PVEUVAL1 PV1 Value for Gain Gain Scheduling allows you to schedule eight user defined Scheduling Gain Values GAINVALn applied over eight user defined PV bands PVEUVALn PVEUVAL2 PV2 Value for Gain Scheduling PVEUVALL1 is the first PV value to be used in the schedule Enter a value in engineering units that is with
50. Depending on the protocol selected the device address parity and baud rate are configurable You can also set the SHED output mode and setpoint recall and communication units Up to 99 addresses can be configured over this link The number of units that can be configured depends on the protocol chosen RS 422 485 15 drops maximum e DMCS 31 drops maximum Modbus 15 drops or 31 for shorter link length maximum Table 4 13 lists all the function prompts in the Communications Set Up group and their definitions Table 4 13 Communications Group Definitions Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Parameter Range of Setting Definition or Selection ComSTATE COMMUNICATIONS SELECTION DISABL DISABLE Disables the communications option RS422 RS 422 485 Allows RS422 485 ASCII communication prompts MODBUS MODBUS Allows Modbus RTU communication prompts MB3K MB3K Allows the UDC3300 to emulate the UDC3000A Modbus protocol Com ADDR 1 to 99 COMMUNICATIONS STATION ADDRESS LOOP 1 This is a number that is assigned to a controller that is to be used with the communications option This number will be its address ComADDR2 1 to 99 COMMUNICATIONS STATION ADDRESS LOOP 2 This is a number that is assigned to a controller that is to be used with the communications option This number will be its address When ComSTATE MODBUS ComADDR2 Com ADDR ATTENTION If RS 422 485 addresses on both loops
51. Factory calibration cyclic redundancy test calibration test passed FAIL Factory set input constants 1 Cycle through Status to clear the error 2 Check the calibration Make sure 0 and 100 are correct values 3 Recalibrate if step 1 is unsatisfactory Refer to Section 7 Input Calibration 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 243 9 5 Introduction Background tests Background Tests The UDC 3300 performs on going background tests to verify data and memory integrity If there is a malfunction an error message will be displayed blinking in the lower display In the case of more than one simultaneous malfunction only the one with the highest priority will appear in the lower display Table 9 6 lists these background tests the reason for their failure and how to correct the problem Table 9 6 Background Tests Lower Reason for Failure How to Correct the Problem Display EE FAIL Unable to write to non volatile memory 1 Check the accuracy of the parameter and re enter Anytime ae itis 2 Try to change something in configuration not accepted see 3 Run through STATUS tests to re write to EEPROM FAILSAFE This error message shows whenever the 1 Run through STATUS check to determine the or controller goes into a failsafe mode of reason for the failure FAILSF2 operation This will happen if 2 RAM test failed 2 Press the
52. General Math selections MuDIV MULT or MULT CALC HI 999 to 9999 floating CALCULATED VARIABLE HIGH SCALING FACTOR in engineering units FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 2 Does not apply to Feedforward algorithms Range is used for either PV or RSP depending upon Algorithm application CALC LO 999 to 9999 floating CALCULATED VARIABLE LOW SCALING FACTOR in engineering units FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 2 Does not apply to Feedforward algorithms Range is used for either PV or RSP depending upon Algorithm application ALG2 INA ALGORITHM 2 INPUT A SELECTION will represent one of the available selections INP 1 Input 1 INP 2 Input 2 LP1OUT Output 1 NOTE 1 2 Output 2 IN AL1 Input Algorithm 1 IN AL2 Input Algorithm 2 INP 3 Input 3 ALG2 INB ALGORITHM 2 INPUT B SELECTION will represent one of the available selections INP 1 Input 1 INP 2 Input 2 LP1OUT Output 1 NOTE 1 2 Output 2 IN AL1 Input Algorithm 1 IN AL2 Input Algorithm 2 INP 3 Input 3 ALG2 INC ALGORITHM 2 INPUT C SELECTION will represent one of the available selections NONE None INP 1 Input 1 INP 2 Input 2 LP1OUT Output 1 NOTE 1 2 Output 2 IN AL1 Input Algorithm 1 IN AL2 Input Algorithm 2 INP 3 Input 3 98 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection PCT H2 1 0 to 99 0 Hs HYDROGEN CONTENT FOR DEWPOINT is on
53. Loops Automatic with Local Setpoint One or Two Loops Automatic with Remote Setpoint One or Two Loops Manual Cascade Automatic Cascade The manual and automatic control modes with Local and Remote setpoint are standard with the instrument cascade control is optional Mode definitions Table 5 7 lists the available modes and their definitions Table 5 7 Operating Mode Definitions Operating Mode Definition MANUAL In the manual mode the operator directly controls the controller output level The process variable and the percent output are displayed The configured High and Low Output Limits are disregarded and the operator can change the output value using the increment and decrement keys to the limits allowed by the output type 0 to 100 for a time proportioning output or 5 to 105 for a current output AUTOMATIC with LOCAL SETPOINT In automatic local mode the controller operates from the local setpoints and automatically adjusts the output to maintain the setpoint at the desired value In this mode you can adjust the setpoint See Section 5 7 Setpoints AUTOMATIC with REMOTE SETPOINT In automatic remote mode the controller operates from the setpoint measured at the Remote setpoint input Adjustments are available to ratio this input and add a constant bias before it is applied to the control equation See Section 3 Configuration Control Set up group MANUAL CASCADE In the manua
54. NONE No algorithm configured W AVG WEIGHTED AVERAGE When you configure for Weighted Average the controller will compute a PV or SP for the control algorithm from the following equation Input A x Ratio A Bias A K x Input B x Ratio B Bias B 1 K Both Inputs must have the same range in engineering units F FWRD FEEDFORWARD SUMMER Feedforward uses Input following a Ratio and Bias calculation as a value summed directly with the PID computed output value and sent as an output value to the final control element Applies to Loop 1 only NOTE 1 This algorithm will only function in automatic mode The following formula applies Controller Output PID Output Input A x Ratio A Bias A x 100 Input A Range 94 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition PV PV Input A x PV Kx FFWDMu Controller Output PI FEEDFORWARD MULTIPLIER Feedforward uses Input A following a Ratio and Bias calculation as a value multiplied directly with the PID computed output value and sent as an output value to the final control element NOTE 1 The following formula applies D Output x Input A x Ratio A Bias A Input A Range RELHUM RELATIVE HUMIDITY Input 1 reads the wet bulb temperature Input 2 reads the dry bulb temperature Both inputs mus
55. Panel 24 with optional 945 Thickness mE 093 rear cov r Ll dl i de de hd AAA EEA UEFA 90 7 3 57 21 con 850 EA 24152 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 13 Mounting method Before mounting the controller refer to the nameplate on the inside of the case and make a note of the model number It will help later when selecting the proper wiring configuration Figure 2 3 shows you the mounting method for the UDC 3300 controller Figure 2 3 Mounting Method Mounting procedure Refer to Figure 2 3 and follow the procedure in Table 2 2 to mount the controller Table 2 2 Procedure for Mounting the Controller Step Action 1 Mark and cut out the controller hole in the panel according to the dimension information in Figure 2 2 2 Remove the screw cover and loosen the screw on the front of the controller Pull the chassis out of the case 3 Orient the case properly and slide it through the panel hole from the front 4 Remove the mounting kit from the shipping container and install the kit as follows Install the screws into the threaded holes of the clips Insert the prongs of the clips into the two holes in the top and bottom of the case e Tighten both screws to secure the case against the panel e Carefully slide the chassis assembly into the case press to close and tighten the screw Replace the screw cover 14 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 2 4 Wiring E
56. Power input board Follow the procedure listed in Table 9 20 to replace the Power Input board P N 51309404 502 90 to 264 Vac or 51309404 501 24 Vac dc Table 9 20 Power Input Board Replacement Procedure Step Action 1 Remove the chassis from the case See Figure 9 1 Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis See Figure 9 3 Lay the boards flat and identify the Power Input board See Figure 9 4 2 3 4 Remove the 2nd Input board if present See procedure in Table 9 19 Remove the transformer connections to the Digital Input board and Auxiliary Output Communications board if present Remove the connector from plug WG if present current output models only Slide a small screwdriver under the connector and lift the release Replace the Power Input board Reinstall WG connector and transformer connections to Digital Input board and Auxiliary Output Communications board if present Reinstall the 2nd Input board See procedure in Table 9 19 Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis Make sure the connections to the display keyboard assembly are made and that the release points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards 11 Reinstall the chassis into the case Push in hard then tighten screw 260 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Digital input board Follow the procedure listed in Table 9 21 to replace t
57. Ramp Rate Ramp Time 0 99hrs 0 59min or SEG5RATE Ramp Rate EU MIN or EU HR SEG6 SP Segment 6 Soak Setpoint Enter Value Within the Setpoint Value limits SEG6TIME Segment 6 Soak Duration Enter Value 0 99hrs 0 59min SEG7RAMP Segment 7 Ramp Time Enter Value or Segment 7 Ramp Rate Ramp Time 0 99hrs 0 59min or SEG7RATE Ramp Rate EU MIN or EU HR SEG8 SP Segment 8 Soak Setpoint Enter Value Within the Setpoint Value limits SEG8TIME Segment 8 Soak Duration Enter Value 0 99hrs 0 59min SEG9RAMP Segment 9 Ramp Time Enter Value or or Ramp Time 0 99hrs 0 59min or SEG9RATE Segment 49 Ramp Rate Ramp Rate EU MIN or EU HR SG10 SP Segment 10 Soak Setpoint Enter Value Within the Setpoint Value limits SG10TIME Segment 10 Soak Enter Value 0 99hrs 0 59min Duration SG11RAMP Segment 11 Ramp Time Enter Value or or Ramp Time 0 99hrs 0 59min or SG11RATE Segment 11 Ramp Rate Ramp Rate EU MIN or EU HR SG12 SP Segment 12 Soak Setpoint Enter Value Within the Setpoint Value limits SG12TIME Segment 12 Soak Enter Value 0 99hrs 0 59min Duration 208 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 6 5 Introduction Run Monitor the Program Make sure all the SP PROG function prompts under the Set Up group SP RAMP have been configured with the required data An will appear in the upper display indicating that the program is in the HOLD state Run monitor functio
58. Reset was calculated CURRENT ACCUTUNE PROCESS ABORTED Caused by one of the following conditions changing to manual mode digital input detected changing SP while PV error tune in progress in heat region of output but a cool output is calculated or vice versa LOW PV PV not changed sufficiently or the PV has increased by more than 4 and Deadtime not determined Applies to SP and SP PV tuning only 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 89 4 6 Algorithm Data Set Up Group Introduction Algorithm group prompts This data deals with various algorithms residing in the controller Control algorithms Input Math algorithms selecting the 1 or 2 PID Loops Output Override 2 Eight Segment Characterizers the Timer function and Totalizer function Gain Scheduling ATTENTION Math option two algorithms two characterizers totalizer and Two Loops of Control are only available on Expanded Model DC330E Table 4 5 lists all the function prompts in the Algorithm Set Up group and their definitions Table 4 5 Algorithm Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection CONT ALG The CONTROL ALGORITHM lets you select the type of control that is best for your process ON OFF ON OFF is the simplest control type The output can be either ON 100 or OFF 0 The Process Variable PV is compared with the setpoin
59. SOAK PROGRAM Available only with controllers that contain this option SP RAMP and SP RATE must be disabled DISABLE Disables setpoint programming ENABLE Enables setpoint programming for Loop1 only ENABL2 Enables setpoint programming for Loop 2 only ENAB12 Enables setpoint programming for both Loop 1 and Loop 2 For reasons of convenience the information for the prompts when SP PROG is enabled are included in Section 6 Setpoint Programming Option 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 85 4 5 Accutune Set Up Group Introduction Accutune group prompts Accutune continuously adjusts the PID parameters in response to process variable disturbances and or setpoint changes Also it can be used during start up without prior initialization or process knowledge Accutune offers the following selections e FUZZY Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression TUNE Demand Tuning operates with SP Ramp or SP Program or e SP Setpoint Tuning or e TUN PV Demand Tuning plus PV Adaptive Tune or SP PV Setpoint Tuning plus PV Adaptive Tune Descriptions of their functions are listed with each selection in Table 4 4 Not available on Basic Model DC330B ATTENTION Selecting Gain Scheduling in the Control or Control 2 Set Up groups automatically disables Accutune for that group Table 4 4 lists all the function prompts in the Accutune Set Up group and their definitions
60. Seconds 3 Select Automatic or until you see E FUNCTION Displ Manual Calibration LOOP 1 2 Upper Display DISABLE Lower Display POS PROP You can calibrate the controller output manually or let the controller calibrate the output automatically If the slidewire has never been calibrated you must use DO AUTO first In the Automatic Calibration Mode DO AUTO the controller relays automatically move the motor in the proper direction If desired however the motor may be manually positioned to 0 and 100 positions Disconnect the relay wires Use DO MAN In the Manual Calibration Mode DO MAN the motor does not move Instead the existing 096 and 100 values may be changed with the A or W key 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 231 Step Description Press Action or GY to select automatic or manual calibration Upper Display DO AUTO L Displ sid ower Display DO MAN If you select Then DO AUTO go to Step 4 DO MAN go to Step 6 ATTENTION When calibration is terminated this selection reverts to DISABL O 4 DO AUTO FUNCTION The decrement relay is turned on to move the motor to 0 Set 0 value LOOP 1 2 position Upper Display counts of feedback slidewire 0 to 3000 Lower Display When the motor stops the display should stop counting then go to the next step 5 DO AUTO The increment relay is turned on to move the motor to S
61. Table 7 5 Table 7 6 Table 8 1 Table 8 2 Table 8 3 Table 8 4 Table 8 5 Table 9 1 Table 9 2 Table 9 3 Table 9 4 Table 9 5 Table 9 6 Procedure for Selecting the Local Setpoint 156 Procedure for Changing the Local 157 Procedure for Enabling or Disabling the Remote Setpoint 158 Setpoint Selection 2 1 158 Procedure for Configuring a Setpoint 160 Procedure for Running a Setpoint Ramp sse 162 Procedure for Selecting Two Sets of Tuning 164 Procedure for Setting Switchover Va lUCS cccsceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeesaeeeeneeees 165 Procedure for Setting Tuning Constant 165 Procedure for Switching PID SETS from the Keyboard 166 Procedure for Displaying or Changing the Alarm 167 Control Loop Selections sse eene entere nennen snnt snnt 168 Two loop Functionality and Restrictions Model DC330E EE 2XX or Model DC330E EE 5XX cecccececeeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeaaeeeenaeeeeeesaeeeeaaeseaaeesseeeeseaeeseaaesseneeseeeess 171 Two loop Functionality and Restrictions Model DC330E KE 2XX or Model 0 5 172 Proc
62. UNITS Selects units of minutes per repeat or repeats per minute for the I term of the PID algorithm 20 Repeats per Minute 0 05 Minutes per Repeat REPEATS PER MINUTE The number of times per minute that the proportional action is repeated by reset MINUTES PER REPEAT The time between each repeat of the proportional action by reset Selection here is used for both Loop 1 and Loop 2 if available Also applies to Gain Scheduling on Loops 1 and 2 NOTE 1 Does not apply to Three Position Step Control NOTE 2 If controller is in Manual upon failure output will maintain its value at time of failure 120 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 4 12 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group Introduction Control 2 group prompts The functions listed in this group deal with how Loop 2 of a Two Loop process controller will control the process including PV source Number of tuning parameter sets Setpoint source Tracking Power up recall Setpoint limits Output direction rate and limits Dropoff Deadband and Hysteresis Only available on Expanded Model DC330E XX XXX Table 4 11 lists all the function prompts in the Control 2 Set Up group and their definitions Table 4 11 Control 2 Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection PV 2 SRC PROCESS VARIABLE 2 SOURCE Select the source of the Process Variable fo
63. User must enter the range manually per RI type and application ATTENTION Thermocouple voltages are for a reference junction temperature of 32 F 0 C 214 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 7 3 Preliminary Information Calibration steps Use the following steps when calibrating an input Step Action 1 Find the minimum and maximum range values for your PV input range from Table 7 1 2 Disconnect the field wiring and find out what equipment you will need to calibrate DO NOT remove external resistor assemblies if present 3 Wire the calibrating device to your controller according to the Set Up wiring instructions for your particular input 4 Follow the calibration procedure given for Input 1 Input 2 or Input 3 after the controller has warmed up for a minimum of 15 minutes Disconnect the field Depending on which input 1 2 or 3 you are going to calibrate tag wiring and disconnect any field wiring connected to the input terminals on the rear of the controller Figure 7 1 shows the wiring terminal designations for Input 1 Input 2 and Input 3 Figure 7 1 Inputs 1 2 and 3 Wiring Terminals Input 2 Input 3 connections connections Input 1 connections 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 215 Equipment needed Table 7 2 lists the equipment you will need to calibrate the specific types of inputs that are listed in the table You
64. a local setpoint value if no other key is pressed a minimum of 30 seconds time will elapse before the new value is stored in nonvolatile memory If power is removed before this time the new setpoint value is lost and the previous setpoint value is used at power up If after changing the LSP value another key is pressed then the value is stored immediately Table 5 11 Procedure for Changing the Local Setpoints Step Operation Press Action 1 Select the until you see SETPOINT setpoint SELECT Upper Display The PV value Lower Display 2 SP 25 or 3SP and the local setpoint value or RSP and the remote setpoint value 2 Select a different to cycle through the setpoint type menu as setpoint or the remote setpoint SETPOINT SELECT and hold in long as the key is pressed When the key is released the setpoint selection currently displayed will be the new setpoint selection Change the value o v to change the local setpoint to the value at which you want the process maintained SP 2SP or 3SP indicator will light to match the lower display ATTENTION The remote setpoint cannot be changed at the keyboard 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 157 Enabling or disabling Use the procedure in Table 5 12 to enable the remote setpoint source the remote setpoint Table 5 12 Procedure for Enabling or Disabling the Remote Setpoint Step Operation Press Action
65. appropriate diagrams for wiring your controller refer to the model number interpretation in this section The model number of the controller can be found on the inside of the case 16 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Wiring the controller Using the information contained in the model number select the appropriate wiring diagrams from the figures listed below and wire the controller accordingly Wiring Requirements Figure Composite Wiring Diagram 2 4 Line Power 90 264 Vac or 24Vac dc 2 5 Input 1 and Input 2 Wiring 2 6 Two HLAI Wiring 2 7 Time Proportional Output Electromechanical Relay Output 2 8 Solid State Relay Output 2 9 10 amp Solid State Relay Output 2 10 Open Collector Output 2 11 Current Output Universal Output Two Current and Two Relay Outputs 2 12 One Current Auxiliary and Three Relay Outputs 2 13 Position Proportional Output 2 14 Auxiliary Output Wiring 2 15 Digital Inputs Wiring 2 16 Communications Wiring RS422 485 Modbus 2 17 DMCS 2 18 Transmitter Power for 4 20 mA 2 wire Transmitters Open Collector Alarm 2 Output 2 19 Auxiliary Output 2 20 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 17 2 5 Wiring Diagrams Composite wiring Figure 2 4 is a composite wiring diagram of the UDC 3300 controller It diagram identifies the terminal designations and their functions Refer to the individual diagrams listed to wire the cont
66. controller will prompt you through the sequence of segments and associated functions A ramp segment is the time it will take to change the setpoint to the next setpoint value in the program Ramps are odd number segments Segment 1 will be the initial ramp time Ramp time is determined in either TIME Hours Minutes Range 0 99hrs 59 min or RATE EU MIN or EU HR Range 0 to 999 This selection of time or rate is made at prompt RAMP UNIT Set this prompt before entering any Ramp ATTENTION Entering 0 will imply an immediate step change in setpoint to the next soak A soak segment is a combination of soak setpoint value and a soak duration time Soaks are even number segments Segment 2 will be the initial soak value and soak time The soak setpoint range value must be within the setpoint high and low range limits in engineering units SOAK TIME is the duration of the soak and is determined in TIME Hours Minutes RANGE 0 99hrs 59 min This designates the number of the first segment Range 1 to 11 This designates the number of the last segment It must be a soak segment even number Range 2 to 12 This number allows the program to recycle a specified number of times from beginning to end Range 0 to 99 Each soak segment can have a deviation value of from 0 to 99 which guarantees the value for that segment Guaranteed soak segment values gt 0 guarantee that the segments process vari
67. cooling parameters will be entered as PID set 2 The tuning sequence will cycle the controller s output two full cycles between the high output limit and 50 for HEAT or between 50 and the low output limit for COOL while allowing only a small process variable change above and below the setpoint during each cycle To configure this item refer to Section 3 Configuration Set Up Group ACCUTUNE Function Prompt ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2 e Select TUNE or TUN PV using either or V 192 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Using TUNE at start up After TUNE or TUN PV has been enabled use the procedure in Table for duplex heat cool How SP tuning works Setpoint changes 5 36 to use TUNE at start up for duplex heat cool control Table 5 36 Procedure for Using TUNE at Start up for Duplex Step Action 1 Heat Zone Adjust Local Setpoint 1 to a value within the Heat zone Put the controller in Automatic mode Press the LOWER DISPLAY and A keys simultaneously to initiate Heat tuning The output will cycle between 50 and 100 or high output limit A large T appears in the upper display until tuning is completed and final Heat parameters are entered for PID set 1 in the Tuning group 2 Cool Zone Adjust Local Setpoint 2 to a value within the Cool zone Put the controller in Automatic mode Press the LOWER DISPLAY and A keys simultaneously to initiate Cool tuning The outpu
68. definitions are the same as in IN1 TYPE NM90 L RAD RI NIC TC LINEAR RTC SQROOT IN1 HI 999 to 9999 floating INPUT 1 HIGH RANGE VALUE in engineering units is in engineering units displayed for all inputs but can only be configured for linear or square root transmitter characterization Scale the 1 input signal to the display value you want for 100 EXAMPLE Actuation Input 4 to 20 mA Process Variable Flow Range of Flow 0 to 250 Gal Min High Range display value 250 Then 20 mA 250 Gal Min The control setpoint will be limited by the range of units selected here IN1 LO 999 to 9999 floating INPUT 1 LOW RANGE VALUE in engineering units is in engineering units displayed for all inputs but can only be configured for linear or square root transmitter characterization Scale the 1 input signal to the display value you want for 0 See example above The control setpoint for Input 1 will be limited by the range of units selected here RATIO 1 20 00 to 20 00 RATIO ON INPUT 1 Select the Ratio value you want on Floats to 3 decimal places Input 1 BIAS IN1 999 to 9999 BIAS ON INPUT 1 Bias is used to compensate the in engineering units input for drift of an input value due to deterioration of a sensor or some other cause Select the bias value you want on Input 1 FILTER 1 0 to 120 seconds FILTER FOR INPUT 1 A software digital filter is provided No filter 0 for Input 1 to smooth the input signal Y
69. depending on NONE Loop OUTLIM IDFAIL ABORT LOW PV Applies to SP and SP PV only 50 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 10 Algorithm Data Set Up Group Introduction Function prompts This data deals with various algorithms residing in the controller Control algorithms Input Math algorithms selecting the 1 or 2 PID Loops Output Override 2 Eight Segment Characterizers the Timer function and Totalizer function Gain Scheduler ATTENTION Math option two algorithms two characterizers totalizer and Two Loops of Control are only available on Expanded Model DC330E Table 3 7 lists all the function prompts in the Algorithm Set Up group Table 3 7 Algorithm Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display CONT ALG Control Algorithm ON OFF PIDA Section PIDA 4 6 PID B PD MR 3PSTEP PIDLOOPS PID Loop Selection 1 LOOP 1or2 2LOOPS NOTE 1 CASCAD CONT2ALG Control 2 Algorithm PIDA PIDA PID B NOTE 1 PD MR OUT OVRD Output Override Select DISABL DISABL HI SEL NOTE 2 LO SEL TIMER Timer Enable Disable ENABLE DISABL DISABL PERIOD Timeout Period 00 00 to 99 59 00 01 START Start Initiation KEY Run Hold key KEY ALARM2 L DISP Lower Display Selection TI REM time remaining TI REM Etime elapsed time Prompt appears only w
70. direct or reverse acting control 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 123 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection DIRECT DIRECT ACTING CONTROL The controller s output increases as the process variable increases REVRSE REVERSE ACTING CONTROL The controller s output decreases as the process variable increases OUT RATE OUTPUT CHANGE RATE Enables or disables the Output Change Rate The maximum rate is set at prompt PCT M UP or PCT M DN DISABL DISABLE Disables output rate ENABLE ENABLE Allows output rate PCT M UP 0 to 9999 per minute OUTPUT RATE UP VALUE This selection limits the rate at which the output can change upward Enter a value in percent per minute Appears only if OUT RATE is enabled 0 means no output rate applied PCT M DN 0 to 9999 per minute OUTPUT RATE DOWN VALUE This selection limits the rate at which the output can change downward Enter a value in percent per minute Appears only if OUT RATE is enabled 0 means no output rate OUT HiLIM 5 to 105 of output HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT This is the highest value of output beyond which you do not want the controller automatic output to exceed Use 0 to 100 for digital output type Use 5 to 105 for current output OUT LoLIM 5 to 105 of output LOW OUTPUT LIMIT This is the lowest value of output below which you do not want the controller automatic output
71. has been a true process change or a momentary upset It will take 1 and 1 2 process cycles around the setpoint before any process recognition can occur to an oscillating process However if no oscillation occurs Adaptive may alter the parameters to speed up or slow down the process response if it determines the time to return to the SP is excessive or too fast overshoot occurs For this configuration the controller operates with only one set of tuning parameters for each loop The second set normally used for duplex output or for keyboard PV or SP switching is not used because Adaptive tune continually updates the tuning parameters based on the PV deviation A small t is displayed in the upper display whenever PV adapt mode is in progress During this time changes to the configuration parameters are permitted Whenever the t is displayed it signifies that the process response is being monitored and this may or may not result in parameter retuning The selection of Fast or Normal criteria has no effect on PV adaptive tuning If it is necessary to stop or abort the tuning Press MANUAL AUTO key to return to manual mode This will cause an immediate abort of tuning e Disable TUN PV or SP PV in the Accutune Set Up group at function prompt ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2 Error prompt accessing When an error is detected in the Accutune process the message AT procedure ABORT will appear in the lower display In order to d
72. in nonvolatile memory once every eight hours If power is lost while the totalizer is in operation the current value of the totalizer will be lost When power is restored the totalizer will start operation for the last value stored in nonvolatile memory The Sigma display will blink to indicate this condition Reset the totalizer The totalizer can be reset from the keyboard whenever desired The totalizer should always be reset to initialize the counters whenever it is enabled otherwise the gt Sigma display will blink Refer to Section 3 Configuration Set Up group ALGORTHM function prompt TOTALIZER to select an application and the function prompts that follow TOTALIZER to enter your scale factor and rate of integration 180 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Alarm on totalizer value Totalizer reset via digital input The alarm type configuration includes an Alarm on Totalizer value This allows an alarm setpoint value to be used to cause an alarm when exceeded The alarm setpoint represents the lowest four digits of the selected Totalizer Scale Factor and has a range from 0 to 9999 x Totalizer Scale Factor The digital input type configuration includes a Reset Totalizer that resets the accumulated totalizer value when the DI is closed 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 181 5 18 Introduction Action on closure Digital Input Option Remote Switching The Digital Input option
73. number to advance to together EXAMPLE Change 2 SK XX XX to 3 RA XX XX RUN to place SP PROG into RUN mode HOLD Changing the RUN to place SP PROG into HOLD mode current segment HOLD time or setpoint in a Enter SP PROG configuration and change running SP program the segment to the new time or setpoint desired LOWER until you see X RA XXX or X SK XX XX in DISPLAY the lower display then RUN to place SP PROG into RUN mode HOLD 212 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Section 7 Input Calibration 7 1 Overview Introduction This section describes the field calibration procedures for Input 1 and Input 2 Every UDC 3300 controller contains all input actuation ranges fully factory calibrated and ready for configuration to range by the user However these procedures can be implemented if the factory calibration of the desired range is not within specifications Note that the field calibration will be lost if a change in input type configuration is implemented at a later time The original factory calibration data remains available for later use after a field calibration is done What s in this section This section contains the following topics Topic See Page 7 1 Overview 213 7 2 Minimum and maximum range values 214 7 3 Preliminary Information 215 Disconnect the field wiring 215 Equipment needed 216 7 4 Input 1 2 or 3 Set Up Wiring 217 Thermocouple inputs using an ice bath
74. of frequently asked questions and their answers dial Honeywell s Faxback 24 hour Service 1 888 423 9883 USA Or check out Honeywell s web site at http support totalplant honeywell com Table 9 2 lists the procedure for identifying the software version number Table 9 2 Procedure for Identifying the Software Version Step Operation Press Action 1 Select until you see STATUS SET UP Upper Display Set Up Group Lower Display STATUS 2 Read the Function until you see software version LOOP 1 2 Upper Display Lower Display VERSION Please give this number to the Customer Support person It will indicate which version of UDC 3300 you have and help them determine a solution to your problem Software version Number 240 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 9 3 Power up Tests What happens at power When the controller is powered up three tests are run by the UDC 3300 up software to ensure memory integrity As the tests are run the displays will appear as shown in Table 9 3 Table 9 3 Power up Tests Lower Display Upper Display RAM TEST PASS or FAIL CONFTEST PASS or FAIL CAL TEST PASS or FAIL Test failures If any of these three tests fail FAIL will appear momentarily in the upper display then a display test is run after which the controller will go into manual mode and you will see Upper Display PV value Lower Display FAILSAFE blinki
75. of times Loop 1 has been in Manual mode ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 Number of times Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 has been activated ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 Number of times Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 has been activated ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 Number of times Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 has been activated ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 Number of times Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 has been activated DIGITAL INPUT 1 Number of times Digital Input 1 has closed DIGITAL INPUT 2 Number of times Digital Input 2 has closed OUTPUT 1 RELAY x 1000 Thousands of times Output 1 relay has been activated OUTPUT 2 RELAY x 1000 Thousands of times Output 2 relay has been activated GUARANTEED SOAK Number of times unit has been in guaranteed soak POWER CYCLE Number of times unit s power has cycled off and on LOOP 1 PV RANGE Number of times Loop 1 s PV has been out of range LOOP 1 FAILSAFE Number of times Loop 1 has been in Failsafe mode LOOP 1 TUNE Number of times Loop 1 has been tuned manually and automatically LOOP 2 MANUAL Number of times Loop 2 has been in Manual mode LOOP 2 PV RANGE Number of times Loop 2 s PV has been out of range LOOP 2 FAILSAFE Number of times Loop 2 has been in Failsafe mode 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 141 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection COUNTER 1 TUNE2 LOOP 2 TUNE Number of times Loop 2 has been tuned manual
76. ohms Output range can be set anywhere between 0 to 21 mA and as direct or reverse action It can be configured to represent either Input PV Setpoint Deviation or Control output The range of the auxiliary output as a function of the selected variable can be scaled This output can be used as a second current output for current duplex outputs Resolution 12 bits over 0 to 21 mA Accuracy 0 05 of full scale Temperature Stability 0 0075 F S C Load Resistance 0 to 1000 Communications Interface Optional DMCS Baud Rate 19200 baud Length of Link 4000 ft maximum Link Characteristics Two wire multi drop proprietary protocol 31 drops maximum RS422 485 ASCII Baud Rate 2400 4800 9600 or 19200 baud selectable Parity Odd or Even Length of Link 4000 ft maximum Link Characteristics Two wire or four wire multi drop RS422 ASCII 15 drops maximum or up to 31 drops for shorter link length RS422 485 Modbus RTU Baud Rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 baud selectable Data Format Floating point or integer Length of Link 4000 ft maximum Link Characteristics Two wire multi drop Modbus RTU protocol 15 drops maximum or up to 31 drops for shorter link length Power Consumption 18 VA maximum 90 to 264 Vac 12 VA maximum 24 Vac dc Power Inrush Current 10A maximum for 4 ms under operating conditions CAUTION When applying power to more than one UDC 3300 make sure that sufficient power
77. output type Use 5 to 105 for current output I Hi LIM Within the range of the output limits HIGH RESET LIMIT This is the highest value of output beyond which you want no reset to occur I Lo Within the range of the output limits LOW RESET LIMIT This is the lowest value of output beyond which you want no reset to occur DROPOFF b to 105 of output CONTROLLER DROPOFF VALUE Ouiput value below which the controller output will drop off to the low output limit value set in prompt OUTLoLIM 118 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection DEADBAND DEADBAND is an adjustable gap between the operating ranges of output 1 and output 2 in which neither output operates positive value or both outputs operate negative value 5 0 to 25 0 Time Duplex 0 0 to 25 0 On Off Duplex 0 5 to 5 0 Position Proportional and Three Position Step Reset limits and Dropoff are not displayed when Three Position Step Control is configured OUT HYST 0 0 to 5 0 of PV span HYSTERESIS OUTPUT RELAY is an adjustable overlap of the ON OFF states of each control output This is the difference between the value of the process variable at which the control outputs energize and the value at which they de energize Only applicable for ON OFF control FAILMODE FAILSAFE M
78. returns to former operation local or remote setpoint unless the SETPOINT SELECT key is pressed while digital input is active then it stays in the local setpoint 2 mode TO 3SP RSP annunciator blinks Puts the controller into local setpoint 3 When contact opens the controller returns to former operation local or remote setpoint unless the SETPOINT SELECT key is pressed while digital input is active then it stays in the local setpoint 3 mode TO DIR Selects direct controller action ToHOLD H blinks Suspends setpoint program or setpoint ramp operation Contact open runs the ramp program from the Hold point unless the Ramp Program was not previously started via the RUN HOLD key This selection applies to either loop ToPID2 PIDSET 2 in lower Selects PID set 2 display PV 2IN II II blinks Selects the PV to equal Input 2 IN PV 3IN III blinks Selects the PV to equal Input 3 IN RERUN Resets the Setpoint program back to the beginning of the first segment in the program and leaves the program in the same Run or Hold mode that it was in when the DI closed Opening the DI has no further affect Digital Input Annunciator will always show the Digital Input status 182 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 DIG IN1 or Display Indication Action on Contact Closure DIG IN2 Returns toggles to original state when contact opens Selections unles
79. sections numbered 1 through 12 These sections contain all the information you need to configure operate monitor and troubleshoot your controller To find information quickly use the comprehensive Table of Contents in the front of the manual and the Index located in the back of the manual Contacts World Wide Web The following lists Honeywell s World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our customers Honeywell Organization WWW Address URL Corporate http www honeywell com Sensing and Control http www honeywell com sensing International http www honeywell com Business global asp Telephone Contact us by telephone at the numbers listed below Organization Phone Number United States and Canada Honeywell Asia Pacific Honeywell Asia Pacific Hong Kong Europe Honeywell PACE Brussels Belgium Latin America Honeywell Sunrise Florida U S A 1 800 423 9883 Tech Support 1 888 423 9883 Q amp A Faxback TACFACS 1 800 525 7439 Service 852 2829 8298 32 2 728 2111 954 845 2600 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual iii Symbol Definitions The following table lists those symbols that may be used in this document to denote certain conditions Symbol Definition This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for additional information This symbol appears next to required information in the manual WARNING PERSONAL INJURY Risk of elect
80. tee Pert e temer deste ns Input 1 Actuation Type AMET TERA itii b tete te t Pee Bede ens Transmitter Characterization INA EH iecore ettet tbe t b eee tte etd ented abide d eerte ertet Input 1 High Range Value Input 1 Low Range Value BIAS ING geb rte p eaten Per ed t o TR erede Input 1 Bias PETER M Input 1 Filter EMSSIM1 iiit reir ter e ete eb vt dede BE ERE Pens Emissivity NATI PES rime ee emma p tl e er e ite aat Input 2 Actuation Type iiir feet ite eb eerte pid eite Transmitter Characterization a te porre b eese tette Input 2 High Range Value Input 2 Low Range Value BIAS IN2 i te deett a nain ep ren qu ee ER ied o ere ere Input 2 Bias PIETER Zien tete n ttu end Pe eet pep tuta Input 2 Filter d uspc Emissivity INS TY BE ttti et ee tenerte ttt ted fee abate tates Input 3 Actuation Type AMT TERS iiie tt t eed Beer dens Transmitter Characterization INS Elodie aee tete taber t ib eee tte d sert sette Input 3 High Range Value gne ce scanty Input 3 Low Range Value BIAS INS iuit Ege ee IR Rees Input 3 Bias zt E Input 3 Filter PV SOUR O unite pube rone aren nee Parade Process Variable Source PID SETS itinere
81. to automatic remote or from manual remote to automatic remote adjusts the bias based on the local setpoint such that Bias LSP RSP Input x R Automatic Remote Setpoint to Manual or Auto Local Setpoint If configured for Local Setpoint Tracking when the controller transfers out of remote setpoint the last value of the control setpoint is inserted into the local setpoint If LSP tracking is not configured the local setpoint will not be altered when the transfer is made 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 153 Selecting manual or automatic mode An alternate action switch places the controller in the Automatic or Manual mode of operation Switching between manual and automatic will be bumpless except when PD MR algorithm is selected Table 5 9 includes procedures for selecting automatic or manual mode and changing the output while in manual Table 5 9 Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode Step Operation Press Action 1 Selecting Automatic Mode MANUAL AUTO until A indicator is ON The controller regulates its output to maintain the PV at the desired setpoint Upper Display shows the PV value Lower Display Lt shows SP and the setpoint value The deviation bargraph indicates the PV deviation from the setpoint The annunciators indicate whichever setpoint is in use SP Local Setpoint 2SP Second Local Setpoint 3SP Third Local Setpo
82. to the normal output NOTE 1 This selection is only available on Loop 1 TIMER Contact closure starts timer if enabled Reopening the switch has no effect TO AUTO MANUAL STATION Contact closure causes the loop to perform as follows PV Input 2 Action Direct Control algorithm PD MR PID SET 2 SP LSP 2 This selection is only available on Loop 1 INITIATE LIMIT CYCLE TUNING Contact closure starts the tuning process The lower display shows TUNE ON Opening the contact has no effect 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 129 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition SPinit TRACK1 TRACK2 ToOUT2 SETPOINT INITIALIZATION Contact closure forces the setpoint to the current PV value Opening the contact has no effect OUTPUT 1 TRACKS INPUT 2 Contact closure allows Output 1 to track Input 2 NOTE 1 OUTPUT 2 TRACKS INPUT 2 Contact closure allows Output 2 to track Input 2 OUTPUT 2 OVERRIDES OUTPUT 1 Contact closure allows physical Output 1 to be a copy of Output 2 When contact is released Loop 1 output will switch back to normal PID controller action starting with the last output value NOTE 1 TO RSP RST FB ToPURG TO REMOTE SETPOINT Contact closure selects the Remote setpoint EXTERNAL RESET FEEDBACK Cortact closure allows Input 2 to override the internal reset value TO PURGE C
83. uses PID set 1 Figure 5 5 Auto Manual Station and Backup Control Feature Control output 4 20 mA DI 1 STA OPEN new selection State 1 State 2 DI 1 Open DI 1 Closed BACKUP A M STATION PV cy Alarm Direct action uh PD MR anua Aux LSP 2SP 2 Made Output PV IN2 new SP1 PIDSET2 selection new PIDSET1 selection P same l as D PLC Configure State 2 per next page Output 1 4 20 mA To valve 24184 186 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Description Configuration Configuration The AM STA selection of digital input creates a repeater station when the digital input is closed This is accomplished by a multi selection from the digital input menu e ACTION is forced as DIRECT e CONT ALG is forced as PD MR Active setpoint is forced to 2SP The PV is switched to PV 2IN The tuning parameters used are the second set of parameters When the switch is open the unit becomes a normal controller with CONT ALG of PID A using tuning parameters set 1 SP PV as and DIRECT or REVERSE as selected by customer configuration Input 1 is typically the PV of some upper controller and Input 2 is typically that controller s output If the upper control fails the upper device or some watchdog opens the digital input switch and UDC 3300 back up PID A control is
84. value between 1 and 2048 Lower Display ZERO VAL until the desired 0 output is read on the milliammeter Use the values shown below depending on the action of your valve For 0 to 20 mA Direct Action 20 For 0 20 mA Reverse Action 4mA For 4 20 mA Direct Action 20 For 4 to 20 mA Reverse Action Calibrate 100 FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 This stores the 0 value and you will see Upper Display a value between 1 and 2048 Lower Display SPAN VAL until the desired 100 output is read on the milliammeter Use the values shown below depending on the action of your valve 20 For 0 to 20 mA Direct Action For 0 to 20 mA Reverse Action 20mA For 4 to 20 mA Direct Action 4mA _ For 4 20 mA Reverse Action Exit the Calibration Mode FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 The controller will store the span value LOWER DISPLAY or SET UP To exit the calibration mode When attempting to achieve 0 mA always adjust the output to about 0 5 mA and slowly decrease until the output just goes to zero Further decrementing will not change the output current since the circuit cannot produce negative current but will affect the accuracy of the output by creating a dead zone where no current flows 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 229 8 3 Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output Calibration Position proportional When the UDC
85. when a predetermined setpoint value is reached The following procedures show you how to select two sets or gain scheduling setthe switch over value settuning constant value for each set and switch between two sets via the keyboard without automatic switchover Select two sets or gain The procedure in Table 5 16 tells you how to select two sets or gain scheduling scheduling Table 5 16 Procedure for Selecting Two Sets of Tuning Constants Step Operation Press Action 1 Select Control until you see Set Up group SET UP Upper Display Upper Display Lower Display Lower Display forLoop1 forLoop 2 2 Select Until you see PID SETS LOOP 1 2 Upper Display 2 function Available selections are listed below Lower Display Y 1 ONLY 1 set of constants 2KEYBD 2 sets keyboard selectable 2 PVSW sets auto switch at PV value 2 SPSW sets auto switch at SP value GAIN S Gain used in control algorithm calculations can be pre entered into eight user defined segments with each segment applied over a user defined PV range Refer to Section 3 Configuration under Tuning Set Up group to set Gain segment values and PV range values to select the type of PID SET 164 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Set switchover value If you select 2 PVSW or 2 SPSW you must set a value at which the sets will switch over The procedure in Table 5 17 shows you ho
86. 0 0 334 mV 22 400 mV K 0 to 2400 18 to1816 0 692 mV 52 952 mV K low 20 to 1000 29 10538 1 114 mV 22 255 mV NiNiMoly NNM68 32 to 2500 0 to 1371 0 000 mV 71 330 mV NiNiMoly low 32 to 1260 0 10682 0 000 mV 31 820 mV NiMo NiCo NM90 32 to 2500 0 to1371 0 000 mV 71 773 mV NiMo NiCo low 32 to 1260 0 to682 0 000 mV 31 825 mV Nicrosil Nisil Nic 0 to 2372 18 to1300 0 461 mV 47 513 mV R 0 to 3100 18 to1704 0 090 mV 20 281 mV S 0 to 3100 18 to 1704 0 092 mV 17 998 mV T 300 to 700 184 to371 5 341 mV 19 097 mV T low 200 to 500 129 to260 4 149 mV 12 574 mV W5W26 0 to 4200 18 to2315 0 234 mV 37 075 mV W5W26 low 0 to 2240 18 to1227 0 234 mV 22 283 mV Honeywell Radiamatic Type RH 0 to 3400 18 to 1871 0 00 mV 57 12 mV Type RI 0 to 9999 max 18 to 9999 max 0 00 mV 60 08 mV RTD IEC Alphaz0 00385 100 ohms 300 to 1200 184 to 649 25 18 ohms 274 96 ohms 100 ohms low 300 to 300 184 to 149 25 18 ohms 156 90 ohms 200 ohms 300 to 1200 184 to 649 50 36 ohms 549 92 ohms 500 ohms 300 to 1200 184 to649 125 90 ohms 1374 80 ohms Linear Milliamps 4 to 20 mA 4 00 mA 20 00 mA 0 to 20 mA 0 00 mA 20 00 mA Millivolts O to 10 mV 0 00 mV 10 00 mV 0 to 50 mV 0 00 mV 50 00 mV Volts 1 to 5 Volts 1 00 Volts 5 00 Volts 0 to 5 Volts 0 00 Volts 5 00 Volts 0 to 10 Volts 0 00 Volts 10 00 Volts Carbon 0 to 1250 mV 0 00 mV 1250 mV Oxygen 30 to 510 mV 30 00 mV 510 00 mV
87. 0 is not available on Model No DC330E EE 2XX 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 171 Two loop restrictions Table 5 23 gives two loop functionality and restrictions for controllers with two current outputs including Auxiliary output and two relay outputs Table 5 23 Model DC330E KE 5XX Two loop Functionality and Restrictions Model DC330E KE 2XX or Controller with Two Current Outputs including Auxiliary Output and Three Relay Outputs Output 1 or 2 Output 1 or 2 Output 1 or 2 Output Type Current Auxiliary Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Loop 1 is TIME SIMPLEX Loop 2 is Time Simplex Not used Not used N A Loop 1 Output Loop 2 Output Current or Current Duplex 10096 Not used Loop 2 Output N A Loop 1 Output Alarm 1 Current Time or Time Current Not used Loop 2 N A Loop 1 Output Loop 2 Output 1 or 2 Output 1 or 2 Loop 1 is TIME DUPLEX TPSC Loop 2 is Time Simplex N A Current or Current Duplex 100 Not used Loop 2 Output N A Loop 1 Output 1 Loop 1 Output 2 Current Time or Time Current N A Loop 1 is CURRENT OUTPUT or CURRENT DUPLEX 100 Loop 2 is Time Simplex Loop 1 Output Not used N A Loop 2 Output Alarm 1 Current or Current Duplex 10096 Loop 1 Output Loop 2 Ouptut N A Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Current Time or Time Current N A Loop 1 Output Loop 2 N A Loop 2 Alarm 1 Output 1 or 2 Output 1 or 2 Loop 1 is C
88. 0 6 RESET TIME Measured Time 2 RATE Measured Time 8 PB Measured PB x 1 7 RESET ACTION 2 Measured Time RATE Measured Time 8 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 269 11 3 Time Proportional Duplex or Current Proportional Duplex Control Introduction For HEAT COOL applications Tune the controller with the output above 50 for Heat and below 50 for Cool HEAT COOL prompts The TUNING function prompts for HEAT COOL are HEAT COOL PB or GAIN GAIN2 RSETMIN or RSETRPM RSET2MIN or RSETRPM2 RATEMIN RATE2MIN CYCSEC CYC2SEC 11 4 Two Sets of Tuning Parameters for Single Output Operation Introduction You can use two sets of tuning constants for single output types and tune each set separately TWO SETS prompts The TUNING function prompts for two sets are PID SET 1 PID SET 2 PB or GAIN GAIN2 RSETMIN or RSETRPM RSET2MIN or RSETRPM2 RATEMIN RATE2MIN CYCSEC CYC2SEC 270 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Index Oxygen control 199 A Aborting PV adaptive tuning 196 Accutune 177 Accutune 190 Accutune error prompts 197 Accutune Set Up group 49 Accutune Set Up Group 86 Adaptive tune 87 Adaptive tune error status 89 Advancing a running SP program 212 Alarm blocking 138 Alarm on totalizer value 181 Alarm setpoints 167 Algorithm Data Set Up Group 90 Auto bias 117 123 Auto Manual Station mode backup c
89. 00 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection TIME1 GSOAK GUARANTEED SOAK Cumulative time the process was outside the guaranteed soak band cont d SOOTNG SOOTING Cumulative time process was in sooting state DIGIN1 DIGITAL INPUT1 Cumulative time Digital Input 1 was closed DIGIN2 DIGITAL INPUT 2 Cumulative time Digital Input 2 was closed MAN2 LOOP 2 MANUAL Cumulative time Loop 2 was in Manual HRS MIN1 00 00 to 23 59 Shows elapsed time of Timer 1 in Hours and Minutes At OR 24 00 units change automatically to Days and Hours DAYS HRS1 1 00 to 416 15 TIME 2 Same as TIME 1 The timer tracks the elapsed time of the selected event HRS MIN2 00 00 to 23 59 Shows elapsed time of Timer 2 in Hours and Minutes At OR 24 00 units change automatically to Days and Hours DAYS HRS2 1 00 to 416 15 TIME 3 Same as TIME 1 The timer tracks the elapsed time of the selected event HRS MIN3 00 00 to 23 59 Shows elapsed time of Timer 3 in Hours and Minutes At OR 24 00 units change automatically to Days and Hours DAYS HRS3 1 00 to 416 15 COUNTER1 COUNTER 1 The counter counts the number of times DISABL MANUAL AL1SP1 AL1SP2 AL2SP1 AL2SP2 DIGIN1 DIGIN2 OUT1 1K OUT2 1K GSOAK PWRCYC PV_RNG FAILSF TUNE MAN2 PVRNG2 FSF2 the selected event has occurred DISABLE Couriter is not in use LOOP 1 MANUAL Number
90. 0732481 502 Varistor 240V 30755050 501 Mounting Kit 1 30756764 002 Rear Cover Kit 1 30755223 002 DIN Adapter Kit Blue 1 30755223 003 DIN Adapter Kit Gray 30757088 501 Cold Junction Resistor Kit 1 30756018 003 External Relay Solid State 10 Amp 1 30756683 001 Gasket Panel to case 30757215 001 NEMAA Front Face Kit 1 266 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Section 11 Appendix A Manual Tuning 11 1 Overview Introduction Tuning technique Controller tuning procedures Tuning aids When you tune a controller there are some things to consider Process Characteristics Gain Time Constants etc Desired response Minimal overshoot Basically controller tuning consists of determining the appropriate values for the Gain PB Rate Derivative and Reset Integral time tuning parameters control constants that will give the control you want Depending on the characteristics of the deviation of the process variable from the setpoint the tuning parameters interact to alter the controller s output and produce changes in the value of the process variable Since each parameter responds to a specific characteristic of the deviation you may not need a combination of all three It depends on the process characteristics and the desired control response You can estimate a starting point and the tuning parameters required to give the desired controller response and with some experience become proficient with
91. 096 CO then setting is 0 200 Propane Gas 23 0 CO setting is 0 230 ATM PRES 590 0 to 760 0 mm Hg ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE COMPENSATION is only applicable when Relative Humidity is selected Enter the value of the atmospheric pressure of the process ALG1 BIAS 999 to 9999 floating in INPUT ALGORITHM 1 BIAS Does not apply to engineering units selections FFWRD FFWDM2 HISEL or LOSEL 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 97 Lower Display Prompt INP ALG2 ATTENTION All Input Algorithms operate in engineering units except Feed forward which operates in percent of range units For General Math functions when Input C is disabled the value of Input C used in the functions is automatically set to 1 0 Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection NONE W AVG F FWR2 FFWDM2 A B C HI SEL LO SEL MuDIV MULT MuDIV MULT DEW PT Parameter Definition INPUT ALGORITHM 2 The selections from which to choose are listed to the left The formulas are the same as shown for IN ALG 1 ATTENTION Selection A B C algorithm subtracts Input B with Ratio Bias from Input A with Ratio Bias and divides the result by Input C with Ratio Bias using engineering units EXAMPLE PV or SP K em Calc Hi Calc Lo MATH K2 0 001 to 1000 floating WEIGHTED AVERAGE RATIO OR MASS FLOW ORIFICE CONSTANT K FOR MATH SELECTIONS Only applicable for algorithm W AVG or
92. 0X XX 5XX For Duplex Current Output use Control Output for Output 1 heat Attention Both current outputs control and auxiliary are isolated from each other case ground and all inputs Auxiliary Load 0 10000 22619 zu Connect shield to ground at one end only Digital inputs Figure 2 16 shows the wiring connections for the Digital Inputs option connections Model DC330X XX XX3 Figure 2 16 Digital Inputs Connections Model DC330X XX XX3 Digital Input Switch 1 Digital Input Switch 2 Connect shield to ground at one end only Switch Common 22620 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 29 Communications option There are two types of Communications option available RS422 485 Modbus Model DC330X XX 1XX or DC330X XX 5XX Figure 2 17 also refer to Document 51 51 25 35 RS422 485 ASCII or 51 52 25 66 and 51 52 25 70 Modbus DMCS Model DC330X XX 4X X Figure 2 18 also refer to Document 82 50 10 23 Figure 2 17 RS422 485 Modbus Communications Option Connections MODBUS OR RS422 485 HALF DUPLEX Master Resistor To Other Do not run these CAUTION Communication lines in the same 7 Instruments conduit as AC power Do not mix half and maximum 15 full duplex wiring PS MODBUS OR RS422 485 FULL DUPLEX Master 120 Ohm Resistor 120 Ohm Resistor
93. 1 6 H P Solid State Relays One or Two SPST solid state contacts consisting of a triac N O output Internally socketed Resistive Load 1 0 amp 25 C and 120 or 240 Vac 0 5 amp 55 C and 120 or 240 Vac Inductive Load 50 VA 120 Vac or 240 Vac Minimum Load 20 milliamps Open Collector Outputs One or Two Maximum Sink Current 20 mA Overload Protection 100 mA Internally powered 30 Vdc Opto isolated from all other circuits except current output but not from each other Socketed jumper assembly replaces relay Solid State Relays 10 amps One or two externally mounted SPST triac N O outputs for use with open collector outputs Resistive Load 15 amps 25 C and 120 or 240 Vac 10 amps 55 and 120 or 240 Vac Inductive Load 50 VA 120 Vac or 240 Vac Motor Rating 1 HP 25 C 0 75 HP 55 C Controller Output Algorithms See Section 4 7 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual Design continued Digital Inputs Optional Isolated 15 source for external dry contacts or isolated solid state contacts The Digital Input option detects the state of external contacts for either of the two inputs On contact closure the controller will respond according to how each digital input is configured Opening contact causes return to previous state Auxiliary Linear Output Optional Isolated 21 mA dc maximum into a negative or positive grounded load or non grounded load of 0 to 1000
94. 1 Select Set Up until you see Group SETUP Upper Display Upper Display Lower Display for Loop1 or Lower Display for Loop 2 2 Select the Remote Setpoint Source prompt runction Until you see LOOP 1 2 Upper Display The Remote Setpoint source selection NONE not used INP 2 Input 2 as RSP IN AL1 Input algorithm 1 IN AL2 Input algorithm 2 INP 3 Input 3 as RSP Lower Display 3 Change A to enable or disable the remote setpoint selection v ATTENTION You cannot change the remote setpoint value using these keys 4 Return to normal LOWER This will return the controller to normal operation pisPLAY Operation Setpoint selection indication Table 5 13 shows how the indicators react and what the displays show for each type of setpoint Table 5 13 Setpoint Selection Indication Using Local Using Remote Using 2nd Using 3rd Setpoint Setpoint Local Local Setpoint Setpoint SP RSP 2SP 3SP Upper PV andthe PV PV and the PV PV and the PV PV and the PV Display value value value value Lower SP and the RSP and 2SP and the 3SP and the Display Local Setpoint Remote Setpoint 2nd Local 3rd Local Source Value Setpoint Value Setpoint Value Annunciator None B lights B lights 3 lights 158 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 5 8 Setpoint Ramp Rate Configuration Operation You can configure a Setpoint Ramp
95. 1 to 9999 or or GAIN 4 Gain 4 0 001 to 1000 1 000 RATE4MIN Rate 4 in Minutes 0 00 to 10 00 minutes 0 00 RSET4MIN Reset 4 in minutes repeat 0 02 to 50 00 1 00 or or RSET4RPM Reset 4 in repeats minute E CYC3 SEC Cycle Time 3 Heat 1 to 120 20 or CYC3 SX3 CYC4 SEC Cycle Time 4 Cool 1 to 120 20 or CYC4 SX3 PVEUVAL1 PV1 through PV8 Value for PV value within the PV limits 0 PVEUVAL2 Gain Scheduling In engineering units PVEUVAL3 PVEUVAL4 PVEUVAL5 PVEUVAL6 PVEUVAL7 PVEUVAL8 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 45 Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display GAINVAL1 Gain 1 through Gain 8 0 001 to 1000 floating 1 000 GAINVAL2 Value for Gain Scheduling Gain or Proportional Band GAINVAL3 GAINVAL4 GAINVAL5 GAINVAL6 GAINVAL7 GAINVAL8 Cycle times are in either 1 second or 1 3 second increments depending upon the RLY TYPE configuration in the Output Algorithm Set Up group ATTENTION If units of percent proportional band PB are selected under the Control Set Up prompt function prompt PBorGAIN then the displayed values are in PB but the lower display will still show Gain 46 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 8 Single Setpoint Ramp Setpoint rate Function prompts SP Ramp SP Rate or SP Programming Set Up Group The Setpoint Ram
96. 13 PID A 91 93 PID 91 93 PID loop selection 92 Position proportional backup mode 55 Position Proportional control output calibration 230 Position proportional output connections 28 Power up 44 Printed wiring board identification 259 Printed wiring board removal 258 Process gain Loop 2 88 Program record sheet 205 Program state 205 Program termination state 203 Prompt hierarchy 36 Proportional band 78 Proportional band 2 79 Proportional band units 119 Protective bonding 5 PV Tuning 49 Ramp segments 202 Ramp unit 203 Ramp Soak profile 201 Ramp Soak profile example 204 Ramp Soak programming 201 Range values 2 4 Rate 76 Rate 2 79 Ratio 111 Recycle number 202 Relative humidity 95 97 Relay Output 22 Remote mode switching 177 Remote setpoint 158 Remote setpoint source 116 123 Remote switching 82 Reset 79 Reset 2 79 Reset totalizer value 183 Reset units 120 Restarting a running SP program 2 2 Restoring factory calibration 225 Restrictions for two loop control 71 Reverse acting control 718 124 RS422 485 Communications board 262 Run Hold key lockout 80 Run monitor SP program 209 S Security code 80 Set Up Group 36 37 Setpoint high limit 118 123 Setpoint low limit 118 123 Setpoint ramp 83 Setpoint ramp final setpoint 84 Setpoint Ramp Set Up group 47 Setpoint ramp time 83 Setpoint Ramp Rate Programming Set Up Group 83 Se
97. 2 7 lists the Control Relay contact information ATTENTION Control relays operate in the standard control mode i e energized when output state is on Table 2 7 Control Relay Contact Information Unit Power Control Relay Control Relay 1 or 2 Output Wiring Contact Indicator Status N O Open en N C Closed ort N O Open Off Closed On On N C Closed Off Open On Table 2 8 lists the Alarm Relay contact information ATTENTION Alarm relays are designed to operate in a failsafe mode i e de energized during alarm state This results in alarm actuation when power is OFF or when initially applied until the unit completes self diagnostics If the unit loses power the alarms will function Table 2 8 Alarm Relay Contact Information Variable NOT Variable Unit Alarm in Alarm State in Alarm State Power Relay Relay Indicators Relay Indicators Wiring Contact Contact N O Open Open on N C Closed otf Closed Of N O Closed Open 9n N C Open on Closed On 34 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 1 Introduction What s in this section The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section Prompts Section 3 Configuration Overview Configuration is a dedicated operation where you use straightforward keystroke sequences to select and establish configure pertinent control data best suited for your application
98. 2 Input 2 Bias 999 to 9999 0 in engineering units FILTER 2 Input 2 Filter 0 to 120 seconds 0 BURNOUT2 Burnout Protection NONE NONE UP DOWN NO FS EMISSIV2 Emissivity 0 01 to 1 00 0 00 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 57 3 14 Introduction Function prompts Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group This data deals with various parameters required to configure Input 3 Table 3 11 lists all the function prompts in the Input 3 Set Up group Table 3 11 Input 3 Group Function Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display IN3 TYPE Input 3 Actuation Type DISABL DISABL Section 0 20mA 4 10 4 20mA 0 5 V 1 5 V Transmitter Characterization BTC STC LINEAR ETCH TTCH ETCL TTCL J TC H W TCH JTCL WTCL K TC H 100 PT KTCL 100 LO NNM H 200 PT NNM L 500 PT NM90 H RAD RH NM90 L RAD RI NIC TC LINEAR RTC SQROOT IN3 HI Input 3 High Range Value 999 to 9999 floating 1000 Linear Inputs only in engineering units IN3 LO Input 3 Low Range Value 999 to 9999 floating 0 Linear Inputs only in engineering units RATIO 3 Input 3 Ratio 20 00 to 20 00 1 000 BIAS IN3 Input 3 Bias 999 to 9999 0 in engineering units FILTER 3 Input 3 Filter 0 to 120 seconds 0 58 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 15 Introduction Function prompts Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up
99. 23 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 247 Procedure 2 Table 9 9 explains how to troubleshoot Current Proportional Output failure symptoms Table 9 9 Troubleshooting Current Proportional Output Failure Step What to do How to do it 1 Make sure the controller is Make Algorithm Set Up group function configured for Current output prompt OUT ALG or OUT2 ALG CURRNT Refer to Section 3 Configuration 2 Check the field wiring Output impedance must be less than or equal to 1000 ohms 3 Make sure all the configurable Refer to Section 3 Configuration to tuning constants limits and check all this data and how to configuration data stored in the reconfigure controller are correct Reconfigure if necessary 4 Check the output Put the controller into Manual mode and change the output from 0 to 100 4 20 mA Use a DC milliammeter at the rear terminals to verify the output 5 Recalibrate the Current Proportional Refer to Section 8 Output Calibration output for details 6 Change MCU Output board Refer to Table 9 23 248 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Procedure 3 failure symptoms Table 9 10 Table 9 10 explains how to troubleshoot Position Proportional Output Troubleshooting Position Proportional Output Failure Step What to do How to do it 1 Make sure the controller is configured for Position Proportional output Make Outp
100. 4 Table 9 11 explains how to troubleshoot Time Proportional Output failure Table 9 11 Troubleshooting Time Proportional Output Failure Step What to do How to do it 1 Make sure the controller is Make Output Algorithm Set Up group configured for Time Proportional function prompt OUT ALG TIME or output TIME D or function prompt OUT2 ALG TIME Refer to Section 3 Configuration 2 Check the field wiring Make sure the NO or NC contact wiring is correct at the rear terminals Refer to Section 2 Installation for details 3 Make sure all the configurable Refer to Section 3 Configuration to tuning constants limits and check all this data and how to configuration data stored in the reconfigure controller are correct Reconfigure if necessary 4 Check the output Put the controller into Manual mode Vary the output above and below the present value Observe OUT indicator on the operator interface 5 Change MCU Output board Refer to Table 9 23 250 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Procedure 5 Proportional Output failure Table 9 12 Table 9 12 explains how to troubleshoot Current Time or Time Current Troubleshooting Time Current or Current Time Proportional Output Failure Step What to do How to do it 1 Make sure the controller is configured for Time Current or Current Time Proportional output Make Output Algorithm Set Up group function prompt OUT AL
101. 687 502 Auxiliary Output Half Duplex RS422 485 Communications Board 30756690 502 DMCS Communications Printed Wiring Board 39656693 502 RS422 485 Communications Printed Wiring Board includes Basic Prom 30756693 503 RS422 485 Communications Printed Wiring Board Full or Half Duplex includes Expanded Prom 4 51309404 502 Power Input Printed Wiring Board 90 264 Vac 1 51309404 501 Power Input Printed Wiring Board 24 Vac dc 30756715 501 2 Input Printed Wiring Board 1 51309401 504 Current Output MCU Printed Wiring Board 1 51309401 505 Relay Output MCU Printed Wiring Board 7 30755306 501 Relay Electromechanical 1 30756725 501 Relay Solid State 1 Amp per kit 30756679 501 Open Collector Output 8 30756696 501 Digital Input Printed Wiring Board 1 9 30756721 501 Case Assembly 1 FIELD UPGRADE SOFTWARE KITS 51309713 501 Upgrade DC330B to SPP Carbon 51309714 501 Upgrade DC330E to SPP Math HealthWatch 51309715 501 Upgrade DC330E to SPP 2 Loops HealthWatch 51309716 501 Upgrade DC330E to SPP Math 2 Loops HealthWatch 51309717 501 Upgrade DC330D to SPP Parts not shown Table 10 2 lists the part numbers of the parts not show in the exploded view Table 10 2 Parts Not Shown Part Number Description Quantity 30731996 506 4 20 mA Resistor Assembly 250 ohms 1 30754465 501 0 10 Volt Input Resistor Assembly 100K Pair 1 30732481 501 Varistor 120V 1 3
102. AL SIMPLEX Type of output using two SPDT relays and a motor which has a 100 to 1000 ohms feedback slidewire Forces Input 2 to SLIDEW selection ATTENTION Position Proportional is not available on two loop or cascade controllers Other prompts affected DEADBAND IN2 TYPE TIME DUPLEX This output algorithm uses Digital Outputs 1 and 2 for Duplex Time Proportional Control The outputs are updated per the Loop sampling rate selection Time Proportional Output has a resolution of 4 44 msec Cycle Time is adjustable from 1 to 120 seconds 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 107 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition OUT ALG continued CUR D CUR TI TI CUR CURRENT DUPLEX is similar to current simplex but uses a second current output The second output is usually scaled so that zero and span correspond with 096 and 50 output cool zone When the output is 0 to 50 the controller uses tuning parameter set 2 when the output is 50 to 100 it uses set 1 Other prompts affected 4 20 RNG CURRENT TIME DUPLEX is a variation of duplex with current active for O to 5096 output tuning set 2 and time is active 50 to 10096 output tuning set 1 Relay controls heat current controls cool Other prompts affected 4 20 RNG TIME CURRENT DUPLEX is similar to CUR TI except that current is active for 50 to 100 and time is active for 0 t
103. ANG KPG SP 2 KPG2 CRITERIA EA AT ERROR AT ERR ALGORTHM P CONT ALG PIDLOOPs CONT2ALG ourovRb TIMER PERIOD START LDISP Pal INPALG1 MATHK CALCHI CALCLO ALG1INA ALG1INB ALG1INC PCOSEL ies bi ATMPRES INP ALG2 MATHK2 CALCHI CALCLO ALG2INA ALG2INB le N ALG2INC PCTH2 8SEGCH Xx VALUE vx VALUE 8SEG 2 Xx VALU2 Yx VALU2 pel TOTALIZER znsET TOTRATE x 0to8 OUT ALG out ate 420RNG OUT2ALG RLYSTATE RLY TYPE 36 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual Set Up Group Function Prompts INPUT 1 Soren WW Wis Ca FEIERT INPUT 2 xurreg 2 IN2 LO RATIO 2 BIAS IN2 FILTER2 punos i INPUT 3 ALTERS CONTROL 159 AGPSRE SP TRAC pe ia aw our SPHiLIM SPLoLIM ACTION OUTRATE PCT MUP PCT MDN OUTHILIM Fu rona DROPOFF DEADBAND OUTHYST FAILMODE FAILSAFE OUT AUTO OUT PBorGAIN MINorRPM CONTROL2 LFzssc Forces ROSES
104. AY 1 PWR OUT LAST SHEDMODE LAST SP HiLIM 1000 SHEDSP TO LSP SP LoLIM 0 UNITS PERCNT ACTION REVRSE CSP RATO 1 0 OUT RATE DISABL CSP BIAS 0 PCT M UP 0 CSP2RATO 1 0 PCT M DN 0 CSP2BIAS 0 OUTHILIM 100 LOOPBACK DISABL OUTLoLIM 0 0 I Hi LIM 100 0 I Lo LIM 0 0 ALARMS A1S1 VAL 90 DROPOFF 0 A1S2 VAL 10 DEADBAND 1 0 A2S1 VAL 95 OUT HYST 0 5 A2S2 VAL 5 FAILMODE NO LAT ATSTTYPE NONE FAILSAFE 0 0 A1S2TYPE NONE MAN OUT A2S1TYPE NONE AUTO OUT E A2S2TYPE NONE PBorGAIN GAIN AIST HL HIGH MINorRPM MIN A1S1 EV ii A1S2 HL LOW A1S2 EV ze CONTROL2 PV2 SRC INP 2 A2S1 HL HIGH FORCE MA DISABL A281 EV ae PID SETS 1 ONLY A2S2 HL LOW SW VALUE 0 00 252 EV 2 LSP S 1 ONLY AL HYST 0 1 RSP SRC NONE ALM OUT1 NO LAT AUTOBIAS DISABL BLOCK DISABL SPTRACK NONE SP HiLIM 1000 SP LoLIM 0 DISPLAY DECIMAL XXXX ACTION REVRSE DECIMAL2 XXXX OUT RATE DISABL TEMPUNIT NONE PCT M UP 0 PWR FREQ 60 HZ PCT M DN 0 RATIO 2 DISABL OUTHILIM 100 LANGUAGE ENGLIS OUTLoLIM 0 I Hi LIM 100 0 I Lo LIM 0 0 MAINTNCE TIME1 DISABL DROPOFF 0 TIME2 DISABL DEADBAND 1 0 DISABL FAILMODE NO LAT COUNTER 1 DISABL FAILSAFE 0 COUNTER2 DISABL COUNTER3 DISABL RES TYPE NONE OPTIONS AUX OUT DISABL or CUR OUT2 DISABL 4mA VAL 0 0 20mA VAL 0 DIG IN 1 NONE DIG1 COM DISABL DIG IN 2 NONE DIG2 COM DISABL 76 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Section 4 Configuration Prompt Definitions 4 1 Overview Introduction This section provides information for all the user co
105. Alarm Relay 1 Load o o 2 upply Power To terminal 70r9 O Alarm 2 is not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control or Position Proportional Control Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps 120 Vac or 2 5 Amps at 240 Vac Customer should size fuses accordingly Use Fast Blo fuses only All current outputs are isolated from each other case ground and all inputs 24160 Table 2 6 Universal Output Wiring Functionality and Restrictions for Figure 2 13 Controller with One Current Output Auxiliary Output and Three Relay Outputs SINGLE LOOP OR CASCADE CONTROL OUTPUT Output Type Current Auxiliary Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Time Simplex N A Not used Output 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Current N A Output 1 Not used Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Position not available on N A Not used Output 1 Output 2 Alarm 1 Cascade Control Time Duplex or TPSC N A Not used Output 1 Output 2 Alarm 1 Current Duplex 100 N A Output N A Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Current Duplex 50 N A N A N A N A N A N A Current Time or N A Output 1 or 2 Output 1 or 2 Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Time Current 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 27 Position proportional Figure 2 14 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models output connections with Position Proportional Output or Three Position Step Control Models DC330X EE X XX X2 DC330X AA XXX X2 For Control and Alarm Rel
106. CSP UNITS Communication Units PERCNT PERCNT ENG CSP RATO Loop 1 Computer Setpoint 20 0 to 20 0 1 0 Ratio CSP BIAS Loop 1 Computer Setpoint 999 to 9999 0 Bias in engineering units CSP2RATO Loop 2 or Cascade 20 0 to 20 0 1 0 Computer Setpoint Ratio CSP2BIAS Loop 2 or Cascade 999 to 9999 0 Computer Setpoint Bias in engineering units LOOPBACK Local Loop Back DISABL DISABL ENABLE 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 65 3 19 Alarms Set Up Group Introduction Function prompts This data deals with the Alarms function that is available with your controller There are two alarms available Each alarm has two setpoints You can configure each of these two setpoints to alarm on one of several events and you can configure each setpoint to alarm high or low You can also configure the two setpoints to alarm on the same event and to alarm both high and low if desired Table 3 16 lists all the function prompts in the Alarms Set Up group Table 3 16 Alarms Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Lower Display Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Upper Display Factory Setting Refer to A1S1 VAL Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Value Value in engineering units 90 A1S2 VAL Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 Value Value in engineering units 10 A2S1 VAL Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 Value Value in engineering units 95 A2S2 VAL Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 Value Value in enginee
107. Controller Loop 1 and Loop 2 To RSP IN3 In Algt PV Source e Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 INPUT INPUT A e In Alg 1 RSP e In Alig 2 Output 1 Source H FEEDFORWARD e Output 2 INPUT A ONLY e Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 In Alg 1 e In Alg 2 Remote SP PID Output 1 CONTROL Output 2 ALGORITHM Loop 1 or Loop 2 INPUT B Input 1 9 Input 2 Input 3 9 Output 1 9 Output 2 None Local SP INPUT C SP e 3SP 2SP FEEDFORWARD Output without Feedforward or Manual 4 Mode To Final OUTPUT Control 24180 Element 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 169 Internal cascade Figure 5 3 is a block diagram of internal Cascade for a 2 loop controller Figure 5 3 Functional Overview Block Diagram of Internal Cascade of a 2 loop Controller PRIMARY LOOP SECONDARY LOOP PV SOURCE See Loop 2 Block Diagram PV SOURCE See Loop 1 Block Diagram SETPOINT PID SOURCE CONTROL PID CONTROL ALGORITHM Loop 1 SETPOINT SOURCE See Loop 2 ALGORITHM Block Diagram Loop 2 SP INTERNAL OUTPUT SIGNAL e 3SP Local Setpoint e 2SP Setpoint OUTPUT To Final INTERNAL CASCADE RULES Control Element Loop 2 must be the primary loop Loop 1 must be the secondary internal or slave loop because all output forms exist on Loop 1 Loop 1 Remote Setpoint
108. Controller Product Manual 10 00 9 6 Controller Failure Symptoms essen 246 9 7 Troubleshooting 247 9 8 Parts Replacement 255 9 9 Maintenarice cette ee ere De EE E Rene Pig npe ded 264 SECTION 10 PARTS LIST terreri itte en rtu e ron erui dn Earn nna nnmnnn 265 10 1 Exploded VIGW x Red iod Fen RUD beet 265 SECTION 11 APPENDIX A MANUAL TUNING eene 267 WE NEO VIL ACH 267 11 2 Time Position or Current Proportional Simplex Control 268 11 3 Time Proportional Duplex or Current Proportional Duplex Control 270 11 4 Two Sets of Tuning Parameters for Single Output Operation 270 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual vii Figure 1 1 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 18 Figure 2 19 Figure 2 20 Figure 3 1 Figure 4 1 Figure 4 2 Figure 5 1 Figure 5 2 Figure 5 3 Figure 5 4 Figure 5 5 Figure 5 6 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 7 1 Figure 7 2 Figure 7 3 Figure 7 4 Figure 7 5 Figure 7 6 Figure 7 7 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 9 1 Figure 9 2 Figure 9 3 Figure 9 4 Figure 10 1 Figures Op
109. D DISABL Y7 VALU2 0 TIMER DISABL Y8 VALU2 0 PERIOD 0 01 TOTALIZE DISABL START KEY XXXXXXX L DISP TI REM TOT SCAL EO INP ALG1 NONE TOT SEC UNLOCK MATH 2 RSET NO CALC HI U TOT RATE SECOND CALC LO ALG1 INA ALG1 INB OUT ALG OUT ALG CURRNT ALG1 INC 4 20 RNG 100PCT PCO SEL DISABL OUT2 ALG CURRNT PCT CO 0 200 RLYSTATE 1OF20N ATM PRES 760 0 RLY TYPE MECHAN INP ALG2 NONE MATH K2 as CALC HI 2 INPUT 1 0 10 CALC LO E XMITTER1 LINEAR ALG2 INA m IN1 HI 1000 ALG2 INB a IN1 LO 0 ALG2 INC TA RATIO 1 1 00 PCT H2 10 BIAS IN1 0 8SEG CH1 DISABL FILTER 1 0 X0 VALUE 0 BURNOUT1 NONE X2 VALUE 0 Ae LE INPUT 2 IN2 TYPE 0 10mV X4 VALUE 0 XMITTER2 LINEAR X5 VALUE 0 IN2 HI 1000 X6 VALUE 0 IN2 LO 0 X7 VALUE 0 RATIO 2 1 00 X8 VALUE 0 BIAS IN2 0 YO VALUE 0 Y1 VALUE 0 ee 0 BURNOUT2 NONE Y2 VALUE 0 EMMISIV2 0 00 Y3 VALUE 0 Y4 VALUE 0 Y5 VALUE 0 INPUT 3 IN3 TYPE DISABL Y6 VALUE 0 XMITTER3 LINEAR Y7 VALUE 0 IN3 HI 1000 Y8 VALUE 0 IN3 LO 0 RATIO 3 1 00 BIAS IN3 0 FILTER 3 0 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 75 Group Function Value or Factory Group Function Value or Factory Prompt Prompt Selection Setting Prompt Prompt Selection Setting CONTROL PV SOURC INP 1 COM ComSTATE DISABL PID SETS 1 ONLY Com ADDR 0 SW VALUE 0 00 ComADDR2 0 LSP S 1 ONLY SHEDTIME 0 RSP SRC NONE PARITY ODD AUTOBIAS DISABL BAUD 2400 SP TRACK NONE DUPLEX HALF PWR MODE MANUAL TX DEL
110. DIG1 COM DISABL Loop 1 will switch to MANUAL when digital input 1 is active ACTION DISABLED ENABLED No action will occur when the digital input is active DIG IN1 ToPID2 PID SETS 1 ONLY DIG1 COM ToSP2 LSP S TWO DIG IN1 is action disabled because PID SETS is set to 1 ONLY Therefore when digital input 1 is active no action will occur even though DIG1 COM is enabled ENABLED ACTION DISABLED Action is indeterminate when the digital input is active DIG IN1 ToPID2 PID SETS 2KEYBD DIG1 COM ToSP2 LSP S 1 ONLY Because DIG1 COM is action disabled the action will be indeterminate when DIG IN1 is active ENABLED ENABLED Both DIG IN and DIG COM action will occur 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 185 5 19 Auto Manual Station Introduction When you select AM STA auto manual station under the Option Set Up group function prompt DIG IN1 or DIG IN2 digital input option contact closure on the selected digital input causes the controller to switch to Auto Manual Station mode Function As shown in Figure 5 5 State 2 is the Station mode where the programmable logic controller PLC output is sent through the Auto Manual Station You can switch to manual and change the output at the controller It uses PID set 2 State 1 is the Backup PID mode which is triggered by opening the digital input It
111. E5 E6 TOT SEC Totalizer Reset Lock UNLOCK UNLOCK LOCK RSET Totalizer Reset NO NO YES TOT RATE Totalizer Rate of Integration SECOND once per second SECOND MINUTE once per minute HOUR once per hour DAY once per day ML DAY millions per day 54 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 11 Introduction Function prompts Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group This data deals with various Output types that are available for use in the controller It also lists the Digital Output Status the Current Duplex functionality and Relay Time Cycle increments Table 3 8 lists all the function prompts in the Output Algorithm Set Up group Table 3 8 Output Algorithm Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display OUT ALG Loop 1 Output Algorithm TIME Time Simplex CURRNT Section CURRNT Current Simplex 4 7 POSITN Position Proportional TIMED Time Duplex CUR D Current Duplex CURTI Duplex TI CUR Time Current Duplex 4 20 RNG Current Duplex Range 100PCT 100PCT 50 PCT OUT2 ALG Loop 2 Output Algorithm NONE CURRNT TIME CURRNT CURD CUR TI TI CUR RLYSTATE Digital Output State at 096 1OF2OF Output relays 1 and 2 1 2 Output both de energized 1ON2OF Output relay 1 is energized output relay 2 is de energized 1OF2ON Output relay 1 is de energized output relay 2 is en
112. F LOCKOUT T oe VIEW MAX A a v Until CALIB or NONE is in the upper display 2 Enter SET until you see 212 2 up Upper Display bct Lower Display INPUTn 1 2 Current Selection LOOP 1 2 Upper Display Lower Display n 1 2 0r3 A v to change the current selection to another selection 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 225 Step Operation Press Action Result Until the lower display rolls through the rest LOOP 1 2 of the functions and returns to Upper Display New Selection Lower Display n 1 2 0r3 A v until you change the input selection in the or upper display back to the proper selection You will see Upper Display Original input selection that Lower Display matches your IN nTYPE type of sensor n 1 2 0r3 3 Return to LOWER to return to Normal operating mode normal DISPLAY operating mode The factory calibration will be restored If the problem is not corrected contact the Honeywell Technical Assistance Center 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada A restored factory calibration overwrites any previous field calibration done for the input and may change the High and Low Range Limits Be sure to protect any field calibration from accidental overwrites by configuring the appropriate LOCKOUT selection after calibration See the Section 3 Configuration for spe
113. FUNCTION Used in conjunction with the SET UP key to select the LOOP 1 2 individual functions of a selected Configuration Set Up group Used to switch the display between Loop 1 and Loop 2 when the controller has a 2 Loop or Cascade configuration Used during field calibration procedure LOWER Selects an operating parameter to be shown in the DISPLAY lower display OUT Output Note 1 OT2 Output 2 Cascade or 2 Loop applications SP Local Setpoint also current SP value when using SP ramp Note 2 2SP Local Setpoint 2 Note 2 3SP Local Setpoint 3 Note 2 RSP Remote Setpoint 1IN Input 1 when used with combinational input algorithms 21 Input 2 3IN Input 3 POS 3 Position Step motor position when slidewire is connected CSP Computer Setpoint Override DEV Deviation PIDSETX Tuning Parameter Set X 1 or 2 Note 3 2PIDSETX Loop 2 Tuning Parameter Set X 1 or 2 ET_XX XX Elapsed Time TR_XX XX Time Remaining RAMPXXOM Minutes Remaining in Setpoint Ramp Or estimated Three Position Step motor position when no slidewire exists UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Key Function LOWER 1PV For Cascade or 2 Loops DISPLAY 2PV For Cascade or 2 Loops AUX Auxiliary Output OC1 Characterized Output 1 OC2 Characterized Output 2 SPn Setpoint Now for setpoint rate Sigma Current Totalizer Value BIA Output Bias Manual Reset Value TUNE
114. Factory Refer Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display AUX OUT Auxiliary Output One Loop DISABL LSP 1 DISABL Section Selection INP 1 IN AL1 4 13 or or INP 2 IN AL2 CUR OUT2 Auxiliary Output Two INP 3 PV 2 Loops Cascade Selection PV DEV 2 DEV OUTPT2 OUTPUT SP L2 SP LSP1 2 4mA VAL Auxiliary Output Low Scaling Low scale value to represent 4 mA 0 0 Factor Value in for output all others in engineering units 20mA VAL Auxiliary Output High Scaling High scale value to represent 20 mA 0 Factor Value in for output all others in engineering units DIG IN 1 Digital Input 1 Selections NONE ToAout NONE TO MAN TIMER TO LSP AM STA TO 25 ToTUNE TO 3SP SPinit TO DIR TRACK1 ToHOLD TRACK2 ToPID2 ToOUT2 PV 2IN TO RSP PV 3IN DL1 2 RERUN RST FB TO RUN ToPURG ToBEGN LoFIRE STOP MAN LT MAN FS REStot ToLOCK DIG1 COM Digital Input 1 Combinations DISABL DISABL PID2 ToDIR 2 DISAT TOSP1 RUN DIG IN 2 Digital Input 2 Selections Same as DIG IN 1 NONE DIG2 COM Digital Input 2 Combinations Same as DIG1 COM DISABL 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 63 3 18 Introduction Function prompts Communications Set Up Group This data deals with the Communications option that is available with your controller This option allows the controller to be connected to a host computer via an RS422 485 or Modbus protocol If your controller does not have this option the prompts will not appear
115. G or OUT2 ALG TI CUR or CUR Refer to Section 3 Configuration Check the field wiring Make sure the NO or NC contact wiring is correct at the rear terminals Refer to Section 2 Installation for details Make sure all the configurable tuning constants limits and configuration data stored in the controller are correct Reconfigure if necessary Refer to Section 3 Configuration to check all this data and how to reconfigure Check the relay output Put the controller into Manual mode Vary the output above and below the present value Observe OUT indicator on the operator interface Check the Current Proportional Output Put the controller into Manual mode and change the output from 0 to 100 4 20 mA Use a DC milliammeter at the rear terminals to verify the output Recalibrate the controller Refer to Section 8 Output Calibration for details Change MCU Output board Refer to Table 9 23 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 251 Procedure 6 Table 9 13 explains how to troubleshoot Alarm Relay Output failure Table 9 13 Troubleshooting Alarm Relay Output Failure Step What to do How to do it 1 Check the alarm configuration data Reconfigure if necessary If it is correct check the field wiring Refer to Section 3 Configuration for details 2 Check that the applicable alarm If the alarm type is set for PV place relay actua
116. Group The functions listed in this group define how the Single Loop process controller or Loop 1 of a Two Loop process controller will control the process Table 3 12 lists all the function prompts in the Control Set Up group Table 3 12 Control Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer rower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display PV SOURC Process Variable Source INP 1 IN AL 1 INP 3 INP 1 Section INP 2 IN AL2 4 11 PID SETS Tuning Parameter Sets 1 ONLY 1 ONLY 2KEYBD 2PV SW 2SP SW GAIN S Gain scheduling automatically disables Accutune for this loop SW VALUE Automatic Switchover Value Value in engineering units within PV 0 00 or SP range limits LSP S Local Setpoint Source 1 ONLY 1 ONLY TWO THREE Selection automatically disables RSP SRC RSP SRC Remote Setpoint Source NONE IN AL1 INP 3 NONE INP 2 IN AL2 AUTOBIAS Automatic Bias ENABLE DISABL DISABL SP TRACK Local Setpoint Tracking NONE NONE PV RSP PWR MODE Power Up Mode Recall MANUAL MANUAL ALSP A RSP AM SP AM LSP PWR OUT TPSC Output Start up LAST LAST F SAFE SP HiLIM Setpoint High Limit 0 to 100 of span input in 1000 engineering units SP LoLIM Setpoint Low Limit 0 to 100 of span input in 0 engineering units ACTION Control Output Direction DIRECT REVRSE REVRSE 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 59
117. Honeywell UDC 3300 Universal Digital Controller Product Manual Model DC33NB for Nuclear Service 51 52 25 86 10 00 Sensing and Control Copyright Notices and Trademarks Printed in U S A Copyright 2000 by Honeywell Rev C WARRANTY REMEDY Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective materials and faulty workmanship Contact your local sales office for warranty information If warranted goods are returned to Honeywell during the period of coverage Honeywell will repair or replace without charge those items it finds defective The foregoing is Buyer s sole remedy and is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied including those of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Specifications may change without notice The information we supply is believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing However we assume no responsibility for its use While we provide application assistance personally through our literature and the Honeywell web site it is up to the customer to determine the suitability of the product in the application Sensing and Control Honeywell 11 West Spring Street Freeport Illinois 61032 UDC 3300 is a trademark of Honeywell Other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective owners ii UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 About This Document How this manual is organized This Product Manual is divided into 12
118. IN 4 Output or Loop 1 Loop 2 Range Cool Ae 010502 Cool PIDSET2 PIDSET4 RSET4MIN or Gain 2 Gain 4 RSET4RPM Rate 2 Rate 4 CYC3 SEC or Reset 2 Reset 4 CYC3 SX3 Cycle 2 Cycle 4 CYC4 SEC or 50 to 100 Heat PID SET 1 PID SET 3 CYCA SX3 Gain Gain 3 Rate Rate 3 PVEUVAL1 PVEUVAL2 Reset Reset 3 PVEUVAL4 Set 4 Tuning Parameters are not available when PVEUVAL5 ACCUTUN is configured for SP PV PVEUVAL6 PVEUVAL7 Gain Scheduling prompts are only available when PVEUVAL8 PID SETS in the Loop 2 Control Set Up group is configured for GAIN S GAINVAL1 GAINVAL2 GAINVAL3 GAINVAL4 GAINVAL5 GAINVAL6 GAINVAL7 GAINVAL8 82 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 4 4 Setpoint Ramp Rate Programming Set Up Group Introduction SP Ramp Rate Programming group prompts This data deals with enabling Single Setpoint Ramp function or Setpoint Rate on one or both control loops You can start or stop the single SP Ramp by pressing the RUN HOLD key A single setpoint ramp can be configured to occur between the current local setpoint and a final local setpoint over a time interval of from 1 to 255 minutes There is also a configurable rate of change for any local setpoint change ATTENTION SP RAMP and SP RATE will probably cause the SP portion of Accutune to abort PV Tune will continue to function normally however during tuning TUNE configuration SP Ramp and Program are placed into HOLD until tuning completes Table 4 3 lists all t
119. IVE Select a criteria best suited for your process on Loop 1 NORMAL Original critical damping no overshoot FAST A more aggressive tuning with a minimal possible overshoot of less than 0 5 CRITERA2 NORMAL FAST TUNING CRITERIA FOR LOOP 2 SETPOINT ADAPTIVE Select a criteria best suited for your process on Loop 2 NORMAL Original critical damping no overshoot FAST A more aggressive tuning with a minimal possible overshoot of less than 0 5 For Example Slightly underdamped 88 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition AT ERROR or AT ERR 2 depending on loop Read Only RUNING NONE OUTLIM IDFAIL ABORT LOW PV ACCUTUNE ERROR STATUS When an error is detected in the Accutune process an error prompt will appear RUNNING An Accutune process is still active checking process gain even though is not lit It does not affect keyboard operation NONE No errors occurred during last Accutune procedure OUTPUT REACHED LIMITS HIGH OR LOW Output set insufficiently to get to SP value ATTENTION This error will cause the controller to switch from Automatic to Manual mode The output is then set to the value present at the beginning of the Accutune process IDENTIFICATION PROCESS FAILED An illegal value for Gain Rate or
120. K x 650 0 0 0 Note When IN2 and IN3 are at the reference conditions of 600 R 140 F and 44 7psia 30 psig respectively and DP 90 the equation must calculate 650 SCFM To accomplish this divide the DP value by 90 to normalize the equation DPr NS 147 Tet gan 90 IN2 460 Be Rearranging terms Qscem DP x IN3 14 7 Tref j IN2 460 2 90 Prof 650 Example continued on next page Variable Constant K 22049 100 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Figure 4 1 Example of Mass Flow Compensation using Multiplier Divider Algorithm Continued Example Mass Flow Compensation Determined value of K 1 Tref 600 K 8 LM 0 14914 CECI TOUT o Therefore K 2 0 386 0 386 650 _DPr in H20 3 14 7 IN2 460 Calc Summary of Flow Values At Values Conditions Flow rn R psia DP 45 DP 45 H20 50 50 DP 90 H2O 100 Reference 22050 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 101 Table 4 5 Algorithm Group Definitions Continued Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection 8SEG CH1 8 SEGMENT CHARACTERIZER 1 An eight segment characterizer can be applied to either Input 1 Input 2 Output 1 or Output 2 DISABL DISABLE Disables characterizer INPUT1 INP
121. LG PIDA Defines back up control algorithm Tuning RSET2MIN 50 00 GAIN2 See Note 1 Note 1 Set the Gain 2 equal to Input 1 Span Input 2 Span If PB is selected under the Control Set Up group function prompt PBorGAIN set the PROP BD2 to 100 Input 2 Span i Input 1 Span RATE2MIN 0 00 Select PIDSET 1 tuning parameters as needed by the application 6 Options DIG IN1 or AM STA DIG IN2 DO NOT SELECT In the CONTROL set up list do not select SP TRACK as PV or RSP In the SP RAMP set up list do not select SP RATE as ENABLE Inthe ALGORTHM set up list do not select CONT ALG as PID B ON OFF or 3PSTEP Inthe Display menu when PIDSET is displayed DO NOT change the selection Operation Set the local setpoint 2 to 0 of the Input 2 range These features work with the Auto Manual Station In the SP RAMP set up list SP PROG acts on SP1 for backup operation In the SP RAMP set up list SP RAMP acts on for backup operation Inthe CONTROL set up list ACTION as DIRECT or REVERSE for the backup PID A operation The PD MR action is forced to be DIRECT as required for the pass through of the output signal 188 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 5 20 Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression Introduction How it works Configuration Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression minimizes overshoot after a setpoint change or a process disturbance This is especially useful in processes which experienc
122. LOWER DISPLAY LWR DISP MANUAL AUTO AUTO MAN SETPOINT SELECT SP SEL INCRMENT DECRMENT RUN HOLD RUN HOLD dV INCRDECR FUNCTION SETUP FUNC SU If no key is pressed for 20 seconds the test will time out and the controller will go into control mode If any test fails go to Controller Failure Symptoms in Section 9 Troubleshooting Key error When a key is pressed and the prompt KEY ERROR appears in the lower display it will be for one of the following reasons parameter is not available e not in Set Up mode press SET UP key first key malfunction do keyboard test 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 145 5 3 Entering a Security Code Introduction The LOCKOUT feature in the UDC 3300 is used to inhibit changes via keyboard of certain functions or parameters by unauthorized personnel There are different levels of LOCKOUT depending on the level of security required These levels are NONE CALIB CONF VIEW MAX See Section 4 Configuration Definitions for details Security code numbers The level of keyboard lockout may be changed in the Set Up mode However knowledge of a security code number 1 to 4095 may be required to change from one level of lockout to another When a controller leaves the factory it has a security code of 0 which permits changing from one lockout level to another without entering any other code number Procedure If you require the use of a security code select a number f
123. NG ALARM FOR OUTPUT 1 Each alarm output can be configured to be Latching or Non latching NO LAT NO LAT Non latching LATCH LATCH Latching ATTENTION When configured for latching the alarm will stay on after the alarm condition ends until the RUN HOLD key is pressed BLOCK ALARM BLOCKING Prevent snuisance alarms when the controller is first powered up The alarm is suppressed until the parameter gets to the non alarm limit or band Alarm blocking affects both alarm setpoints DISABL DISABL Disables blocking BLOCK1 BLOCK1 Blocks alarm 1 only BLOCK2 BLOCK2 Blocks alarm 2 only BLK 12 BLK 12 Blocks both alarms ATTENTION When enabled on power up or initial enabling via configuration the alarm will not activate unless it has not been in alarm for one cycle 167 ms 138 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 4 16 Introduction Display group prompts Display Parameters Set Up Group This group includes selections for Decimal place Units of temperature and Power frequency Table 4 15 lists all the function prompts in the Display Set Up group and their definitions Table 4 15 Display Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection DECIMAL DECIMAL POINT LOCATION FOR LOOP 1 This selection determines where the decimal point appears in the display XXXX XXXX No Decimal Place fixed
124. NTION This selection cannot be changed while a program is in operation The Accutune TUNE selection will operate during setpoint programming When it is initiated during a program it places the program into Hold until it completes then returns it to either Run or Hold depending what the state was before Tuning started 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 203 6 3 Drawing a Ramp Soak Profile Ramp Soak Profile example Before you do the actual configuration we recommend that you draw a Ramp Soak profile in the space provided on the Program Record Sheet Figure 6 2 and fill in the associated information An example of a Ramp Soak Profile is shown in Figure 6 1 Figure 6 1 Ramp Soak Profile Example of Feo 8 98 217 2 H 24 400 F i 300 200 Time HoursO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 22604 Prompt Function Segment Value Prompt Function Segment Value STRT SEG Start Seg 1 SEG4TIME Soak Time 4 1 hr END SEG End Seg 12 SEG5RAMP Ramp Time 5 1hr 30 min RAMP UNIT Engr Unit for TIME SEG6SP Soak SP 6 250 Ramp RECYCLES Number of 2 SEG6TIME Soak Time 6 Shrs Omin Recycles SOAK DEV Deviation 0 SEG7RAMP Ramp Time 7 2hrs 30min Value PROG END Controller LAST SP SEG8 SP Soak SP 8 500 Status STATE Controller HOLD SEG8TIME Soak Time 8 Ohr 30 min State at end
125. No Position Proportional output is available on 2 loop controllers INTERNAL CASCADE CONTROL See Functional Overview Block Diagram Figure 5 3 and Table 5 25 for selections based on these diagrams The following rules apply for internal Cascade control Loop 2 must be the primary loop Loop 1 must be the secondary internal or slave loop because all output forms exist on Loop 1 Loop 1 remote setpoint is fixed as Loop 2 output No Position Proportional output is available on cascade controllers Selections Refer to Figures 5 2 5 3 and 5 4 Block Diagrams and Table 5 21 for selections based on these diagrams Table 5 21 Control Loop Selections Loop Input 1 Input 2 Input Algorithm LOOP 1 Process Variable Via Configuration or Via Configuration or Yes Digital Inputs Digital Inputs Remote Setpoint No Via configuration or Yes Digital Inputs Feedforward No Yes Yes LOOP2 Process Variable Via Configuration or Via Configuration or Yes Digital Inputs Digital Inputs Remote Setpoint No Via Configuration or Yes Digital Inputs Feedforward No Yes Yes The PV may be a combination of multiple inputs via a Loop input algorithm 168 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Functional overview Figure 5 2 is a block diagram of a Loop 1 of a single loop controller and Loop 1 and Loop 2 of a dual loop controller Figure 5 2 Functional Overview Block Diagram of a Single Loop Loop 1 or Dual Loop
126. Number Table Table Il Table Ill Table IV Table V Table VI 111 LLILT T TT L ol Manuals 0 English Basic Model Commercial Grade with Certification for Nuclear Service Certificate C Certificate of Conformance F3391 Output 1 Current with Alarm 1 Options Output 2 or Alarm 2 90 to 264 Vac Power E Relay E M FM and UL A Relay SS 1 amp Gray Elastomer Bezel Rear Terminal Cover and Tag 0 DIN Cutout Adapter External Interface 0 None Software Options 0 Standard Functions includes Accutune II PV Input 3 T C RTD Radiamatic mV 0 5V 1 5V 0 20mA 4 20mA 0 10V Digital Inputs 3 Two Digital Inputs Optional Input s 3 T C RTD Radiamatic mV 0 5V 1 5V 0 20mA 4 20mA 0 10V 12 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 2 3 Mounting Physical considerations The controller can be mounted on either a vertical or tilted panel using the mounting kit supplied Adequate access space must be available at the back of the panel for installation and servicing activities The overall dimensions and panel cutout requirements for mounting the controller are shown in Figure 2 2 Overall dimensions Figure 2 2 shows the overall dimensions for mounting the controller Figure 2 2 Dimensions 0 008 NEU A NN 96 40 008 3 780 Panel Cutout 92 00 a ae 3 622 TE FUNCTION LOWER SETPOINT E 24 Max
127. ODE NO LAT NON LATCHING Controller stays in last mode that was being used automatic or manual output goes to failsafe value NOTE 1 NOTE 2 LATCH LATCHING Controller goes to manual mode output goes to failsafe value NOTE 2 FAILSAFE 0 to 100 FAILSAFE OUTPUT VALUE The value used here will also be the output level when you have Communications SHED or when NO BURNOUT is configured and Input 1 fails Applies for all output types except 3 Position Step THREE POSITION STEP FAILSAFE OUTPUT 0 PCT 0 PCT Motor goes to closed position 100PCT 100PCT WMotor goes to open position MAN OUT 0 to 100 POWER UP PRESET MANUAL OUTPUT At power up the controller will go to manual and the output to the value set here NOTE 1 AUTO OUT 0 to 100 POWER UP PRESET AUTOMATIC OUTPUT At power up the controller will begin its automatic control at the output value set here NOTE 1 PBorGAIN PROPORTIONAL BAND UNITS Select one of the following for the Proportional P term of the PID algorithm PB PCT PROPORTIONAL BAND selects units of percent proportional band for the P term of the PID algorithm Where PB 100 FS GAIN GAIN GAIN selects the unitless term of gain for the P term of the PID algorithm Where GAIN 100 FS PB 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 119 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition MINorRPM RPM MIN RESET
128. OFF Appears when Limit Cycle tuning is disabled TUNE RUN Press A and LOWER DISPLAY to initiate Limit Cycle tuning Display will read TUNE RUN ToBEGIN Reset SP Program to start of first segment OTI Internal Loop 1 Output Value is being displayed Override has been selected and Loop 1 is in Automatic mode Note 1 Value can be changed if in manual mode Note 2 Value can be changed via increment decrement keys Note 3 The selected set can be changed via increment decrement keys MANUAL Alternately selects AUTO AUTO Lower display automatically displays setpoint value in engineering units MAN Lower display automatically indicates output in 96 SETPOINT Hold key down to cycle through configured setpoints SELECT RUN Alternate action switch initiates or holds the Setpoint Ramp HOLD or Setpoint Program Acknowledges a latched alarm 1 A Increases the selected parameter value v Decreases the selected parameter value 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Section 2 Installation 2 1 Overview Introduction Installation of the UDC 3300 Controller consists of mounting and wiring the controller according to the instructions given in this section Read the pre installation information check the model number interpretation and become familiar with your model selections then proceed with installation What s in this section This section contains the followi
129. OINT TWO Contact closure puts the controller into local setpoint 2 TO LOCAL SETPOINT THREE Contact closure puts the controller into local setpoint 3 When Deviation is selected only one operating parameter will be entered This value represents the deviation level that will produce 20 mA 100 output Zero deviation will produce a center scale 12 mA or 50 output A negative deviation equal in magnitude to the auxiliary output high value will produce a low end 4 mA or 0 output DIG IN 1 TO DIR ToHOLD ToPID2 PV 2IN TO DIRECT ACTION Contact closure selects direct controller action TO HOLD Contact closure suspends Setpoint Program or Setpoint Ramp When contact reopens the controller starts from the Hold point of the Ramp Program unless the Ramp Program was not previously started via the RUN HOLD key This selection applies to either loop TO PID2 Contact closure selects PID Set 2 PV INPUT 2 Contact closure selects PV Input 2 128 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition PV SIN RERUN TO RUN PV INPUT 3 Contact closure selects PV Input 3 RERUN Allows the Setpoint Programmer to be reset to the initial segment of its current cycle RUN Contact closure starts a stopped SP Ramp or Program Upper left character blinks R Reopening the contact p
130. ON 9 0 O Power terminal 7 09 d AC Load x ee Supply O O Power eat L1 Output L N 55 9 Lon Relay 1 3 S 22 4 AC Load S 23 Output 5 59 2 o S zh Relay 2 T N O upply 24 6 0 Power 25 m Al s ACL S 26 Aam E 8 N O Supply L 50 57 0 Power 7 09 Q If the load current is less than the minimum rated value of 20 mA there may be a residual voltage across both ends of the load even if the relay is turned off Use a dummy resistor as shown to counteract this The total current through the resistor and the load current must exceed 20 mA Alarm 2 not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control or Position Proportional control G Solid State relays are rated at 0 5 amps Customer should size fuses accordingly Use Fast Blo fuses only Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps 9120 Vac or 30 Vdc and 2 5 Amps at 240 Vac Customer should size fuses accordingly Use Fast Blo fuses only WARNING Only connect Vac to solid state relays 1184 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 23 Time proportional Figure 2 10 shows the wiring connections for the external 10 amp Solid output continued State Relay Output Model DC330X SS XX Figure 2 10 10 amp Solid State Relay Output Model DC330X SS XX Solid State Relay Q External solid state relays are rated at 15 amps 25 C derated to 10 amps at 55 C Custom
131. ON Connecting an external supply will damage the controller Alarm 2 not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control or Position Proportional control 3 Can also use10 amp solid state relay Part Number 30756018 003 9 Electromechanical relays rated at 5 Amps 9120 Vac or 30 Vdc and 2 5 Amps at 240 Vac Customer should size fuses accordingly Use Fast Blo fuses only 24166 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 25 Current output universal output connections Figure 2 12 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models with Current Output Model DC330X KE XXX and Model DC330X C0 XXX See Table 2 5 for wiring restrictions For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information see Tables 2 7 and 2 8 Figure 2 12 Current Output Current Time Duplex Time Current Duplex Position Proportional or Three Position Step Control See Table 2 7 for relay terminal connections for Output Algorithm selected 27 Load Alarm 2 N o E Supply iid To terminal Q 27 Load p Supply ooo Power SoS Ss 70r9 For Duplex Current Output use Auxiliary Output for Output 2 cool see Figure 2 14 ATTENTION All current outputs are isolated from each other case ground and all inputs Q Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps 9120 Vac or 2 5 Amps at 240 Vac Customer should size fuses accordingly Use Fast Blo fuses only Relays are NOT
132. One Current Output Auxiliary Output and Three Relay Outputs Output Type Current Auxiliary Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Loop 1 is TIME SIMPLEX Loop 2 is Time Simplex N A Not used Loop 1 Output Loop 2 Output Alarm 1 Current or Current Duplex 100 N A Loop 2 Output Loop 1 Output Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Current Time or Time Current N A Loop 2 Loop 1 Output Loop 2 Alarm 1 Output 1 or 2 Output 1 or 2 Loop 1 is TIME DUPLEX TPSC Loop 2 is Time Simplex N A Current or Current Duplex 100 N A Loop 2 Output Loop 1 Output 1 Loop 1 Output 2 Alarm 1 Current Time or Time Current N A Loop 1 is CURRENT OUTPUT or CURRENT DUPLEX 100 Loop 2 is Time Simplex N A Loop 1 Output Loop 2 Output Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Current or Current Duplex N A Current Time or Time Current N A S Loop 1 is TIME CURRENT or CURRENT TIME Loop 2 is Time Simplex N A Loop 1 Loop 1 Loop 2 Output Alarm 1 Output 1 or 2 Output 1 or 2 Current or Current Duplex N A Current Time or Time Current N A TWO LOOP RESTRICTIONS 1 Time Duplex and Three Position Step Control are not available on Control Loop 2 2 Position Proportional Control is not available on Two Loop or Cascade Controllers 3 If either Time Duplex or Three Position Step Control is selected as Control Loop 1 Output then Time Simplex Current Time Duplex and Time Current Duplex are not available for Control Loop 2 Output 4 Current Duplex 5
133. P SP HiLIM 1000 UNITS PERCNT SP LoLIM 0 CSP RATO 1 0 ACTION REVRSE CSP BIAS 0 OUT RATE DISABL LOOPBACK DISABL PCT M UP 0 PCT M DN 0 OUTHILIM 100 ALARMS 151 VAL 90 OUTLoLIM 0 0 A1S2 VAL 10 Hi LIM 100 0 251 VAL 95 I Lo LIM 0 0 A2S2 VAL 5 DROPOFF 0 A1S1TYPE NONE DEADBAND 1 0 A1S2TYPE NONE OUT HYST 0 5 A2S1TYPE NONE FAILMODE NO LAT A2S2TYPE NONE FAILSAFE 0 0 A1S1 HL HIGH MAN OUT A1S1 EV AUTO OUT a A1S2HL LOW PBorGAIN GAIN A1S2 EV uh MINorRPM MIN A2S1 HL HIGH A2S1 EV 252 1 LOW OPTIONS AUX OUT DISABL A2S2 EV 4mA VAL 0 0 AL HYST 0 1 20mA VAL 0 ALM OUT1 NO LAT DIG IN 1 NONE BLOCK DISABL DIG1 COM DISABL DIG IN 2 NONE DIG2 COM DISABL DISPLAY DECIMAL XXXX TEMPUNIT NONE PWR FREQ 60 HZ RATIO 2 DISABL LANGUAGE ENGLIS 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 73 3 25 Configuration Record Sheet Expanded Model DC330E XX XXX Keep a record Enter the value or selection for each prompt on this sheet so you will have a record of how your controller was configured Group Function Value or Factory Group Function Value or Factory Prompt Prompt Selection Setting Prompt Prompt Selection Setting TUNING PROP BD TUNING2 PROPBD3 or or GAIN 1 000 GAIN 3 1 000 or or GAINVALn Read Only T GAINVALn Read Only d RATE MIN 0 00 RATE3MIN 0 00 RSET MIN 1 00 RSET3MIN 1 00 or or RSET RPM RSET3RPM MAN RSET 0 MANRSET3 0 PROPBD2 PROPBD4 or or GAIN 2 1 000 GAIN 4 1 000 RATE2MIN 0 00 RATE4MIN
134. Procedure for Displaying or Changing the Alarm Setpoints Step Operation Press Action 1 Access the until you see Alarm Set Up SET UP Upper Display group SET UP Lower Display ALARMS 2 Access the Function tO successively display the alarm setpoints Alarm Setpoint LOOP 1 2 and their values Their order of appearance Values is shown below Upper Display The alarm setpoint value Lower Display A1S1 VAL Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 value A1S2 VAL Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 value A2S1 VAL Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 value A2S2 VAL Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 value A to change any alarm setpoint value you v select in the upper display 3 Return to normal LOWER operation DISPLAY 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 167 5 12 Two Loops of Control Overview Introduction The UDC 3300 can operate using two independent loops of control or internal Cascade control Available only on Expanded Model DC330E XX XXX TWO INDEPENDENT LOOPS See Functional Overview Block Diagrams for Loop 1 and Loop 2 Figure 5 2 and Table 5 21 for selections based on these diagrams The following rules apply for two independent loops Current output on Loop 2 requires auxiliary output Loop 2 Current Duplex output is limited to 2nd Current output signal only Loop 2 relay output is always dedicated to relay output 2 No Time Duplex outputs on Loop 2 No ON OFF or 3 Position Step algorithms on Loop 2
135. R Use a range of the selected value in engineering units to represent all AUX OUT variable to represent 4 mA parameters except output Use value in percent for output Output can be between 5 and 105 20mA VAL High Scale Value within the AUXILIARY OUTPUT HIGH SCALING FACTOR Use a range of the selected value in engineering units to represent all AUX OUT variable to represent 20 mA parameters except output Use value in percent 96 for Output Output can be between 5 and 105 DIG IN 1 DIGITAL INPUT 1 SELECTIONS AII selections NONE TO MAN TOLSP TO 2SP TO 3SP available for Input 1 The controller returns to its original state when contact opens except when overruled by the keyboard ATTENTION When the controller is configured for either Cascade or Two Loop control then digital input 1 operates only on Loop 1 and digital input 42 operates only on Loop 2 NO DIGITAL INPUT SELECTIONS TO MANUAL Contact closure puts the affected loop into manual mode Contact open returns controller to former mode TO LOCAL SETPOINT When a remote setpoint is configured contact closure puts the controller into local setpoint 1 When contact opens the controller returns to former operation local or remote setpoint unless SETPOINT SELECT key is pressed while digital input is active If this happens the controller will stay in the local setpoint mode when contact opens TO LOCAL SETP
136. ROL parameter group under prompt PBorGAIN Read Only LOOP 1 GAIN This is the value being provided by Gain Scheduling when enabled RATE MIN 0 00 to 10 00 minutes 0 08 or less OFF RATE action in minutes affects the controller s output whenever the deviation is changing and affects it more when the deviation is changing faster Also defined as HEAT Rate on Duplex models for variations of Heat Cool applications 78 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition RSET MIN or RSET RPM 0 02 to 50 00 RSET MIN Reset in Minutes per Repeat RSET RPM Reset in Repeats per Minute RESET Integral Time adjusts the controller s output in accordance with both the size of the deviation SP PV and the time it lasts The amount of the corrective action depends on the value of Gain The Reset adjustment is measured as how many times proportional action is repeated per minute or how many minutes before one repeat of the proportional action occurs Used with control algorithm PID A or PID B Also defined as HEAT Reset on Duplex models for variations of Heat Cool applications The selection of minutes per repeat or repeats per minute is made in the CONTROL parameters group under prompt MINorRPM MAN RSET 100 to 100 in output MANUAL RESET is only applicable if you use control
137. Ramp and SP Rate are disabled SP PROG Setpoint Ramp Soak DISABL DISABL Programming ENABLE ENABL2 ENAB12 SP PROG must be enabled to view the remaining prompts STRT SEG Start Segment Number 1 to 11 m END SEG End Segment Number 2 to 12 Always a soak segment 2 4 12 RAMPUNIT Engineering Units for Ramp TIME hours minutes TIME Segments EU MIN engineering units minute EU HR engineering units hour 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 47 Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display RECYCLES Number of Program 0 to 99 recycles Section Recycles 4 4 SOAK DEV Guaranteed Soak Deviation 0 to 99 Value The number selected will be the PV value in engineering units above or below the setpoint outside of which the timer halts PROG END Program Termination State LASTSP Hold at last setpoint in the program F SAFE Manual mode Failsafe output STATE Program State at Program DISABL End HOLD ToBEGIN Reset SP Program DISABL DISABL KEYPAD SEG1RAMP or Segment 1 Ramp Time or 0 99 hours 0 59 minutes SEG1RATE Segment 1 Ramp Rate Engineering units minute or Engineering units hour Select TIME EU MIN or EU HR at prompt RAMPUNIT All ramps will use the same selection SEG2 SP Segment 2 Soak Setpoint Within the Setpoint limits Value SEG2TIME Segment 2 Soak Duration 0 99 hours
138. Rate that will apply to any Local setpoint change immediately Refer to the Configuration Section to enable the ramp for either loop and set an upscale or downscale rate value Make sure SP RAMP and SP PROG are disabled When a local setpoint change is made the controller will ramp from the original setpoint to the new one at the rate specified This changing current setpoint can be viewed as SPn on the lower display Press the LOWER DISPLAY key until you see SPn and the setpoint value in the lower display 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 159 5 9 Single Setpoint Ramp Configuring the setpoint ramp Procedure You can configure a single setpoint ramp to occur between the current local setpoint and a final local setpoint over a time interval of from 1 to 255 minutes You can RUN or HOLD the ramp at any time The UDC 3300 has PV Hot Start functionality as standard feature This means that at power up Local Setpoint 1 is set to the current PV value and the Ramp Rate or Program then starts from this value Table 5 14 lists the procedure for configuring the Setpoint Ramp parameters The procedure for SP Program is in Section 6 Setpoint Programming Option Table 5 14 Procedure for Configuring a Setpoint Ramp Step Operation Press Action 1 Select until you see SP RAMP SET UP Upper Display Lower Display Set Up Group 2 Select the Function Until you see Setpoint Ramp 11 12 Upper Di
139. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each function you want to change 5 Exit configuration TOWER This exits from the configuration mode DISPLAY Alarms on the setpoint You can configure an event to go ON or OFF at the beginning or end of any segment Refer to Section 3 Configuration under Alarms Parameters Group for details program Prompt hierarchy Table 6 2 lists all the function prompts for Setpoint Program data configuration in the order of their appearance Follow the procedure in Table 6 1 to transfer the data from your setpoint Ramp Soak profile into the controller All parameters may be changed while the program is disabled or in HOLD 206 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Table 6 2 Prompt Hierarchy and Available Selections Prompt Definition Value or Selection use A or V Lower Upper Display Display SP RAMP Setpoint Ramp Selection Selections DISABL SP RAMP must be disabled to allow Setpoint Programming SP RATE Setpoint Rate of Change Selections DISABL SP RATE must be disabled to allow Setpoint Programming SP PROG Setpoint Ramp Soak Selections Programmer DISABL ENABLE Loop 1 ENABL2 Loop 2 ENAB12 Loops 1 and 2 SP PROG must be enabled to view the remaining prompts STRT SEG Start Segment Number Enter Value 1 to 11 END SEG End Segment Number Enter Value 2 to 12 Always end in a soak Segment 2 4 12 RAMPUNIT Engine
140. S1TYPE NONE A2S2TYPE NONE Figure 2 19 Transmitter Power for 4 20 mA 2 wire Transmitter Using Open Collector Alarm 2 Output Model DC330X XT XXX If necessary install zener diode here to reduce voltage at transmitter 2 wire Transmitter 250 ohm resistor 32 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Transmitter power for 4 20 mA 2 wire transmitter auxiliary The wiring diagram example shown in Figure 2 20 Model DC330X XX 2XX or DC330X XX 5XX provides 30 Vdc at terminal 16 with the capability of driving up to 22 mA as required by the transmitter output a CE Ur which is wired in series If the transmitter terminal voltage must be limited to less than 30 volts you can insert a zener diode between the positive transmitter terminal and terminal 16 For example an IN4733A zener diode will limit the voltage at the transmitter to 25 Vdc Configure AUX OUT OUTPUT Calibrate the Auxiliary Output using the procedure given in Section 8 4 Auxiliary Output Calibration ZERO VAL 4095 SPAN VAL 4095 Figure 2 20 Transmitter Power for 4 20 mA 2 wire Transmitter Using Auxiliary Output Model DC330X XX 2XX or DC330X XX 5XX If necessary install zener diode here to reduce 2 wire voltage at transmitter Transmitter 250 ohm resistor 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 33 2 6 Control relays Alarm relays Control and Alarm Relay Contact Information Table
141. S422 485 Communications Board P N 30756693 502 Basic or P N 30756693 503 Expanded Table 9 22 Aux Out Communications Board Replacement Procedure Step Action 1 Remove the chassis from the case See Figure 9 1 2 Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis See Figure 9 3 3 Lay the boards flat and identify the Auxiliary Output or the Communications board See Figure 9 4 4 Remove the transformer plug from connector J8 5 The Aux Out Communications board is attached to the MCU Output board by three mounting posts Locate these posts under the MCU Output board 6 Use small pliers and squeeze the ends of each post together and push it up through the board Remove the Aux Out Communications board 7 If you are replacing a Communications Board a new PROM is supplied with the board Locate the PROM shown in Figure 9 4 and gently pry out the old PROM Orient the new PROM supplied and gently press into place 8 Orient the new Aux Out Communications board onto the MCU Output board and push the mounting posts down through the MCU Output board until they click into place 9 Replace the transformer plug onto connector J8 10 Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis Make sure the connections to the keyboard assembly are made and that the release points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards 11 Reinstall the chassis into the case Push in hard then tighten the screw
142. SEGASP Soak SP 4 SG12TIME Soak Time 12 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 205 6 4 Introduction Entering the Setpoint Program Data The procedure listed in Table 6 1 tells you what keys to press and what prompts you will see when entering the setpoint program data Follow the prompt hierarchy listed in Table 6 2 when selecting the functions for setpoint programming Make sure SP RAMP and SP RATE are disabled first Table 6 1 Setpoint Program Data Entry Procedure Step Action Press Result 1 Select SP PROG until you see Group SET UP Upper Display ENABLE Dispi ENABL2 ower Display ENAB12 or VY enable the setpoint programming option on Loop 1 Loop 2 or both 2 Select the functions FUNCTION This accesses the function prompts SP Programming LOOP 1 2 Upper Display Shows the current value for each prompt Lower Display The individual function prompts within the setpoint program group are shown Successive presses of the FUNCTION key will sequentially display all the functions and their values or selections Follow the prompt hierarchy shown in Table 6 2 3 Change the value or or VY This changes the value or selection in the upper display If the selection of a function display blinks you are trying to select an unacceptable value prompt 4 Enter value or FUNCTION This enters the value or selection and goes to another prompt selection into memory LOOP 1 2
143. SP Ramp 2SP LOCAL SETPOINT 2 3SP LOCAL SETPOINT 3 RSP REMOTE SETPOINT 1IN INPUT 1 Used only with combinational input algorithms 21 INPUT 2 3IN INPUT 3 POS SLIDEWIRE POSITION Used only with TPSC CSP COMPUTER SETPOINT When SP is in override DEV DEVIATION Maximum negative display is 999 9 PIDSETX TUNING PARAMETER SET 1 Selected set for single loop or primary loop configuration where X is either 1 or 2 2PIDSETX TUNING PARAMETER SET 2 Selected set for secondary loop configuration where X is either 1 or 2 ET XX XX ELAPSED TIME Time that has elapsed on timer in Hours Minutes TR XX XX TIME REMAINING Time that remains on timer in Hours Minutes RAMPXXXM SETPOINT RAMP TIME Time remaining in the setpoint ramp in minutes O SK XXXX TIME REMAINING IN SOAK 1PV PROCESS VARIABLE 1 For Cascade or 2 loop applications 2PV PROCESS VARIABLE 2 For cascade or 2 loop applications AUX AUXILIARY OUTPUT Displayed only when Loop 2 is not used or when Loop 2 is Time Simplex and Loop 1 is not Current Duplex OC1 CHARACTERIZED OUTPUT 1 Displayed if Loop 1 output is characterized OC2 CHARACTERIZED OUTPUT 2 Displayed if Loop 2 output is characterized SPn SP RATE SETPOINT Current setpoint for setpoint rate applications Y Sigma CURRENT TOTALIZER VALUE Displays the total flow volume being measured BIA BIAS Displays the manual reset value for algorithm PD MR TUNE OFF LIMIT CYCLE TUNING NOT RUNNING Appears when Accutune is dis
144. Set Up Group sse 57 3 14 Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group sse 58 3 15 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group 59 3 16 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up 61 3 17 Options Set Up Group sssssssssssssseeeee enne nennen 63 3 18 Communications Set Up 64 3 19 Alarms Set Up Group sssssssssseseseeeeeenee nennen rennen trennt 66 3 20 Display Parameters Set Up 68 3 21 Calibration Group sssssssssssssseeseeeeeeenen nnns en nennen nnne nennen 69 3 22 Maintenance Set Up Group sese 70 23 29 Sfatus GrOUp teinte bte 71 3 24 Configuration Record Sheet Basic Model DC330B XX XXX DMCS Model 06 508 5 0 05 0 0 qm 72 3 25 Configuration Record Sheet Expanded Model 74 SECTION 4 CONFIGURATION PROMPT DEFINITIONS 77 77 4 2 Loop Tuning Parameters Set Up 78 4 3 Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up 82 4 4 Setpoint Ramp Rate Programming Set Up 83 4 5 Set Up Group nennen nnne nennen 86
145. Setpoint Tuning PV Adapt Provides SP only tuning plus PV adaptive tuning whenever a PV process disturbance of 0 3 span or greater occurs Not available on Basic Model DC330B To configure this item refer to Section 3 Configuration Set Up Group ACCUTUNE Function Prompt ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2 depending on which loop you are tuning Select DISABL TUNE SP TUN PV or SP PV Use the A or V key If SP is selected Enter the setpoint change value function prompt SP CHANG or SP CHAN2 Verify or change the process gain value function prompt KPG or KPG 2 Verify criteria function prompt CRITERIA or CRITERA2 Accutune can be used on either or both loops However while one loop is operating by SP tuning the configuration of either loop cannot be changed When one loop is operating by PV adaptive tuning the other loop can have its configuration changed Table 5 34 is a list of rules for Accutune 190 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Table 5 34 Accutune Rules and Regulations TUNE SP Applicable Rule X TUNE On Demand tuning will work for all control algorithms except ON OFF Process line out is not required X TUNE On Demand tuning works for integrating processes X SP tuning will work only for algorithm PID a or PID B selections i e it will NOT work with ON OFF Three Position Step or PD MR control algorithms X SP tuning can tune on all local or co
146. TOMATIC SWITCHOVER When the continued setpoint is GREATER than the value set at prompt SW VALUE Switchover Value the controller will use Gain Rate Reset and Cycle When the setpoint is LESS than the value set at prompt SW VALUE the controller will use Gain 2 Rate 2 Reset 2 and Cycle 2 Other prompts affected SW VALUE GAIN S GAIN SCHEDULING allows you to schedule eight user defined Gain segments applied over a user defined PV range Enter Gain and PV values under Tuning Set Up prompts PB or GAIN selection in this group also applies Part of Math option ATTENTION Gain scheduling automatically disables Accutune for this loop SW VALUE Value in engineering units within PV or SP range limits AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER VALUE This is the value of Process Variable or Setpoint at which the controller will switch from Tuning Constant Set 2 to Set 1 Only appears when PID SETS selection is configured for either 2 PVSW or 2 SPSW LSP S 1 ONLY TWO THREE LOCAL SETPOINT SOURCE This selection determines what your local setpoint source will be LOCAL SETPOINT The setpoint entered from the keyboard TWO LOCAL SETPOINTS This selection lets you switch between two local setpoints using the SETPOINT SELECT key THREE LOCAL SETPOINTS This selection lets you switch between three local setpoints using the SETPOINT SELECT key LSP 3 is mutually exclusive with RSP or Internal Cascade
147. Table 2 4 for Input 2 Jumper selections mV or Volts Thermocouple except 0 10 Volts Use Thermocouple mV or Volt extension wire only 1 mle Q ics The 2500 load resistor for 4 20 mA or the voltage divider for 0 10 volts or the 500 ohm C J compensation resistor is supplied with the controller when the input is specified These items must be installed when you wire the controller before start up Input 2 is not available with Position Proportional Output Supply INPUT 1 Carbon mV or Volts When installing the cold Thermocouple except 0 10 Volts junction Part number P 30757088 001 Use Thermocouple Carbon input remove the screws tension wire only E mV or Volt from terminals 25 and 27 source Input 1 or 22 and 24 Input C 2 and install the assembly into place install C J on the R terminal connect tang to terminal Remove screw and For Relative Humidity option use Input 1 as the wet bulb input and Input 2 as the dry bulb input 0 10 Volts 4 20 milliamps For Carbon Potential option use Input 1 as the Carbon Probe input 24159 20 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Two HLAI replace Figure 2 7 shows the wiring connections for replacing the second LLAI second LLAI with two HLAI connections Figure 2 7 Two HLAI Replace 2nd LLAI Connections ATTENTION Remove Input 2 jumper when replacing second LLAI with tw
148. Table 3 15 lists all the function prompts in the Communications Set Up group Table 3 15 Communications Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Lower Display Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Upper Display Factory Setting Refer to ComSTATE Communications Option State DISABL RS422 MODBUS MB3K DISABL Com ADDR Communications Station Address 1 to 99 ComADDR2 Loop 2 Communications Station Address 1 to 99 When ComSTATE MODBUS ComADDR2 Com ADDR SHEDTIME Shed Time 0 to 255 sample periods 1 sample period 0 333 seconds 0 No Shed PARITY Parity NONE ODD EVEN Fixed at NONE when ComSTATE MODBUS ODD BAUD Baud Rate 2400 4800 9600 19200 2400 DUPLEX Duplex Operation HALF FULL ATTENTION When ComSTATE MODBUS this selection is fixed at HALF When the RS422 485 Auxiliary output option board is installed this selection is fixed at HALF HALF TX DELAY Transmission Delay 1 to 500 milliseconds SHEDMODE Shed Controller Mode and Output Level LAST TO MAN FSAFE ToAUTO LAST Section 4 14 64 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer rower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display SHEDSP Shed Setpoint Recall TO LSP TO LSP TO
149. Tuning Parameter Sets SW VALUE nto n HR PER Automatic Switchover Value RSP SR iiri tent Pte e Remote Setpoint Source SPTRAGNK Local Setpoint Tracking 5 M Setpoint High Limit Setpoint Low Limit ACTION As iiti feeit tet ertet ce Control Output Direction OUT RATE 2 3 nensi poo net De e o edes Output Change Rate P GT M WP scat Output Rate Up Value E Output Rate Down Value OUTRE e High Output Limit S URHE BL E Low Output Limit High Reset Limit rit ehe Low Reset Limit DROPOF ES A tb ee tegit debe vea dee Controller Dropoff Value DEADBANDJ et ette rt tt tt te vete eget Output Relay Deadband QUT EY ST etit tidem cett ete et erm se pr porte rade Output Relay Hysteresis FAIEMOBDBE iot itt bv e to Oen Ud Dee Failsafe Mode EAIESAFE itti teretes Failsafe Output Value for all outputs except 3P Step PBOIGAIN te peteret ptor ene Proportional Band or Gain Units MINOREM ME Reset Units SW VALUE ccrto e ER tbe ERE aes Automatic Switchover Value Ec
150. URRENT DUPLEX 50 Loop 2 is Time Simplex Loop 1 Output 1 Loop 1 Output 2 N A Loop 2 Output Alarm 1 Current N A m m Current Time or Time Current N A Loop 1 is TIME CURRENT or CURRENT TIME Loop 2 is Time Simplex Loop 1 Not used N A Loop 1 Loop 2 Output Output 1 or 2 Ouptut 1 or 2 Current or Current Duplex 100 Loop 1 Loop 2 Output N A Loop 1 Alarm 1 Output 1 or 2 Output 1 or 2 Current Time or Time Current Loop 1 Loop 2 N A Loop 1 Loop 2 Output 1 or 2 TWO LOOP RESTRICTIONS 1 Time Duplex and Three Position Step Control are not available on Control Loop 2 2 Position Proportional Control is not available on Two Loop or Cascade Controllers 3 If either Time Duplex or Three Position Step Control is selected as Control Loop 1 Output then Time Simplex Current Time Duplex and Time Current Duplex are not available for Control Loop 2 Output 4 Current Duplex 50 is not available on Model No DC330E EE 2XX 172 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 5 13 Configuring Two Loops of Control Select 2 loop algorithm The procedure in Table 5 24 shows you how select the 2 loop algorithm Table 5 24 Procedure for Selecting 2 loop Algorithm Step Operation Press Action 1 Select Algorithm Set Up Group until you see Upper Display SET UP Lower Display SET UP 2 Select the PID runction tO successively display the following Loops LOOP 1 2 constants Upper D
151. UT 1 Characterizer is applied to Input 1 INPUT2 INPUT 2 Characterizer is applied to Input 2 L1 OUT LOOP 1 OUTPUT Characterizer is applied to Loop 1 Output NOTE 1 L2 OUT LOOP 2 OUTPUT Characterizer is applied to Loop 2 Output There are eight Xn Input values and eight Yn Output values to be selected The following rules apply When Input 2 is used Input 2 Ratio and Bias are applied to the Xn Values When one of the Loop outputs are selected the Xn Input values are the Output from the control algorithm and the Yn Output is the final control element action This application is useful for non linear control elements or Process Variable A simple example is shown in Figure 4 2 ATTENTION The X values below should be entered as increasing values from 0 to 100 from N 0 to 8 X0 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 X0 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X1 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 X1 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X2 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 X2 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X3 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 X3 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X4 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 X4 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X5 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 X5 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X6 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 X6 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X7 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 X7 INPUT VALUE X AXIS X8 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 X8 INPUT VALUE X AXIS YO VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 YO INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y1 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 Y1 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y2 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 Y2 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y3 VALUE 0 00
152. UT n 1 2 0 3 FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 You will see Upper Display DISABL Lower Display CAL IN n n 1 2 or3 AsV The calibration sequence is enabled and you will see Upper Display BEGIN Lower Display CAL IN n n 1 2 or3 At the completion of the sequence the selection automatically reverts to disable Calibrate 0 FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 You will see Upper Display APPLY Lower Display INn ZERO n 1 2 or3 Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to the 0 range value for your particular input sensor See 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 223 Step Description Press Action 3 Calibrate 100 You will see FUNCTION Upper Display a Lower Display Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to the 100 range value for your particular input sensor See Table 7 1 for Voltage or Resistance equivalents Wait 15 seconds and If Then you are calibrating a Go to step 4 thermocouple input Input 1 or 2 you are calibrating other Go to step 5 than a thermocouple input 4 Check the Cold Junction The calculations for zero and span are now stored and Temperature FUNCTION you will see LOOP 1 2 Upper Display i N The The cold junction accuracy of the controller temperature at the is directly affected by the rear terminals accuracy of this value Change this value only if A the
153. VAL1 GAINVAL2 GAINVAL3 GAINVAL4 GAINVAL5 GAINVAL6 GAINVAL7 GAINVAL8 Gain 1 through Gain 8 Value for Gain Scheduling 0 001 to 1000 floating Gain or Proportional Band 1 000 Section 4 2 prompt PBorGAIN then the displayed values are in PB but the lower display will still show Gain Only appears if LOCKOUT NONE ATTENTION If units of percent proportional band PB are selected under the Control Set Up prompt function 44 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 7 Two Loops Function prompts Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group Cascade or Table 3 4 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning 2 Set Up group This group is only displayed if the controller is configured for Cascade or 2 Loop control prompt PIDLOOPS in Algorithm Data Set Up group Table 3 4 Tuning Loop 2 Group Function Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display PROPBD3 Proportional Band 3 0 1 to 9999 zi Section or or 4 3 GAIN 3 Gain 3 0 001 to 1000 1 000 or or GAINVALn Gain Value being used by Read Only E Gain Scheduling when enabled RATE3MIN Rate 3 in Minutes 0 00 to 10 00 minutes 0 00 RSET3MIN Reset 3 in minutes repeat 0 02 to 50 00 1 00 or or RSET3RPM Reset 3 in repeats minute 55 MANRSET3 Manual Reset 3 100 to 100 Output 0 0 PROPBD4 Proportional Band 4 0
154. able is within the deviation for the configured soak time Whenever the deviation is exceeded soak timing is frozen 202 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Program state Program termination state Ramp unit ATTENTION There are no guaranteed soaks whenever the deviation value is configured to 0 i e soak segments start timing soak duration as soon as the soak setpoint is first reached regardless of where the process variable remains relative to the soak segment The value is the number in engineering units above or below the setpoint outside of which the timer halts The range is 0 to 99 The decimal location corresponds to input 1 decimal selection This selection determines the program state after completion The selections are DISABL Program is disabled HOLD Program on hold RUN key restarts the program This function determines the status of the controller upon completion The selections are LASTSP controls to last setpoint and last control mode F SAFE manual mode failsafe output ATTENTION power is lost during a program upon power up the controller will be in hold and the setpoint value will be the setpoint value prior to the beginning of the setpoint program The program is placed in hold at the beginning of the first segment in the program This determines the engineering units for the ramp segments The selections are TIME Hours Minutes RATE EU MIN or EU HR ATTE
155. abled TUNE RUN LIMIT CYCLE TUNING RUNNING Appears when Accutune is enabled ToBEGIN RESET SP PROGRAM TO START OF FIRST SEGMENT OTI OUTPUT OVERRIDE 2 PID LOOPS ONLY Appears when Internal Loop 1 Output value is displayed This represents the internal output 1 value before override 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 149 Diagnostic error The UDC 3300 performs background tests to verify data and memory messages integrity If there is a malfunction an error message will be displayed In the case of more than one simultaneous malfunction only the one with the highest priority will appear on the lower display A list of error messages is contained in Table 5 5 If any of these error messages occur refer to Section 9 Troubleshooting for information to correct the failure Table 5 5 Error Messages Prompt Description EE FAIL Unable to write to nonvolatile memory INP1FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 1 integration INP2FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 2 integration INP3FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 3 integration SW FAIL Slidewire input failure Position Proportional Control automatically switched to Three Position Step Control CONF ERR Configuration Errors for Loop 1 Low limit greater than high limit for PV SP Reset or Output CONF ER2 Configuration Errors for Loop 2 Low limit greater than high limit for PV SP Reset or Output or Loop 2 output has not been selected
156. ackground Tests i ente dee nde peeing vest ies 244 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Table 9 7 Controller Failure Symptom S see hapaa entente nnne 246 Table 9 8 Troubleshooting Power Failure Symptoms 247 Table 9 9 Troubleshooting Current Proportional Output Failure 248 Table 9 10 Troubleshooting Position Proportional Output 249 Table 9 11 Troubleshooting Time Proportional Output Failure 250 Table 9 12 Troubleshooting Time Current or Current Time Proportional Output Failure 251 Table 9 13 Troubleshooting Alarm Relay Output 252 Table 9 14 Troubleshooting a Keyboard 253 Table 9 15 Troubleshooting a Communications 254 Table 9 16 How to Remove the 000 eene nennen nnne nenne 256 Table 9 17 Display Keyboard Assembly Replacement Procedure 257 Table 9 18 Printed Wiring Board Removal from Chassis sse 258 Table 9 19 Second Input Board Replacement 260 Table 9 20 Power Input Board Replacement 260 Table 9 21 Digital Input Board Replacement Procedure
157. active When the upper control reactivates the digital input switch is closed and the Auto Manual Station becomes a repeater station and allows the upper control output signal to pass through There are some things to consider when configuring the controller The PV range stays as the IN1 range even while IN2 is the PV when the switch is closed therefore The IN2 HI must be less than or equal to the IN1 HI Suggest IN2 HI 100 0 The IN2 LO must be greater than or equal to the INI LO Suggest IN2 LO 0 0 The TUNING GAIN2 must be equal to INI HI INI LO IN2 HI IN2 LO Refer to Table 5 33 and set up the controller in the order shown Table 5 33 Auto Manual Station Mode Configuration Procedure SET rune Press A V Step Press Press fae to to Enter Remarks to Select Set Select Value or Up Group Function Selection Prompts 1 Control PID SETS 2KEYBD Select other control parameters as needed by the LSP S Two application SP TRACK NONE 2 Algorithm CONT ALG PD MR This allows setting of the Manual Reset value Tuning MAN RSET 0 Manual reset of 0 for no output bias and requires LSP2 0 If bias is required set MR to equal the desired output bias value 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 187 SET FUNC Press A V Step Press Press s tO to Enter Remarks to Select Set Select Value or Up Group Function Selection Prompts Algorithm CONT A
158. al and 3 Position Step Output Calibration CONF ERR PV low limit is PV high limit 1 Check the configuration for each item and SP low limit is SP high limit reconfigure if necessary Output low limit Output high limit 244 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Reason for Failure How to Correct the Problem Display INP1 RNG Input 1 out of range The process inputis 1 Make sure the range and actuation are configured outside the range limits properly 2 Check the input source 3 Restore the factory calibration See Section 7 6 4 Field calibrate See Section 7 Input Calibration INP2 RNG Input 2 out of range The remote input is Same as INP1 RNG above outside the range limits INP3 RNG Input 3 out of range The remote input is Same as INP1 RNG above outside the range limits PV LIMIT PV out of range 1 Make sure the input signal is correct PV INP1 INP1 BIAS 4 fox 2 Make sure the Bias setting is correct 3 Recheck the calibration Use Bias of 0 0 RV LIMIT The result of the formula shown below is 1 Make sure the input signal is correct beyond the range of the remote variable r 2 Make sure the Ratio and Bias settings are correct RV INP2 X RATIO BIAS 3 Recheck the calibration Use a Ratio of 1 0 anda Bias of 0 0 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 245 9 6 Introduction Controller Failure Symptoms In addition to the error message p
159. al for complete information 142 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 5 1 Overview Section 5 Operation Introduction This section gives you all the information necessary to monitor and operate your controller Review the Operator Interface shown in Monitoring to make sure you are familiar with the indicator definitions The key functions are listed in Section 1 Overview What s in this section This section contains the following topics Topic See Page 5 1 Overview 143 5 2 How to Power Up the Controller 144 5 3 Entering a Security Code 146 5 4 Monitoring Your Controller 147 5 5 Start up Procedure 151 5 6 Operating Modes 152 5 7 Setpoints 156 5 8 Setpoint Ramp Rate 159 5 9 Single Setpoint Ramp 160 5 10 Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants 164 5 11 Alarm Setpoints 167 5 12 Two Loops of Control Overview 168 5 13 Configuring Two Loops of Control 173 5 14 Monitoring Two Loops of Control 176 5 15 Operating Two Loops of Control 177 5 16 Three Position Step Control Algorithm 178 5 17 Input Math Algorithms 179 5 18 Digital Input Option Remote Switching 182 5 19 Auto Manual Station 186 5 20 Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression 189 5 21 Accutune 190 5 22 Carbon Potential 198 5 23 HealthWatch 200 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 143 5 2 How to Power Up the Controller Apply power Diagnostic tests Te
160. and do not press any keys for 30 seconds the controller will time out and revert to the mode and display that was being used prior to entry into Set Up mode Key Error When a key is pressed and the prompt KEY ERROR appears in the lower display it will be for one of the following reasons parameter not available not in Set Up mode press SET UP key first key malfunction do keyboard test operation Individual key locked out 40 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 5 Introduction Procedure Configuration Procedure Each of the Set Up groups and their functions are pre configured at the factory The factory settings are shown in Tables 3 3 through 3 19 which follow this procedure If you want to change any of these selections or values follow the procedure in Table 3 2 This procedure tells you the keys to press to get to any Set Up group and any associated Function parameter prompt If you need a detailed explanation of any prompt refer to Section 4 Configuration Parameter Definitions Follow the procedure listed in Table 3 2 to access the Set Up groups and Function prompts ATTENTION The prompting scrolls at a rate of 2 3 seconds when the SET UP or FUNCTION key is held in Also 4 V keys will move group prompts forward or backward at a rate twice as fast Table 3 2 Configuration Procedure Step Operation Press Result 1 Select Set Up mo
161. and should only be used when an absolute accuracy is the most important criteria For this selection no burnout signal is sent to the sensor ATTENTION For no Burnout i e NONE to function properly on a 4 20 mA input there must be a dropping resistor directly across the input terminals i e not remote then the unit can detect the zero voltage that occurs when the 4 20 mA line is opened EMISSIV1 0 01 to 1 00 EMISSIVITY is a correction factor applied to the Radiamatic input signal that is the ratio of the actual energy emitted from the target to the energy which would be emitted if the target were a perfect radiator Available only for Radiamatic inputs 112 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 4 9 Input 2 Parameters Set Up Group Introduction These are the parameters required for Input 2 actuation transmitter characterization high and low range values in engineering units ratio bias filter burnout and emissivity ATTENTION Prompts for Input 2 appear only if the Input 2 PWA is installed Input 2 group prompts Table 4 8 lists all the function prompts in the Input 2 Set Up group and their definitions Table 4 8 Input 2 Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection IN2 TYPE INPUT 2 ACTUATION TYPE This selection determines what actuation you are going to use for Input 2 ATTENTION Changing t
162. are the same then only Loop 1 will respond SHEDTIME 0 to 255 SHED TIME The number that represents how many sample periods there will be before the controller sheds from communications Each period equals 1 3 seconds 0 equals No shed 132 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection PARITY PARITY pertains to the use of a self checking code employing binary digits in which the total number of ONE s or ZERO s in each permissible code expression is either ODD or EVEN NONE Fixed at NONE when ComSTATE MODBUS ODD ODD PARITY EVEN EVEN PARITY BAUD BAUD RATE is the transmission speed in bits per second 2400 2400 BAUD 4800 4800 BAUD 9600 9600 BAUD 19200 19200 BAUD DUPLEX DUPLEX Transmission Type RS422 485 ASCII only HALF HALF DUPLEX Two wires FULL FULL DUPLEX Four wires ATTENTION When ComSTATE MODBUS this selection is fixed at HALF When the Auxiliary Output RS422 485 Option board is installed this selection is fixed at HALF TX DELAY 1 to 500 milliseconds TX DELAY Configurable response delay timer allows you to force the UDC to delay its response for a time period of from 1 to 500 milliseconds compatible with the host system hardware software SHEDMODE LAST TO MAN FSAFE ToAUTO SHED CONTROLLER MODE AND OUTPUT LEVEL Determines the mode of l
163. available on DC330X CO XXX 24167 Table 2 5 Universal Output Wiring Functionality and Restrictions for Figure 2 12 Controller with Two Current Outputs and Two Relay Outputs SINGLE LOOP OR CASCADE CONTROL OUTPUT Output Type Current Auxiliary Relay 1 Relay 2 Relay 3 Time Simplex Not used Not used N A Output 1 Alarm 1 Current Output 1 Not used N A Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Position not available on Not used Not used N A Output 1 Output 2 Cascade Control Time Duplex or TPSC Not used Not used N A Output 1 Output 2 Current Duplex 100 Output 1 Not used N A Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Current Duplex 5096 Output 1 Output 2 N A Alarm 2 Alarm 1 Current Time or Output 1 or 2 Not used N A Output 1 or 2 Alarm 1 Time Current 26 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Current output universal output connections continued Figure 2 13 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models with a Current Output Auxiliary Output and three Relay Outputs Model DC330X EE 2XX See Table 2 6 for wiring restrictions For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information see Tables 2 7 and 2 8 Figure 2 13 Auxiliary Output and Three Relay Outputs Relay Load Load ae 4 Load 44 terminal ga QUPDIY one end only 40r 6 dor oum 0 Power i Output N C a Relay Load Load o o Load L shield to Supply ground at a To O Power
164. ay Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition CONT ALG continued 3PSTEP THREE POSITION STEP The Three Position Step Control algorithm allows the control of a valve or other actuator with an electric motor driven by two controller relay outputs one to move the motor upscale the other downscale without a feedback slidewire linked to the motor shaft The deadband is adjustable in the same manner as the duplex output algorithm The Three Position Step Control algorithm provides an output display OUT which is an estimated motor position since the motor is not using any slidewire feedback Although this output indication is only an approximation it is corrected each time the controller drives the motor to one of its stops 0 or 100 It avoids all the control problems associated with the feedback slidewire wear dirt noise When operating in this algorithm the estimated OUT display is shown to the nearest percent i e no decimal Refer to the Operation section for motor position displays As a customer configurable option when a second input board is installed the motor slidewire can be connected to the controller The actual slidewire position is then shown on the lower display as POS This value is used for display only It is NOT used in the Three Position Step algorithm To configure this option set Input 2 actuation to SLIDEW Calibrate the slidewire Other prompt
165. ay Contact information see Tables 2 7 and 2 8 Calibration Position Proportional Output or Three Position Step models must have the output calibrated after installation see Section S Position Proportional Output Calibration to ensure that the displayed output slidewire position agrees with the actual final control element position Three Position Step models only require that the motor time be entered Full calibration is not required Figure 2 14 Position Proportional Output or Three Position Step Models DC330X EE XXX X2 DC330X AA XXX X2 Motor Power Q Ru 5 Amp Fast Blo fuse Slidewire 100 to 1000 Q mechanically linked to motor 1 Output N C Relay 1 Eu 4 Output N C owa 5 Connect shield to ground at one end only amp Power To terminal 7or9 5 Amp Fast Blo fuse Alarm 2 is not available with Position Proportional output or Three Position Step control Do not run slidewire cable in the same conduit as AC power Electrical noise suppression may be required Hefer to Section 12 Slidewire input is not required for Three Position Step control but can be used for motor position indication 24168 28 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Auxiliary output Figure 2 15 shows the wiring connections for the Auxiliary Output option connections Models DC330X XX 2XX DC330X XX 5XX Figure 2 15 Auxiliary Output Connections Models DC330X XX 2XX DC33
166. ble 3 15 Table 3 16 Table 3 17 Table 3 18 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 4 4 Table 4 5 Table 4 6 Table 4 7 Table 4 8 Table 4 9 Table 4 10 Table 4 11 Table 4 12 Table 4 13 Table 4 14 Table 4 15 Table 4 16 Table 5 1 Table 5 2 Table 5 3 Table 5 4 Table 5 5 Table 5 6 Table 5 7 Table 5 8 Table 5 9 Function of C 4 SPeciHICALlONS REED 8 Procedure for Mounting the Controller esessssssseseeeeeen eee 14 Permissible Wiring BUNGO 16 Input 2 Jumper 21 Control Relay Contact Information essen 34 Alarm Relay Contact Information sse nnns 34 COMPQUPATION THOS TET 40 Configuration Procedure ssssssssssssssseseee nennen 41 Tuning Group Function Prompts sse ener enne 43 Tuning Loop 2 Group Function ssssssssssseeeeen entente nnne nens 45 SP Ramp Group Function Prompts sss enne nnne nennen 47 Accutune Group Function 0 4010010 enne 50 Algorithm Group Function Prompts sess eee 51 Output Algorithm Group Function 55 Input 1 Group Function Prompts cc cceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeceaeeeeeaeseeeeeeeaeeesaeeeeaeeseeeeees 56 Input 2 Group Function Prompts sssss
167. bly Replacement Procedure Step Action 1 Remove the chassis from the case as shown in Figure 9 1 2 Peel the rubber bezel and display window off the chassis assembly 3 Separate the chassis frame at the four release points shown in Figure 9 2 and wiggle each printed wiring board out of its socket on the display keyboard assembly Pull out slightly 4 Insert a small flat bladed screwdriver into each of the display keyboard release points Figure 9 2 and pry out the board 5 Install the new board bottom end in first and push in the top until it clicks into place 6 Reinstall the printed wiring boards into the rear of the display board making sure that the boards click into their release points 7 Replace the bezel and window assembly 8 Reinstall chassis into case Press in hard then tighten the screw Figure 9 2 Display Keyboard Replacement Display keyboard release points Pull printed wiring boards out slightly Printed wiring boards release points Rubber bezel and window 20255 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 257 How to remove the To remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis refer to Figure 9 3 printed wiring boards and follow the procedure in Table 9 18 from the chassis Table 9 18 Printed Wiring Board Removal from Chassis Step Action 1 Remove the chassis from the case as shown in Figure 9 1 2 Separat
168. cate if the motor is still traveling To view the actual calibration value use the manual mode after the Auto mode is completed These values can be changed for purposes of tweaking the calibration 230 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Procedure Table 8 3 The procedure for calibrating the Position Proportional output and 3 Position Step control output is listed in Table 8 3 Make sure LOCKOUT in Tuning Set Up group is set to NONE See Section 3 Configuration For Three Position Step Control Output models without Motor Position Indication do steps 1 and 2 only For Position Proportional Output and Three Position Step Control Output models with Motor Position Indication follow the entire calibration procedure These prompts only appear when position OUT ALG is selected If motor position for 3PSTEP is desired first configure unit for position After calibration the unit can be switched to 3PSTEP Position Proportional and 3 Position Step Output Calibration Procedure Step Description Press Action Enter Calibration Mode until you see SET UP Upper Display Lower Display POSPROP 2 Set Motor Traverse Time FUNCTION pis you see EUIS TTS pper Display NOTE This is the time it LOOP 1 2 lt lt avalie takes the motor to travel from 0 to 100 Lower Display or GY until the proper motor stroke time is reached see the motor specs or measure the time Range of setting 5 to 1800
169. cedure for running the Setpoint Ramp Table 5 15 Procedure for Running a Setpoint Ramp Step Operation Press Action 1 Put the controller until A indicator is ON and you will see MANUAL into Automatic AUTO Upper Display mode C and the value Lower Display SP and the present setpoint value 2 Set Start A until the start setpoint value you desire is Setpoint or indicated in the lower display v Upper Display H and the PV value Lower Display SP and the start setpoint value 3 Start the Ramp R N You will see HOLD Upper Display Lower Display SP and a changing setpoint value ATTENTION The value in the lower display will be increasing or decreasing toward the final setpoint value The PV value in the upper display will also change R and the PV value 4 Hold Run the This holds the ramp at the current setpoint RUN Ramp HOLD value Press again to continue run 5 View the until you see LOWER remaining ramp DISPLAY Upper Display time R or H and the PV value Lower Display L RAMP XXXM Time remaining 162 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Step Operation Press Action Change setpoint during Hold mode o to change the HELD setpoint if the ramp is on HOLD However the ramp time remaining is not changed Therefore when returning to RUN mode the
170. cement procedure 263 9 9 Maintenance 264 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 237 Installation related problems Application related problems Hardware and software related problems Read the Installation section in this manual to make sure the UDC 3300 has been properly installed The installation section provides information on protection against electrical noise connecting external equipment to the controller and shielding and routing external wiring ATTENTION System noise induced into the controller will result in diagnostic error messages recurring If the diagnostic error messages can be cleared it indicates a soft failure and is probably noise related If system noise is suspected completely isolate the controller from all field wiring Use calibration sources to simulate PV and check all controller functions i e Gain Rate Reset Output Alarms etc Review the application of the controller then if necessary direct your questions to the local sales office Use the troubleshooting error message prompts and controller failure symptoms to identify typical failures which may occur in the controller Follow the troubleshooting procedures to correct them 238 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 9 2 Troubleshooting Aids Overall error messages An error message can occur at power up during continuous background tests while in normal operation when the Status Tests ar
171. cific instructions to set the lockout 226 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Section 8 Output Calibration 8 1 Overview Introduction What s in this section This section describes the field calibration procedures for the following types of outputs Current Output Position Proportional and 3 Position Step Output Auxiliary Output This section contains the following topics Topic See Page 8 1 Overview 227 8 2 Current Proportional Output Calibration 228 Introduction 228 Equipment Needed 228 How to Connect the Calibrator 228 Calibration Procedure 229 8 3 Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output 230 Calibration Position Proportional Control 230 3 Position Step Control 230 Equipment Needed 230 What connection to make 230 Calibration Procedure 231 8 4 Auxiliary Output Calibration 234 Introduction 234 Equipment Needed 234 How to Connect the Calibrator 234 Calibration Procedure 235 A WARNING SHOCK HAZARD N OUTPUT CALIBRATION MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE CALIBRATION 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 227 8 2 Current Proportional Output Calibration Introduction Calibrate the controller so that the output provides the proper amount of current over t
172. ct Manual 10 00 Function Prompt Lower Display Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Upper Display Factory Setting Refer to COUNTER1 COUNTER 1 DISABL MANUAL AL1SP1 AL1SP2 AL2SP1 AL2SP2 DIGIN1 DIGIN2 OUT1 1K OUT2 1K GSOAK PWRCYC PV_RNG FAILSF TUNE MAN2 PVRNG2 FSF2 TUNE2 DISABL COUNTS1 NUMBER OF COUNTS 1 Read only COUNTER2 COUNTER 2 Same as COUNTER1 DISABL COUNTS2 NUMBER OF COUNTS 2 Read only COUNTER3 COUNTER 3 Same as COUNTER1 DISABL COUNTS3 NUMBER OF COUNTS 3 Read only RESET ID RESET ID 0 9999 RES TYPE RESET TYPE NONE TIMER1 TIMER2 ALL TM COUNT1 COUNT2 COUNT3 ALL CO ALL TC NONE Refer to Section 4 18 3 23 Status test data Status Group The prompts used here are read only They are used to determine the reason for a controller failure Refer to Section 9 Troubleshooting in this manual for complete information 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 71 3 24 Keep a record Configuration Record Sheet Basic Model DC330B XX XXX DMCS Model DC330D XX XXX a record of how your controller was configured Enter the value or selection for each prompt on this sheet so you will have Group Function Value or Factory Group Function Value or Factory Prompt Prompt Selection Setting Prompt Prompt Se
173. ction and entering the individual ramp and soak segment data needed to generate the required setpoint versus time profile also called a program A segment is a ramp or soak function which together make up a setpoint program Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming lets you configure 6 ramp and 6 soak segments to be stored for use as one program or several small programs You designate the beginning and end segments to determine where the program is to start and stop While the procedure for programming is straightforward and aided by prompts we suggest that you read Program Contents in this section as well as Section 3 Configuration before doing the setpoint programming Draw a Ramp Soak Profile on the worksheet provided and fill in the information for each segment This will give you a record of how the program was developed The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section Topic See Page 6 1 Overview 201 6 2 Program Contents 202 6 3 Drawing a Ramp Soak Profile 204 6 4 Entering the Setpoint Program Data 206 6 5 Run Monitor the Program 209 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 201 6 2 Program Contents What you will configure Basically you will configure all the data that is relevant to each ramp and Ramp segments Soak segments Start segment number End segment number Recycle number Guaranteed soak soak segment for a given setpoint versus time profile The
174. dB with 10096 span peak to peak maximum UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Design continued Isolation Functional AC Power ls electrically isolated from all other inputs and outputs to withstand a HIPOT potential of 1900 Vdc for 2 seconds per Annex K of EN61010 1 Analog Inputs and Outputs Are isolated from each other and all other circuits at 850 Vdc for 2 seconds Digital Input and Digital Output Are isolated from all other circuits at 850 Vdc for 2 seconds Relay Contacts With a working of 115 230 Vac isolated from each other and all other circuits at 345 Vdc for 2 seconds Alarm Outputs One SPDT electromechanical relay A second alarm is available using the second control relay This is not available with Relay Duplex Position Proportional or Three Position Step control Alarm Relay Contacts Rating Resistive Load 5 ampere at 120 Vac or 30 Vdc 2 5A at 240 Vac Controller Output Types Current Output Isolated Range can be set anywhere between 0 to 21 mA and as direct or reverse action Resolution 11 bits for 0 to 21 mA Accuracy 0 596 full scale Temperature Stability 0 1 F S C Load Resistance 0 to 1000 ohms Electromechanical Relays One or Two SPDT contacts Both Normally Open and Normally Closed contacts are brought out to the rear terminals Internally socketed Resistive Load 5 amps 120 Vac or 30 Vdc 2 5A at 240 Vac Inductive Load 50 VA 120 Vac or 240 Vac Motor
175. de Upper Display SET UP Lets you know you are in the configuration mode and a Set Up group title is being displayed in the lower display Lower Display This is the first Set Up group title 2 Select any Set Up group Successive presses of the SET key will SET UP sequentially display the other Set Up group titles shown in the prompt hierarchy in Figure 3 1 You can also use the A V keys to scan the Set Up groups in both directions Stop at the Set Up group title which describes the group of parameters you want to configure Then proceed to the next step 3 Select a Function Parameter Upper Display rene I EC LOOP 1 2 Shows you the current value or selection for the first function prompt of the particular Set Up group that you have selected Lower Display GAIN Shows the first Function prompt within that Set Up group Example displays show Set Up group Tuning Function prompt Gain and the value selected 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 41 Step Operation Press Result Select other Function Parameters FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 Successive presses of the FUNCTION key will sequentially display the other function prompts of the Set Up group you have selected Stop at the function prompt that you want to change then proceed to the next step Change the value or selection These keys will increment or decrement the valu
176. detects the state of external contacts for either of two inputs On contact closure the controller will respond according to how each digital input is configured If the controller is configured for either 2 loop or Cascade control then switch 1 operates only on Loop 1 and switch 2 operates only on Loop 2 Make your selection under the Option Set Up group function prompt DIG IN1 or DIG IN2 See Section 3 Configuration Table 5 30 lists the configuration prompt selections the Action on Closure and the display indication for each selection available Table 5 30 Digital Input Option Action on Contact Closure DIG IN1 or Display Indication Action on Contact Closure DIG IN2 Returns toggles to original state when contact opens Selections unless otherwise noted None DI 1 2 always off No Digital Input selection TO MAN MAN blinks Puts the controller into manual mode Contact open returns the controller to former mode unless MANUAL AUTO key is pressed while digital input is active then it stays in the manual mode TO LSP Puts the controller into local setpoint 1 When contact opens the controller returns to former operation local or remote setpoint unless the SETPOINT SELECT key is pressed while digital input is active then it stays in the local setpoint mode TO 2SP RSP annunciator blinks Puts the controller into local setpoint 2 When contact opens the controller
177. dged before extinguishing when the alarm condition ends A visual indication of the control relays OUT 12 A visual indication of the mode of the controller A Automatic Mode MAN Manual Mode A visual indication of the temperature units F Degrees Fahrenheit C Degrees Celsius A visual indication of the digital inputs 12 A visual lamp when the RSP or LSP 2 is active A visual indication when LSP 3 is active 3 The upper left digit of the display is used to show other annunciator functions T Accutuning in process t PV tune in process L Loop 2 display I Cascade control when Loop 1 is displayed C Computer setpoint active O Output override active 148 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Viewing the operating Press the LOWER DISPLAY key to scroll through the operating parameters parameters listed in Table 5 4 The lower display will show only those parameters and their values that apply to your specific model and the way in which it was configured Table 5 4 Lower Display Key Parameter Lower Display Description Indication OUT OUTPUT 1 Output value is percent for Three Position Step control this is an estimated motor position when no slidewire exists OT2 OUTPUT 2 Appears only if 2 loop or Cascade control is configured SP LOCAL SETPOINT 1 Also current setpoint when using
178. e Configuration test failure E EFAILE Unable to write to non volatile memory FACT CRG etre teste ett e eri Factory Calibration Cyclic Redundancy test FAIESAEE diete ter Qo tu ie re E pda Controller in Failsafe INPAEAIL i etre ettet Two consecutive failures of Input 1 integration INP2FAIL itte etitm Two consecutive failures of Input 2 integration INPSEAIL et reip eter Two consecutive failures of Input 3 Integration RING etat ire ith vitae e Pd Input 1 out of range lice Input 2 out of range M Input 3 out or range ab ARUM PV out of range TEST p A E RAM test failed AV EL Remote Variable out of range SEG ERR Start segment greater than ending segment SOOTINQ i ott ecrit Percent carbon falls outside sooting boundary SW PAM ees rii tet eet o t eet Position Proportional slidewire input failure GALE MTR arent will appear suggesting that the controller be calibrated Output Value OT 2 Output 2 Cascade or 2 Loop applications m elated Local Setpoint 1 M EI Local Setpoint 2 O teeth Local Setpoint 3 Note 3 Remote Setpoint
179. e load changes or where even a small overshoot beyond the setpoint may result in damage or lost product The fuzzy logic observes the speed and direction of the PV signal as it approaches the setpoint and temporarily modifies the internal controller response action as necessary to avoid an overshoot There is no change to the PID algorithm and the fuzzy logic does not alter the PID tuning parameters This feature can be independently enabled or disabled as required by the application to work with TUNE On Demand tuning the SP tuning algorithm or Adaptive Tune To configure this item refer to Section 3 Configuration Set Up Group ACCUTUNE Function Prompt FUZZY Select ENABLE or DISABL A or V 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 189 5 21 Accutune Introduction Configuration Two loop and cascade Operation Rules There are several types of Accutune from which to choose TUNE Demand Tuning Tuning is done on demand by pressing the LOWER DISPLAY and A keys simultaneously by selecting prompt TUNE in the lower display via digital input SP Setpoint Tuning SP only tuning will continually adjust the Gain or Proportional Band P Reset 1 and Rate D tuning constants in response to setpoint changes TUN PV Demand Tuning PV Adapt Provides TUNE On Demand tuning plus PV adaptive tuning whenever a PV process disturbance of 0 3 span or greater occurs SP PV
180. e or selection that appears for the function prompt you have selected See Configuration Tips for instructions to increase or decrease value quickly Change the value or selection to meet your needs If the display flashes you are trying to make an unacceptable entry Enter the value or selection FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 or SET UP This key selects another function prompt This key selects another Set Up group The value or selection you have made will be entered into memory after another key is pressed Exit Configuration LOWER DISPLAY This exits configuration mode and returns the controller to the same state it was in immediately preceding entry into the Set Up mode It stores any changes you have made 42 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 6 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group Function prompts Table 3 3 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning Set Up group How the Algorithm and Control Set Up groups are configured determines which prompts will appear Table 3 3 Tuning Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display PROP BD Proportional Band 0 1 to 9999 A5 Section or or 4 2 GAIN Gain 0 001 to 1000 1 000 or or GAINVALn Gain Value being used by Read Only Gain Scheduling when enabled in Control Setup
181. e requested Table 9 1 lists all the error message prompts that you could see the reason for the failure and under what test group the prompt could appear Refer to Tables 9 3 Power up 9 5 Status and 9 6 Background for the particular test group indicated Table 9 1 Error Message Prompts Error Message Reason for Failure Test Group Refer to Table lower display CAL MTR Auto calibration never performed Power up and 9 3 Background 9 6 CAL TEST Calibration test failure Power up or Status CONF ERR Low limit greater than high limit for PV SP Background 9 6 Reset or Output CONFTEST Configuration test failure Power up or Status E E FAIL Unable to write to nonvolatile memory Background 9 6 FACT CRC Factory Calibration Cyclic Redundancy Status 9 5 FAILSAFE Controller in Failsafe Power up Background 9 3 or or Status 9 5 FAILSF2 Loop 2 9 6 INP1FAIL Two consecutive failures of Input 1 integration Background 9 6 INP2FAIL Two consecutive failures of Input 2 integration Background 9 6 INP3FAIL Two consecutive failures of Input 3 integration Background 9 6 INP1 RNG Input 1 out of range Background 9 6 INP2 RNG Input 2 out of range Background 9 6 INP3 RNG Input 3 out of range Background 9 6 PV LIMIT PV out of range Background 9 6 RAM TEST RAM test failed Power up or Status 9 3 9 5 RV LIMIT Remote Variable out of range Background 9 6 SEG ERR Start segment grea
182. e the chassis frame at the release points shown in Figure 9 3 and wiggle each printed wiring board out of its socket on the display keyboard assembly Pull both boards out of the chassis assembly Figure 9 3 Removing the Printed Wiring Boards Pull printed wiring boards out of chassis Printed wiring boards release points Rubber bezel and window 22639 258 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Printed wiring board Figure 9 4 identifies each of the printed wiring boards that can be identification replaced Refer to this drawing when following the replacement procedures for each of the boards since you have to remove all of them from the chassis to replace the one you want In order to lay boards flat remove the transformer lead from the Auxiliary Output Communications board and the Digital Input board Refer to the specific procedure table to remove the desired board e 2nd Input Board Table 9 19 e Power Input Board Table 9 20 e Digital Input Board Table 9 21 e Auxiliary Output Communications Board Table 9 22 e MCU Output Board Table 9 23 Figure 9 4 Printed Wiring Board Identification WG connectors on Digital Input and MCU Output boards Digital MCU Aux out 2nd input Power input input output communications board board board board board W1 W2 jumper Note the transformer connectors are polarized and will only go on one way PROM AN 2 Pin Transf
183. eaeeseeeeeseaeeesaeeseneeees 202 6 3 Drawing a Ramp Soak Profile sess 204 6 4 Entering the Setpoint Program Data sse 206 6 5 Run Monitor the 209 SECTION 7 INPUT CALIBRATION eeeeeeeneee enne en nnne nennen 213 nNNO NIME 213 7 2 Minimum and Maximum Range Values seen 214 7 3 Preliminary Information sse nennen 215 7 4 Input 1 2 or 3 Set Up 0 217 7 5 Input 1 2 or 3 Calibration 223 7 6 Restoring Factory Calibration 225 SECTION 8 OUTPUT CALIBRATION 227 OVOLtVIGW i n cote e edd 227 8 2 Current Proportional Output Calibration 228 8 3 Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output Calibration 230 8 4 Auxiliary Output Calibration 234 SECTION 9 TROUBLESHOOTING SERVICE eere 237 OVEWIOWS ih etie net de eedem ete 237 9 2 Troubleshooting Aids te edm iens 239 9 3 Powerup Tests ineo et aede it fs 241 9 4 Status natem dete dt tem dude 242 9 5 Background TOSI iei eee e best 244 vi UDC 3300
184. edure for Selecting 2 loop 0 173 Procedure for Selecting Output 173 Procedure for Selecting Control 174 Procedure for Selecting Tuning Parameters sse 175 Digital Display Indication Two eene 176 Procedure for Displaying the SPSTEP Motor 178 Digital Input Option Action on Contact Closure 2 182 Digital Input Combinations DIG IN1 or DIG IN2 184 Digital Inputs 1 and 2 Combination 185 Auto Manual Station Mode Configuration Procedure 187 Accutune Rules and Regulations sene 191 Procedure for Starting TUNE Demand Tuning see 192 Procedure for Using TUNE at Start up for 2 193 Procedure for Using SP Tuning at 194 Procedure for Using SP Tuning at Start up for Duplex 195 Accutune Error Prompt 197 Setpoint Program Data Entry 206 Prompt Hierarchy and Available Selections 2 207 Run Monitor Fuhctiorns
185. ee t e Pao e Digital Input 2 selections DIG2 GOM e tero verity de Ee Frater LB edet Digital Input 2 Combinations GOIm S TATE pet etr Rete etr ee tue Communications Option State GOmADDR eto canter teint easing Communications Station Address GOMADDR2 ierat rs Loop 2 Communications Station Address SHEDTIME Zz iret crt once eiit egeo Shed Time bee P Parity BAUD Baud Rate SHEDMOBE 3 Shed Controller Mode Output Level telal E DE Shed Setpoint Recall er a aaa a aa Local Loop Back ATST MAE Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 AO a Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 A2ST VAL EAE E A E Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 A252 VA EREE E A A Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 ATSTIYPEz cre E E Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type AIS27Y costo ntt e p n EE eripe o tients Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 Type 2 Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 252 costo ett epa cadere e ticos Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 Type ATS2 D Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 State VICINAE Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 State VICE Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 State beum lies Alarm Hysteresis ARM OUT A Latching A
186. elect the higher of Output 1 and Output 2 Hi Select or the lower of Output 1 and Output 2 Lo Select to appear at Output 1 terminals to drive the final control element Refer to Section 5 12 for Override rules and block diagram Override prompts appear under the Algorithm Set Up group function prompt OUT OVRD 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 177 5 16 Three Position Step Control Algorithm Introduction Estimated motor position Accurate motor position Displaying the motor position The Three Position Step Control algorithm Loop 1 only allows the control of a valve or other actuator with an electric motor driven by two controller output relays one to move the motor upscale the other to move it downscale without a feedback slidewire linked to the motor shaft Accutune SP or SP PV tuning does not function with this algorithm Accutune TUNE will operate with this algorithm Models DC330X EE XXX X0 DC330X AA XXX X0 The Three Position Step control algorithm provides an output display OUT which is an estimated motor position since the motor is not using any feedback Although this output indication is only accurate to a few percent it is corrected each time the controller drives the motor to one of its stops 0 or 100 It avoids all the control problems associated with the feedback slidewire wear dirt noise When operating in this algorithm the estimated OUT display is shown to the nearest perc
187. ent i e no decimal Models DC330X EE XXX X2 DC330X AA XXX X2 In the event that an accurate and repeatable indication in motor position is required Position Proportional model s slidewire input can be used to read the motor position and display it on the lower display as POS while still operating in the Three Position Step control mode The slidewire must be calibrated for this to operate correctly Table 5 29 lists the procedure for displaying the motor position Table 5 29 Procedure for Displaying the 3PSTEP Motor Position Power up output Step Operation Press Action 1 Access the until you see f LOWER 2 displays DISPLAY Upper Display Lower Display The PV value POS 3PStep motor position with slidewire connected or OUT Estimated 3PStep motor position when no slidewire exists When the controller powers up after a power outage the position of the motor will correspond to whatever was configured at the Control Set Up function prompt PWR OUT selection LAST or F SAFE Refer to Section 4 10 Table 4 9 for definition of each selection 178 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 5 17 Input Math Algorithms Introduction Input algorithm selections If selected via Math options this controller has two input algorithms available Each algorithm can be configured to provide a derived calculated PV or a derived remote setpoint Up to three inputs may be applied to the ca
188. er should size fuses accordingly Use Fast Blo fuses only 24 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Time proportional output continued Figure 2 11 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models with Open Collector Output DC330X TT XXX For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information see Tables 2 7 and 2 8 Figure 2 11 Open Collector Output Model DC330X TT XXX Time Proportional Simplex Customer Supplied Electromechanical Relay Customer Supplied Solid State Relay 8 21 21 Output 1 Output 1 Alarm 1 N C Lect band Relay 2 Supply Supply N O g Power E ON 9 0 0 Power To terminal 40r 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Alarm ene Relay 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 terminal Alarm Alarm aisha Relay 1 2 Load Relay 1 Supply T NO 1 Load SAP T9 o Power X or T inal To terminal 2 os 9 ya Z OBgU Time Proportional Duplex Customer Supplied Customer Supplied Electromechanical Relay _ Solid State Rela 1 1 1 1 i tr 2 tr 2 Output 1 Output 1 1 1 1 5 i 5 Output 2 Output 2 Q9 1 6 1 1 7 Alarm jun P Alarm Load Relay 1 Supply i Relay 1 N Supply 1 Power qve 4 age e Power 70r9 To terminal 70r9 Open collector outputs are internally powered O CAUTI
189. erator Interface Displays and Indicators sse 3 Model Number 12 DIMGENSIONS mcm 13 Mounting Meth dg 5 ctc et ueste eite decr tarte tae 14 Composite Wiring Diagram ssssssssssssseseseeeeeenen nennen nennen nennen nennen 18 Line Voltage Wiring xii adits cde tr REA edit 19 Input 1 Input 2 Connections 20 Two HLAI Replace 2nd LLAI 21 Electromechanical Relay Output Model 0 330 22 Solid State Relay Output Model 23 10 amp Solid State Relay Output Model 0 330 55 24 Open Collector Output Model 330 25 Current Output Current Time Duplex Time Current Duplex Position Proportional or Three Position Step 26 Auxiliary Output and Three Relay Outputs 27 Position Proportional Output or Three Position Step Models DC330X EE XXX X2 DC330X AA XXX X2 isses ener nnne tenens 28 Auxiliary Output Connections Models DC330X XX 2XX DC330X XX 5XX 29 Digital Inputs Connections Model
190. ere 254 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 9 8 Parts Replacement Procedures Introduction These procedures tell you how to access and replace the following printed wiring boards in your controller Display Keyboard e MCU Output e Power Input 2ndInput Digital Input Auxiliary Output DMCS Communications RS422 485 Communications Modbus Communications Equipment needed To accomplish the procedures that follow you will need the following equipment Phillips Head Screwdriver Flat Bladed Screwdriver e Small Pliers 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 255 How to remove the chassis Refer to Figure 9 1 for steps and follow the procedure listed in Table 9 16 Table 9 16 How to Remove the Chassis Step Action 1 Loosen the screw on the front face 2 Insert a flat bladed screwdriver into the hole on the top of the case as shown in Figure 9 1 and pry chassis forward slightly until the chassis connectors separate from the back of the case 3 Grasp the bezel and pull the chassis out of the case Figure 9 1 Chassis Removal 2 Insert screwdriver and pry forward 3 Grasp bezel and pull chassis out 9 Loosen screw 22637 256 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 How to replace the Refer to Figure 9 2 and follow the procedure listed in Table 9 17 display keyboard assembly Table 9 17 Display Keyboard Assem
191. ergized 1ON2ON Output relays 1 and 2 are both energized RLY TYPE Relay Cycle Time Increments MECHAN Cycle time in one second MECHAN increments SOLST Cycle time in 1 3 second increments 1 33 seconds 120 40 seconds 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 55 3 12 Introduction Function prompts Input 1 Parameters Set Up Group This data deals with various parameters required to configure Input 1 Table 3 9 lists all the function prompts in the Input 1 Set Up group Table 3 9 Input 1 Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display IN1 TYPE Input 1 Actuation Type DISABL WTCH 0 10mV Section BTC WTCL 4 8 ETCH 100 PT ETCL 100 LO J TCH 200 PT JTCL 500 PT K TC H RAD RH KTCL RAD RI NNM H 0 20mA NNML 4 20mA NM90 H 0 10mV NM90 L 0 50mV NIC TC 0 5 V R TC 1 5 V S TC 0 10 V T TCH CARBON TTCL OXYGEN XMITTER1 Transmitter Characterization B TC S TC LINEAR ETCH TTCH ETCL TTCL J TC H W TCH JTCL WTCL K TC H 100 PT KTCL 100 LO NNM H 200 PT NNM L 500 PT NM90 H RAD RH NM90 L RAD RI NIC TC LINEAR RTC SQROOT IN1 HI Input 1 High Range Value 999 to 9999 floating 1000 Linear Inputs only in engineering units IN1LO Input 1 Low Range Value 999 to 9999 floating 0 Linear Inputs only in engineering units RATIO 1 Input 1 Ratio 20 00
192. ering Units from Selections TIME Ramp Segments EU MIN EU HR RECYCLES Number of Program Enter Value 0 to 99 recycles Recycles SOAK DEV Guaranteed Soak Deviation Enter Value 0 to 99 00 Value The number selected will be 0 to 99 from setpoint PROG END Program Termination State Selections LASTSP Hold at last setpoint in the program F SAFE Manual mode Failsafe output STATE Program State at Program Selections DISABL End HOLD hold mode ToBEGIN Reset SP Program Selections DISABL KEYPAD SEG1RAMP Segment 1 Ramp Time Enter Value or or Ramp Time 0 99hrs 0 59min or SEG1RATE Segment 1 Ramp Rate Ramp Rate Engineering units min or Engineering units hr Select TIME EU MIN or EU HR at prompt RAMP UNIT All ramps will use the same selection SEG2 SP Segment 2 Soak Setpoint Enter Value Within the Setpoint Value limits SEG2TIME Segment 2 Soak Duration Enter Value 0 99hrs 0 59min SEG3RAMP Segment 3 Ramp Time or Enter Value or Segment 3 Ramp Rate Ramp Time 0 99hrs 0 59min or SEG3RATE Ramp Rate EU MIN or EU HR UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 207 Prompt Definition Value or Selection use A or V Lower Upper Display Display SEG4 SP Segment 4 Soak Setpoint Enter Value Within the Setpoint Value limits SEG4TIME Segment 4 Soak Duration Enter Value 0 99hrs 0 59min SEG5RAMP Segment 5 Ramp Time Enter Value or Segment 5
193. erminals must be enclosed within the panel The UDC is environmentally hardened and when suitably enclosed can be mounted virtually anywhere in plant or factory on the wall in a panel or even on the process machine It withstands ambient temperatures up to 55 C 133 F and resists the effects of vibration and mechanical shock CE Conformity Europe This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the following European Council Directives 73 23 EEC the Low Voltage Directive and 89 336 EEC the EMC Directive Conformity of this product with any other CE Mark Directive s shall not be assumed Product Classification Class I Permanently connected panel mounted Industrial Control Equipment with protective earthing grounding EN61010 1 Enclosure Rating Panel mounted equipment IP 00 This controller must be panel mounted Terminals must be enclosed within the panel Front panel IP 65 529 Installation Category Overvoltage Category Category II Energy consuming equipment supplied from the fixed installation local level appliances and Industrial Control Equipment EN61010 1 Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 Normally non conductive pollution with occasional conductivity caused by condensation Ref IEC 664 1 EMC Classification Group 1 Class A ISM Equipment EN55011 emissions Industrial Equipment EN50082 2 immunity 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 1 Method o
194. es 0 to 99 This number does not include the current partially completed cycle End Program When the final segment is completed the R in the upper display either changes to H if configured for HOLD state or disappears if configured for disable of setpoint programming The controller operates at the last setpoint in the program in automatic or will be in manual mode at the failsafe output The program will be placed in HOLD mode at the beginning of the program at the local setpoint value prior to the beginning of the program 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 211 SP programming tips Table 6 4 gives procedures for restarting advancing and changing the current segment time or setpoint of a running setpoint program Table 6 4 Procedures for Changing a Running Setpoint Program Function Press Result Action Restarting a running RUN to place SP PROG into HOLD mode SP program HOLD until you see X RA XXX or X SK XX XX in the lower display LOWER DISPLAY until you see 1 in the lower display If the lower display already reads 1 RA XX XX then press the A key before pressing the W key to place SP PROG into RUN mode RUN HOLD Advancing a running RUN to place SP PROG into HOLD mode SP program HOLD LOWER DISPLAY until you see X RA XXX or X SK XX XX in the lower display 4 ana V to select the segment
195. ess the FUNCTION key at the same time The controller will run a display test Then you will see Upper Display KEYS Lower Display TRY ALL Press each key If it works the key name will appear in the lower display Replace the display keyboard if any keys are shorted out Refer to Parts Replacement Procedures in this section 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 253 Procedure 8 Table 9 15 explains how to troubleshoot a Communications failure Table 9 15 Troubleshooting a Communications Failure Step What to do How to do it 1 Check the field wiring and termination resistor Depending on the protocol used refer to the proper communications manual installation section 2 Make sure the Communications Printed Wiring Board is installed properly in the controller Withdraw the chassis from the case and inspect the board See the exploded view Figure 10 1 for location of the board Return the chassis to the case 3 Determine if the Communications board is faulty by running a LOCAL LOOPBACK TEST If the test fails replace the board Run the Local Loopback Test Press SET UP until you see Upper Display SETUP Lower Display COM Press FUNCTION until you see Upper Display DISABL Lower Display LOOPBACK Press A or V you will see Upper Display ENABLE Lower Display LOOPBACK The test will run until the operator disables it h
196. et 100 value FUNCTION 100 position LOOP 1 2 Upper Display counts of feedback Slidewire 0 to 3000 Lower Display When the motor stops the display should stop counting then go to Step 8 6 DO MAN You will see Set 0 value FUNCTION Upper Display LOOP 1 2 The existing zero calibration value Lower Display in counts or GY until the desired zero value is reached in the upper display Upper Display The desired zero Lower Display value 7 DO MAN The controller will store the 0 value and you will see Set 100 value FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 Upper Display The existing span calibration value Lower Display in counts SPAN VAL 232 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Step Description Press Action or GY until the desired span value is reached in the upper display Upper Display The desired span value Lower Display SPAN VAL For manual calibration the motor does not move from its position prior to the start of Position Proportional calibration 8 Exit the Calibration Mode The controller will store the 100 value FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 LOWER To exit the calibration mode DISPLAY SET UP HER 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 233 8 4 Auxiliary Output Calibration Introduction Calibrate the controller so that the Auxiliary output provides the proper amount of current over the desired range The controller can provide a
197. eter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection LANGUAGE LANGUAGE This selection designates the prompt language ENGLIS ENGLISH FRENCH FRENCH GERMAN GERMAN SPANIS SPANISH ITALAN ITALIAN 4 17 Introduction 4 18 Introduction Maintenace group prompts Calibration Data The prompts used here are for field calibration purposes Refer to Section 6 Input Calibration in this manual for complete information Maintenance Group The Maintenance group prompts are part of the HealthWatch feature These prompts let you count and time the activity of discrete events such as relays alarms control modes and others to keep track of maintenance needs Table 4 16 lists all the function prompts in the Maintenance Set Up group Table 4 16 Maintenance Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection TIME1 TIMER 1 The timer tracks the elapsed time of the selected event DISABL DISABL Disables the timer LASTR LAST RESET Time elapsed since the last reset AL1SP1 ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 Cumulative time Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 was activated AL1SP2 ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 Cumulative time Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 was activated AL2SP1 ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 Cumulative time Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 was activated AL2SP2 ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 Cumulative time Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 was activated MANUAL LOOP 1 MANUAL Cumulative time Loop 1 was in Manual 140 UDC 33
198. etermine what is causing the error Select ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2 Set Up Group Access Function Prompt AT ERROR or AT ERR 2 for error prompt 196 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Error prompt Table 5 39 lists the Accutune error prompts and their definitions Only error code available for TUNE Accutune will abort if the MANUAL AUTO key is pressed during tuning Digital input detected Automatic abort has occurred Accutune will automatically abort when a PV oscillation has been detected during SP adapt whenever any SP values are changed during a PV adapt tune or when Accutune is disabled Table 5 39 Accutune Error Prompt Definitions Upper Display Prompt Definition Action to Take Prompt NONE No errors None OUTLIM SP Adapt step is greater than high output Check the output limits under Control Set limit or less than low output limit Up group function prompts OUTHIiLIM and e OUTLOLIM in Section 3 Configuration Output step insufficient to get to SP value Verify the Process Gain Value function prompt KPG or KPG 2 IDFAIL Process Identification Failure Try to SP tune again Insure the process is at An illegal value of gain rate or reset was line out prior to initiation of SP tune calculated ABORT Manual abort has occurred Try to TUNE or SP tune again tune is still active checking process gain even though T is not lit It does not affect the keyb
199. etpoint ratio for Loop 1 CSP BIAS 999 to 9999 LOOP 1 COMPUTER SETPOINT BIAS Computer engineering units setpoint bias for Loop 1 CSP2RATO 20 0 to 20 0 LOOP 2 COMPUTER SETPOINT RATIO Computer setpoint ratio for Loop 2 CSP2BIAS 999 to 9999 LOOP 2 COMPUTER SETPOINT BIAS Computer engineering units setpoint bias for Loop 2 LOOPBACK LOCAL LOOPBACK tests the communications hardware DISABL ENABLE DISABLE Disables the Loopback test ENABLE Allows loopback test The UDC goes into Loopback mode in which it sends and receives its own message The UDC displays PASS or FAIL status in the upper display and LOOPBACK in the lower display while the test is running The UDC will go into manual mode The test will run until the operator disables it here or until power is turned off and on ATTENTION The UDC does not have to be connected to the RS 485 link to perform this test If it is connected only one UDC 3300 should run the loopback test at a time The computer should not be transmitting on the link while the loopback test is active 134 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 4 15 Alarms Set Up Group Introduction Alarms group prompts An alarm is an indication that an event that you have configured for example Process Variable has exceeded one or more alarm limits There are two alarms available Each alarm has two setpoints You can configure each of these two setpoints to ala
200. ext FUNCTION key press and displays the reset value 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 105 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection TOT RATE TOTALIZER INTEGRATION RATE Determines the rate at which the Totalizer is updated SECOND SECOND Engineering units per second MINUTE MINUTE Engineering units per minute HOUR HOUR Engineering units per hour DAY DAY Engineering units per day ML DAY MIL DAY Millions of units per day ATTENTION The source of the Totalizer is averaged over the sample and update rates For example since the loop cycle speed is six per second then with the Totalizer Rate set at once per minute the source is averaged six times per second and the Totalizer value is updated with this average value 60 once per second NOTE 1 Does not apply to Three Position Step Control If the calculated value of the quantity under the square root sign decreases to a value less than 0 010 NOTE 2 the calculation will become linear as the calculated value decreases below 0 010 Where K 0 001 to 1000 configurable Calc Hi and Calc Lo are configurable over a range of 999 to 9999 106 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 4 7 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group Introduction Output algorithm group prompts This data deals with various output types in the controller the Digital Out
201. f EMC Assessment Technical File TF Declaration of Conformity 51309602 000 Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual and the special conditions for CE conformity in Section 2 1 may invalidate this product s conformity with the Low Voltage and EMC Directives ATTENTION The emission limits of EN 50081 2 are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an industrial environment Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause harmful interference This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when the equipment is used closer than 30 meters 98 feet to the antenna e In special cases when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity the user may have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic emissions of this equipment UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 1 2 Operator Interface Displays and indicators Figure 1 1 shows the operator interface and defines the displays and indicators The function of the keys is shown in Table 1 1 Figure 1 1 Operator Interface Displays and Indicators Upper Display six characters Normal Operation four digits dedicated to display the process variable Configuration Mode displays parameter value or selection Lower Display eight character
202. figured output limits while allowing only a very small process variable change above and below the SP during each cycle The algorithm then calculates new tuning parameters and enters them into the Tuning group A large T appears in the upper display while tuning is active 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 191 Starting TUNE demand tuning Aborting tuning TUNE for duplex heat cool Configuring TUNE for duplex heat cool After TUNE or TUN PV has been enabled use the procedure in Table 5 35 to start tuning Table 5 35 Procedure for Starting TUNE Demand Tuning Step Action 1 Set the setpoint to the desired value 2 Switch to Automatic mode by pressing the key 3 Initiate Tuning by pressing the A key when the lower display prompt TUNE OFF pressing the LOWER DISPLAY and A keys simultaneously or using the digital input if configured If it is necessary to stop or abort the tuning process press the MANUAL AUTO key and the controller will return to manual mode You can also disable TUNE or TUN PV in the ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2 Set Up group TUNE can be done for applications using duplex heat cool control During tuning Accutune requires that setpoint 1 will cause a Heating demand and then the calculated tuning parameters will be automatically entered as PID set 1 Likewise it requires that tuning at local setpoint 2 will cause a Cooling demand and then the
203. for three mode control This means that the output can be adjusted somewhere between 100 and 0 It applies all three control actions Proportional P Integral I and Derivative D to the error signal Proportional Gain Regulates the controller s output in proportion to the error signal the difference between Process Variable and Setpoint Integral Reset Regulates the controller s output to the size of the error and the time the error has existed The amount of corrective action depends on the value of proportional Gain Derivative Rate Regulates the controller s output in proportion to the rate of change of the error The amount of corrective action depends on the value of proportional Gain PID B Unlike the PID A equation the controller gives only an integral response to a setpoint change with no effect on the output due to the gain or rate action and it gives full response to PV changes Otherwise controller action is as described for the PID A equation See note on PID A PD WITH MANUAL RESET is used whenever integral action is not wanted for automatic control The equation is computed with no integral contribution The MANUAL RESET which is operator adjustable is then added to the present output to form the controller output Switching between manual and automatic mode will be bumpless If you select PD with Manual Reset you can also configure the following variations PD Two Mode con
204. gital Input Combinations DIG IN1 or DIG IN2 Selections used in Display Indication Action on contact closure Combination with Returns toggles to original state DIG IN1 or when contact opens DIG IN2 PID2 PIDSET 2 in lower display Selects PID set 2 ToDIR Puts the controller into direct controller action ToSP2 RSP blinks Selects the second local setpoint DISAT T indicator is no longer lit Disables Adaptive tune ToSP1 Selects the local setpoint RUN R indicator blinks Starts or restarts RUN of SP Ramp Program Digital inputs 1 and 2 There are five possible situations that can occur when working with combination operation digital input combinations Table 5 32 lists these situations and the resulting action when the switch is active In the table Enabled means that the parameter is configured and the action will occur when the digital input is active Action Disabled means that the digital input or digital combination parameter is configured but the action cannot occur when the digital input is active because the selected parameter is disabled 184 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Table 5 32 Digital Inputs 1 and 2 Combination DIG IN1 DIG COMB Action Example NONE Any Selection No action will occur when the digital input is active ENABLED DISABLED The DIG IN condition will occur when the Digital Input is active DIG IN1 TO MAN
205. group PID SETS RATE MIN Rate in Minutes 0 00 to 10 00 minutes 0 00 RSET MIN Reset in minutes repeat 0 02 to 50 00 1 00 or or RSET RPM Reset in repeats minute ES MAN RSET Manual Reset 100 to 100 output 0 PROPBD2 Proportional Band 2 0 1 to 9999 Ex or or GAIN 2 Gain 2 0 001 to 1000 1 000 RATE2MIN Rate 2 in Minutes 0 00 to 10 00 minutes 0 00 RSET2MIN Reset 2 in minutes repeat 0 02 to 50 00 1 00 or or RSET2RPM Reset 2 in repeats minute CYC SEC Cycle Time Heat 1 to 120 20 or CYC SX3 CYC2 SEC Cycle Time Cool 1 to 120 20 or CYC2 SX3 SECURITY Security Code 0 to 4095 0 LOCKOUT Configuration Lockout NONE CALIB CALIB CONF VIEW MAX AUTO MAN Manual Auto Key Lockout DISABL ENABLE ENABLE SP SEL Setpoint Select Key Lockout DISABL ENABLE ENABLE Cycle times are in either 1 second or 1 3 second increments depending upon the RLY TYPE configuration in the Output Algorithm Set Up group Only appears if LOCKOUT NONE Requires Math software option 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 43 Function Prompt Lower Display Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Upper Display Factory Setting Refer to RUN HOLD Run Hold Key Lockout DISABL ENABLE ENABLE PVEUVAL1 PVEUVAL2 PVEUVAL3 PVEUVAL4 PVEUVAL5 PVEUVAL6 PVEUVAL7 PVEUVAL8 PV1 through PV8 Value for Gain Scheduling PV value within the PV limits In engineering units GAIN
206. he Digital Input board P N 30756696 501 Table 9 21 Digital Input Board Replacement Procedure Step Action 1 Remove the chassis from the case See Figure 9 1 2 Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis See Figure 9 3 3 Lay the boards flat and identify the Digital Input board See Figure 9 4 4 Remove the transformer plug from connector J9 5 The Digital Input board is attached to the MCU output board by three mounting posts Locate these posts under the MCU output board 6 Use small pliers and squeeze the ends of each post together and push it up through the board Remove the Digital Input board 7 Orient the new Digital Input board onto the MCU Output board and push the mounting posts down through the MCU Output board until they click into place 8 Replace the transformer plug onto connector J9 9 Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis Make sure the connections to the display keyboard assembly are made and that the release points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards 10 Reinstall the chassis into the case Push in hard then tighten the screw 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 261 Aux Out Follow the procedure listed in Table 9 22 to replace the following boards communications board Auxiliary Output Board P N 30756687 501 Auxiliary Output RS422 485 Board P N 30756687 502 DMCS Communications Board P N 30756690 502 R
207. he desired range The controller can provide an output current range of from 0 to 21 milliamperes and can be calibrated at 4 mA for 0 of output and 20 mA for 100 of output or any other values between 0 and 21 mA Equipment needed You will need a standard shop type milliammeter with whatever accuracy is required capable of measuring 0 to 20 milliamps Calibrator connections Referring to Figure 8 1 wire the controller according to the procedure given in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Set Up Wiring Procedure Current Proportional Output Step Action 1 Apply power and allow the controller to warm up 15 minutes before you calibrate 2 Tag and disconnect the field wiring at the rear of the controller from terminals 2 and 3 See Figure 8 1 3 Connect a milliammeter across these terminals Figure 8 1 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Current Proportional Output Milliammeter 228 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Procedure The procedure for calibrating the Current Proportional Output is listed in Table 8 2 Make sure LOCKOUT in the Tuning Set Up group is set to NONE See Section 3 Configuration Table 8 2 Current Proportional Output Calibration Procedure Step Description Press Action Enter Calibration Mode SET UP until you see Upper Display CALIB Lower Display CURRENT Calibrate 0 FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 You will see Upper Display a
208. he function prompts in the Setpoint Ramp Rate Set Up group and their definitions Table 4 3 Setpoint Ramp Rate Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection SP RAMP SINGLE SETPOINT RAMP Make a selection to enable SP Ramp parameters TIME MIN and FINAL SP appear when Ramp is enabled and SP Rate or disable the setpoint ramp function Make sure you configure a ramp time and a final setpoint value SP Rate and SP Programming must be disabled and SP Programming DISABL DISABLE SETPOINT RAMP Disables the setpoint ramp are disabled option ENABLE ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP Allows the single setpoint ramp prompts for Loop 1 to be shown ENABL2 ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP 2 Allows the single setpoint ramp to run in Loop 2 ENAB12 ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP 12 Allows the single setpoint ramp to be run on Loop 1 and Loop 2 TIME MIN 0 to 255 minutes SETPOINT RAMP TIME Enter the number of minutes desired to reach the final setpoint A ramp time of 0 implies an immediate change of setpoint 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 83 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition FINAL SP Within setpoint limits SETPOINT RAMP FINAL SETPOINT Enter the value desired for the final setpoint The controller will operate at the setpoint set here when ramp is ended ATTENTION If the ramp is
209. he input type will result Same as for Input 1 except in the loss of Field Carbon and Oxygen are not Calibration values and used plus will restore Factory SLIDEW SLIDEWIRE Calibration values m the Loop 1 Output Algorithm is set for Position Proportional then the Input 2 actuation is forced to slidewire SLIDEW If Loop 1 Control Algorithm is set for Three Position Step Control then the SLIDEW setting allows the motor position to be shown on the Lower Display The SLIDEW setting is not available on two loop or cascade controllers XMITTER2 Input 2 ranges and Refer to Input 1 parameters for definitions IN2 HI selections are same as for IN2 LO Input 1 RATIO 2 BIAS IN2 FILTER 2 BURNOUT2 EMISSIV2 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 113 4 10 Introduction Input 3 group prompts Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group These are the parameters required for Input 3 actuation transmitter characterization high and low range values in engineering units ratio bias and filter ATTENTION Prompts for Input 3 only appear if Input 2 PWA is installed and the actuation for Input 2 is configured for one of the following types 0 5 Vdc 1 5 Vdc 0 20 mA or 4 20 mA Table 4 9 lists all the function prompts in the Input 3 Set Up group and their definitions Table 4 9 Input 3 Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definiti
210. hen Timer is enabled NOTE 1 Two Loops and Cascade are only available on Expanded Model DC330E NOTE 2 Does not apply to Three Position Step Control 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 51 Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display INP ALG1 Input 1 Algorithm NONE MuDIV NONE Section formulas are located in W AVG MULT 4 6 Section 4 F FWRD CARB A FFWDMu CARB B ATTENTION All Input RELHUM CARBC Algorithms operate in SUMMER CARB D engineering units except HI SEL FCC feedforward which operates LO SEL DEW PT in percent of output units AMuDIV OXYGEN PV or RSP source in the VMULT Control Set Up group must be set to IN AL1 MATH K Weighted Average Ratio or K 0 001 to 1000 floating Constant for Math Selections CALC HI Calculated Variable High 999 to 9999 floating Scaling Factor for Input in engineering units Algorithm CALC LO Calculated Variable Low 999 to 9999 floating Scaling Factor for Input in engineering units Algorithm ALG1 INA Input Algorithm 1 INP 1 IN AL1 Input A Selection INP 2 IN AL2 LP1OUT INP 3 LP2OUT ALG1 INB Input Algorithm 1 INP 1 IN AL1 Input B Selection INP 2 IN AL2 LP1OUT INP 3 LP2OUT ALG1 INC Input Algorithm 1 NONE LP2OUT Input C Selection INPUT 1 IN AL1 INPUT 2 IN AL2 LP1OUT INP 3 PCO SEL Percent Carbon Source DISABL DISABL Input
211. i Lo or one of the General Math functions was selected as the Input Algorithm Range is used for either PV or RSP depending upon Algorithm application 96 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection ALG1 INA ALGORITHM 1 INPUT A SELECTION will represent one of the available selections INP 1 Input 1 INP 2 Input 2 LP1OUT Output 1 NOTE 1 2 Output 2 IN AL1 Input Algorithm 1 IN AL2 Input Algorithm 2 INP 3 Input 3 ALG1 INB ALGORITHM 1 INPUT B SELECTION will represent one of the available selections INP 1 Input 1 INP 2 Input 2 LP1OUT Output 1 NOTE 1 2 Output 2 IN AL1 Input Algorithm 1 IN AL2 Input Algorithm 2 INP 3 Input 3 ALG1 INC ALGORITHM 1 INPUT C SELECTION will represent one of the available selections NONE None INP 1 Input 1 INP 2 Input 2 LP1OUT Output 1 NOTE 1 2 Output 2 IN AL1 Input Algorithm 1 IN AL2 Input Algorithm 2 INP 3 Input 3 PCO SEL PERCENT CARBON SOURCE allows a live Input 3 value to be substituted for the static CO value PCT CO DISABL DISABLED ONLINE ONLINE Input 3 must be enabled PCT CO 0 020 to 0 350 fractional PERCENT CARBON is only applicable when Carbon percent of CO Potential is selected Enter the value in percent carbon monoxide that is applicable for the enriching gas used in fractional form FOR EXAMPLE Natural Gas 20
212. ification Sheet 51 52 03 23 Dial 1 888 423 9883 UDC 3000 Modbus 485RTU Communications Option 51 52 25 38 How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise 51 52 05 01 Environments xvi UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Section 1 Overview 1 1 Introduction Function Easy to read displays Easy to operate Mount anywhere The UDC 3300 is a microprocessor based stand alone controller It combines the highest degree of functionality and operating simplicity offered in a 1 4 DIN size controller With a typical accuracy of 0 20 of span the UDC 3300 is an ideal controller for regulating temperature and other process variables in numerous heating and cooling applications in metal working food and pharmaceuticals and testing and environmental work The dedicated vacuum fluorescent displays with multi language prompts make the operator interface easy to read understand and operate Programmed sequences of displays assure quick and accurate entry of all configurable parameters Simple keystrokes let you select input and range configuration set the operating parameters that meet your process control needs now and change them later to meet new ones The tactile keyboard provides positive operator feedback Self diagnostics fault tolerant design and keyboard security provide maximum assurance of trouble free operation The UDC is industrial control equipment that must be panel mounted The wiring t
213. in PVEUVAL3 PV3 Value for Gain the PV limits Scheduling To complete the PV selections for the segments enter PVEUVAL4 PV4 Value for Gain PV value for all the PVEUVAL prompts listed Scheduling The table on the following page shows the relationship FYEUVAES 5 Value for Gain between the GAIN Values and the PVEU Values Scheduling Gain Scheduling prompts are only available when PVEUVAL6 PV6 Value for Gain PID SETS in the Control Set Up group is configured Scheduling for GAIN S PVEUVAL7 PV7 Value for Gain Scheduling PVEUVAL8 PV8 Value for Gain Scheduling Apply to Expanded Model DC330E XX X C or E X only requires math option GAINVAL1 Gain Value 1 for Gain GAIN VAL 1 is the first of eight user defined Gain values Scheduling Enter a Gain Value you want to be used with PVEUVAL n GAINVAL2 Gain Value 2 for Gain previously entered Gain values are between 0 001 and Scheduling 1000 floating GAINVAL3 Gain Value 3 for Gain To complete the Gain selections enter a Gain value for all Scheduling the GAINVAL prompts listed GAINVAL4 Gain Value 4 for Gain The table below shows the relationship between the GAIN Scheduling Values and the PVEU Values GAINVAL5 Gain Value 5 for Gain Gain PV band over which each Scheduling Value X Gain applies GAINVAL6 Gain Value 6 for Gain 1 Low range limit to PVEUVAL2 Scheduling 2 PVUEVAL2 to PVEUVAL3 3 PVUEVAL3 to PVEUVAL4 ern ea valle ford 4 PVUEVAL4 to PVEUVALS Scheduling 0 5 PVUEVAL5 to PVEUVAL6
214. in nonvolatile memory only when there is a mode change i e when switching from RSP to LSP or from Manual to Automatic If power is lost then the current LSP value is also lost NO TRACKING If local setpoint tracking is not configured the LSP will not be altered when transfer from RSP to LSP is made PV Local setpoint tracks the PV when in manual RSP Local setpoint tracks remote setpoint when in automatic When the controller transfers out of remote setpoint the last value of the remote setpoint RSP is inserted into the local setpoint PWR MODE MANUAL A LSP RSP AM SP AM LSP POWER UP CONTROLLER MODE RECALL This selection determines which mode and setpoint the controller will use when the controller restarts after a power loss It applies to both loops MANUAL LSP At power up the controller will use manual mode with the local setpoint displayed AUTOMATIC MODE LAST LSP At power up the controller will use automatic mode with the last local setpoint used before power down displayed AUTOMATIC MODE LAST RSP At power up the controller will use automatic mode with the last remote setpoint used before power down displayed LAST MODE LAST SETPOINT used before power down LAST MODE LAST LOCAL SETPOINT on power down PWR OUT For Three Position Step Control Only LAST F SAFE TPSC Three Position Step Control OUTPUT START UP MODE This selection determines what posi
215. ineering units ACTION Control Output Direction DIRECT REVRSE REVRSE 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 61 Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer rower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display OUT RATE Output Change Rate ENABLE DISABL Section DISABL 4 12 PCT M UP Output Rate Up Value 0 to 9999 per minute 0 PCT M DN Output Rate Down Value 0 to 9999 per minute 0 OUTHILIM High Output Limit 5 to 105 of output 100 OUTLoLIM Low Output Limit 5 to 105 of output 0 HiLIM High Reset Limit Within the range of the output limits 100 0 I LoLIM Low Reset Limit Within the range of the output limits 0 0 DROPOFF Controller Dropoff Value 5 to 105 of output 0 DEADBAND Output Relay Deadband 5 0 to 5 0 1 0 FAILMODE Failsafe Mode NO LAT NO LAT LATCH FAILSAFE Failsafe Output Value Set within the range of the output 0 limits O to 100 62 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 17 Introduction Function prompts Options Set Up Group This data deals with various options that are available with your controller If your controller does not have any of these options the prompts will not appear Table 3 14 lists all the function prompts in the Options Set Up group Table 3 14 Options Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Selections or
216. int RSP Remote Setpoint CSP Computer Setpoint Selecting Manual Mode MANUAL AUTO until indicator is ON The controller holds its output at the last value used during automatic operation and stops adjusting the output for changes in setpoint or process variable Upper Display shows the PV value Lower Display shows OUT and the output value in 96 The deviation bargraph indicates the PV deviation from the setpoint Adjust the Output in Manual Mode A Y to adjust the output value while in manual mode Upper Display shows the PV value Lower Display Lt shows OUT and the output value in Return to Automatic Mode MANUAL AUTO The indicator will appear indicating Automatic mode 154 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Position proportional backup mode This feature provides for Position Proportional models to automatically change to a Three Position Step algorithm if the slidewire input signal fails This will maintain control of your process IN2 RNG or SW FAIL will flash in the lower display and the OUT display will show an estimated motor position WITHOUT a decimal point 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 155 5 7 Introduction Selecting the local setpoint source Setpoints You can configure the following setpoints for the UDC 3300 controller e single local setpoin
217. int can be viewed as SPn in the lower display Entering a 0 will imply an immediate change in Setpoint i e no rate applies EU HR DN 0 to 9999 in engineering units per hour RATE DOWN Rate down value for Loop 1 When making a setpoint change this is the rate at which the controller will change from the original setpoint down to the new one The ramping current setpoint can be viewed as SPn in the lower display Entering a 0 will imply an immediate change in Setpoint 1 no rate applies EU HRUP2 0 to 9999 in engineering units per hour RATE UP Rate up value for Loop 2 When making a setpoint change this is the rate at which the controller will change from the original setpoint up to the new one The ramping current setpoint can be viewed as SPn in the lower display 84 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition EU HRDN 2 0 to 9999 in engineering units per hour RATE DOWN Rate down value for Loop 2 When making a setpoint change this is the rate at which the controller will change from the original setpoint down to the new one The ramping current setpoint can be viewed as SPn in the lower display Entering a 0 will imply an immediate change in Setpoint i e no rate applies SP PROG option DISABL ENABLE ENABL2 ENAB12 SETPOINT RAMP
218. ion This is available as part of the Math Algorithm option Two 8 selections can made in Section 3 Configuration Set Up group ALGORTHM under function prompts 8SEG CHI Xn VALUE Yn VALUE 8SEG CH2 Xn VALU2 Yn VALU2 An 8 segment characterizer can be applied to either Input 1 Input 2 Output 1 or Output 2 When Input 1 or Input 2 is used the selected input s Ratio and Bias are applied to the Xn values When one of the loop outputs is selected the Xn Values are the output from the control algorithm and the Yn Output is the final control element action An example of 8 segment characterization is shown in Figure 4 2 A Flow Totalizer is available as part of the Math Algorithm option This calculates and displays the total flow volume being measured by Input 1 Alternatively it can be applied to either Input Algorithm 1 or Input Algorithm 2 to totalize the compensated flow rate being calculated by the algorithm The totalizer displays the current totalized flow value up to seven digits maximum Seven scaling factors are available from one to one million The desired scaling factor is applied to the calculated value to extend the maximum total flow range that can be displayed Five integration rates are available to match the totalizer rate to the rate of flow being measured The rates are Engineering units EU per second EU per minute EU per hour EU per day Millions of units per day The totalizer value is stored
219. is configured re tuning will occur if the setpoint change is 120 or larger 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 87 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition KPG 0 10 to 10 00 PROCESS GAIN LOOP 1 This is the Gain of the process being tuned on Loop 1 It is automatically calculated during tuning process This is normally a READ only value It should only need to be changed if the controller fails to identify the process In this case set the value to the algebraic value of PV in percent divided by output in percent while in the manual mode ATTENTION Note you must disable Accutune to change tuning constant values from the keyboard SP CHAN2 5 to 15 SETPOINT CHANGE LOOP 2 The minimum setpoint change on Loop 2 that will result in re tuning must be configured between 5 and 15 KPG 2 0 10 to 10 00 PROCESS GAIN LOOP 2 This is the Gain of the process being tuned on Loop 2 It is automatically calculated during tuning process This is normally a READ only value It should only need to be changed if the controller fails to identify the process In this case set the value to the algebraic value of PV in percent divided by output in percent while in the manual mode ATTENTION Note you must disable Accutune to change tuning constant values from the keyboard CRITERIA NORMAL FAST TUNING CRITERIA SETPOINT ADAPT
220. is fixed as loop 2 output Override rules The UDC 3300 allows you to select high or low output override Refer to Section 3 Configuration to select High or Low The following rules apply for high low override Only one physical output is required when override is enabled It is the output from Loop 1 because Loop 2 s internal output is routed through the selector Loop 2 output can also be available at all times if desired In Manual mode the Output may be overridden Does not apply for Three Position Step Control bottom display shows value of the internal Loop 1 output before any override The output of the unselected loop tracks the selected loop to within 596 when in Auto mode to eliminate windup This tracking is done in the direction opposite to the Override Select configuration i e for High Select the unselected output tracks within 596 of lower and vice versa 170 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Figure 5 4 is a block diagram of the Hi Lo Override Selector Figure 5 4 Hi Lo Override Selector OUTPUT 1 TERMINALS ae HI LO OVERRIDE PV 2 OUTPUT 2 TERMINALS IF DESIRED 24183 Two loop restrictions Table 5 22 gives two loop functionality and restrictions for controllers with one current output Auxiliary output and three relay outputs Table 5 22 Two loop Functionality and Restrictions Model DC330E EE 2XX or Model DC330E EE 5XX Controller with
221. is read on the milliammeter Use the values shown below depending on the action of your valve For0 to 20 mA Direct Action 20 For 0 to 20 mA Reverse Action 4mA For 4 to 20 mA Direct Action 20 For 4 to 20 mA Reverse Action x 1 3 Calibrate 100 FUNCTION ape e 0 value and you will see LOOP 1 2 a value Lower Display o VV until the desired 100 output is read on the milliammeter Use the values shown below depending on the action of your valve 20 For 0 to 20 mA Direct Action OmA For0 to 20 mA Reverse Action 20 For 4 to 20 mA Direct Action 4mA For 4 to 20 mA Reverse Action 4 Exit the Calibration Mode FUNCTION The controller will store the span value LOOP 1 2 LOWER To exit the calibration mode DISPLAY or SET UP When attempting to achieve 0 mA always adjust the output to about 0 5 mA and slowly decrease until the output just goes to zero Further decrementing will not change the output current since the circuit cannot produce negative current but will affect the accuracy of the output by creating a dead zone where no current flows 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 235 236 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Section 9 Troubleshooting Service 9 1 Overview Introduction Instrument performance can be adversely affected by installation and application problems as well as hardware problems We recommend that you investigate the problems in the follo
222. is supplied Otherwise the controllers may not start up normally due to voltage drop from the inrush current Weight 1 3 kg 3 Ibs 10 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Environmental and Operating Conditions Parameter Reference Rated Operative Transportation and Limits Storage Ambient Temperature 25 3 C 15 to 55 C 0 to 55 C 40 to 66 C 77 5 F 58 to 131 F 32 to 131 F 40 to 151 F Relative Humidity 10 to 55 10 to 90 5 to 90 5 to 95 Vibration Frequency Hz 0 0 to 70 0 to 200 0 to 200 Acceleration g 0 0 4 0 6 0 5 Mechanical Shock Acceleration g 0 1 5 20 Duration ms 0 30 30 30 Voltage Vdc 24 1 20 to 27 20 to 27 Voltage Vac 90 to 240 Vac 120 1 90 to 240 90 to 264 240 2 24 Vac 24 1 20 to 27 20 to 27 Frequency Hz 50 0 2 49 to 51 48 to 52 60 0 2 591061 5810 62 maximum rating only applies up to 40 C 104 F For higher temperatures the RH specification is derated to maintain constant moisture content 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 11 2 2 Model Number Interpretation Model number The model number interpretation is shown in Figure 2 1 Write the model number into the spaces provided and compare it to the model number interpretation This information will also be useful when you wire your controller Figure 2 1 Model Number Interpretation Key
223. isplay 1 LOOP 2LOOPS Lower Display CASCAD ALGORTHM A To select two Loops or Cascade control Select the output See Section 5 12 for rules and regulations then follow the procedure in algorithm for each loop Table 5 25 Table 5 25 Procedure for Selecting Output Algorithm Step Operation Press Action 1 Select Output Algorithm Set Up Group until you see Upper Display SET UP Lower Display 2 Select Loop 1 tO successively display the following Algorithms LOOP 1 2 constants Upper Display SET UP TIME CURRNT Lower Display POSITN CUR D CUR TI TI CUR A o select Loop 1 algorithm 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 173 Step Operation Press Action 3 Select Loop 2 Until you see algorithms LOOP 1 2 Upper Display NONE TIME Lower Display CURRNT OUT2 ALG CUR D CUR TI TI CUR A o 9 select Loop 2 algorithm v Select control The procedure in Table 5 26 shows you how select the 2 loop algorithm parameters for each loop Table 5 26 Procedure for Selecting Control Parameters Step Operation Press Action 1 Select Control until you see Set Up Group Upper Display Upper Display SET UP SET UP Lower Display Lower Display for Loop1 forLoop2 2 Refer to Section 5 12 for rules and restrictions and to Section 3 Configuration to select the individua
224. king is selected ENABLE Enables auto bias DISABLE Disables auto bias SPTRACK NONE PV RSP SETPOINT TRACKING The local setpoint can be configured to track either PV or RSP as listed below Not configurable when Auto Bias is set ATTENTION For selections other than NONE LSP is stored in nonvolatile memory only when there is a mode change i e when switching from RSP to LSP or from Manual to Automatic If power is lost then the current LSP value is also lost NO TRACKING If local setpoint tracking is not configured the LSP will not be altered when transfer from RSP to LSP is made PV Local setpoint tracks the PV when in manual mode RSP Local setpoint tracks remote setpoint When the controller transfers out of remote setpoint the last value of the remote setpoint RSP is inserted into the local setpoint SP HiLIM 0 to 100 of span input in engineering units with decimal place SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT This selection prevents the local and remote setpoints from going above the value selected here The setting must be equal or less than the upper range of the inputs SP LoLIM 0 to 100 of span input in engineering units with decimal place SETPOINT LOW LIMIT This selection prevents the local and remote setpoints from going below the value selected here The setting must be equal or greater than the lower range of the inputs ACTION CONTROL OUTPUT DIRECTION Select
225. l cascade mode both control loops are in manual although there is still only one output active This mode is used to bring both loops into a reasonable operation area at which point the unit is placed into the automatic cascade mode If Loop 1 is placed in Manual control mode then Loop 2 if in auto is then placed in a pseudo manual mode thereby eliminating output bumps when Loop 1 is returned to Automatic control mode AUTOMATIC CASCADE In Automatic cascade mode there are two control loops with one loop s output acting as the setpoint for the second control loop There is only one physical output in this mode 152 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 What happens when you change modes Table 5 8 explains what happens to the controller when you switch from one mode to another Table 5 8 Changing Operating Modes Mode Change Description Manual to Automatic Local Setpoint The Local Setpoint is usually the value previously stored as the Local Setpoint PV tracking is a configurable feature which modifies this For this configuration when a loop is in manual mode the local setpoint value tracks the process variable value continuously Manual or Auto Local to Automatic Remote SP The Remote Setpoint uses the stored ratio and bias to calculate the control setpoint Auto bias is a configurable feature which modifies this When it is selected the transfer from automatic local
226. l parameters 174 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Select tuning The procedure in Table 5 27 shows you how select the Tuning parameters for each Parameters group Table 5 27 Procedure for Selecting Tuning Parameters Step Operation Press Action 1 Select Tuning until you see Set Up Group Upper Display Upper Display Lower Display Lower Display for Loop1 forLoop2 PID sets 1 and 2 TUNING are for Loop 1 and single loop applications PID sets 3 and 4 TUNING 2 are for Loop 2 in two loop and cascade control applications 2 Select Tuning runction tO successively display the following constants LOOP 1 2 constants Upper Display The Tuning Constant Value Lower Display Oo TUNING CONSTANTS for Primary Loop PROP BAND or GAIN RATE MIN RESET MIN OR RPM CYCLE PROP BAND2 or GAIN2 RATE2 MIN RESET2 MIN OR RPM CYCLE2 OR TUNING CONSTANTS for LOOP2 PROP BANDS or GAIN3 RATES MIN RESET3 MIN OR RPM CYCLE3 PROP BAND4 or GAIN4 RATE4 MIN RESET4 MIN OR RPM CYCLE4 Refer to Section 3 Configuration for detailed information You can Autotune both sets on either loop Refer to Section 5 21 Use the FUNCTION key to switch between loops A o To change the values 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 175 5 14 Monitoring Two Loops of Control Introduction Loop display Viewing each loop s process variable Internal cascade indication
227. larm for Output 1 c tare ieee Alarm Blocking DECIMA tpe ted pet m cerea Control Loop 1 Decimal Place DEGIMAL2 Control Loop 2 Decimal Place TEMPUN T ir eret veta o tette o elena Loop 1 Temperature Units PWR FREG E Power Frequency RFIATIO2 n crepat Ratio for Input 2 Set from the front of the controller SP RAMP nbi Setpoint Ramp selection eo ueteres t aeter cet POR xata Setpoint Ramp Soak Programming renal Start Segment Number END SEQ nni patet o tatit et ka End Segment Number RFAMPUNIT crest t etta eet cett RR Ert ee ug Engineering units for ramp segments REGYGUES tct optet trece n cer rtr eto Number of Program Recycles c se eb o tee ge te ertet Guaranteed Soak Deviation Value PROG EN D Program Termination State STATE E A Program State at Program End SEGTRAMP Segment 1 Ramp Time SEG1RATE GAL MTR E Auto calibration never performed for Position Proportional or 3 Position Step control with motor position indication CAL TES E ER Calibration test failure E E E E Configuration error xiv UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 GONETEST n tiet ee ted edet rtl td ee
228. lay 1 Relay Load o Load Supply To termina OW pO o Power 10 3 4 Alarm N C Load Relay 2 ENG Alarm Relay 2 Load TNC Supply 6 To terminal O Power 40 6 Q N E Relay Alarm Relay 1 Load o Load N C Supply L T6 ter NGF O Power terminal 70r9 Relay Load g o Load Supply 44 terminal ______ Y ora 21974 ec Power Relay Load panum lt To terminal 9 opory 4 or 6 Load Supply 0 Power To terminal me mum mom 70r9 O Alarm 2 is not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control or Position Proportional Control Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps 120 Vac or 30 Vdc and 2 5 Amps at 240 Vac Customer should size fuses accordingly Use Fast Blo fuses only 2159 22 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Time proportional Figure 2 9 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models output continued with Solid State Relay Output Model DC330X AA XX For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information see Tables 2 7 and 2 8 Figure 2 9 Solid State Relay Output Model DC330X AA XX Time Proportional Simplex 1 AC Load Output E C dn Supply L2 N O Power t N e aa C AC Load elay Supply lt 5 9 6 To terminal G o Power 4or6 Alarm 7 AC Load Relays L c Supply
229. lculate whether to SP tune or not But if the controller is toggled between LSP1 and LSP2 or if any other key such as LOWER DISPLAY is pressed the setpoint change is immediate A large T is displayed in the upper display whenever tuning is in progress During this time no changes to the configuration parameters including the setpoint are permitted If it is necessary to stop or abort the tuning Press MANUAL AUTO key to return to manual mode This will cause an immediate abort of tuning Disable SP or SP PV in the Accutune Set Up group at function prompt ACCUTUNE ACCUTUN2 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 195 Retuning TUN PV or SP PV process variable disturbance PV tuning indications Aborting PV adaptive tuning The controller will evaluate current tuning as SP changes occur When retuning is required the controller operates in automatic mode and identifies new tuning constants At the point the T appears and tuning values are entered and used until retuning occurs again The TUNE demand tuning or the SP tuning portions of these selections work as stated previously During process variable PV disturbances which result from nonlinearities process dynamics load changes or other operating conditions PV adapt tuning will occur whenever a PV disturbance of 0 3 span or larger occurs When this condition exists the controller monitors the process response to determine whether there
230. lculation In addition the two algorithms may be linked to combine two calculations by configuring one algorithm to be an input to the other algorithm Standard functionality Basic models DC330B contain as standard Weighted Average Feedforward Summer Feedforward Multiplier Expanded models DC330E provide as standard Weighted Average Feedforward Summer Feedforward Multiplier Relative Humidity The Math option which provides additional algorithms plus two Characterizers Totalizer and Gain Scheduling is available only on Expanded Model DC330E XX XXX Algorithm selections are made in Section 3 Configuration The following function prompts can be found in the Algorithm Set Up group IN ALGI IN ALG2 These selections include the following algorithms Weighted Average Feedforward Summer Relative Humidity Summer Hi Select Lo Select Y Multiply Divide Multiply Multiply Divide Multiply Feedforward Multiplier Carbon Potential several types Dewpoint The formulas for these selections are given in Table 4 5 in Section 4 Configuration Prompt Definitions Input A Input B and Input C selections for these formulas are found in Section 4 Configuration Prompt Definitions Set Up group ALGORTHM under the following function prompts ALGI INA ALGI INB ALGI INC ALG2 INA ALG2 INB ALG2 INC 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 179 8 segment characterization Totalizer funct
231. le RTC R TC R Thermocouple STC S TC S Thermocouple TTCH T TC H T Thermocouple High TTCL T TC L T Thermocouple Low WTCH W TC H W5W26 Thermocouple High WTCL W TC L W5W26 Thermocouple Low 100 PT 100 PT 100 Ohm RTD High 100 LO 100 LO 100 Ohm RTD Low 200 PT 200 PT 200 Ohm RTD 500 PT 500 PT 500 Ohm RTD RAD RH RAD RH Radiamatic RH RAD RI RAD RI Radiamatic RI 0 20mA 0 20mA 0 to 20 Milliamperes 4 20mA 4 20mA 4 to 20 Milliamperes 0 10mV 0 10mV 0 to 10 Millivolts 0 50mV 0 50mV 0 to 50 Millivolts 0 5 V 0 5 0 to 5 Volts 1 5 V 1 5 V 1 to 5 Volts 0 10 V 0 10 V O to 10 Volts CARBON Carbon OXYGEN Oxygen 110 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection XMITTER Select one from the columns TRANSMITTER CHARACTERIZATION This selection below lets you instruct the controller to characterize a linear input to represent a non linear one BTC STC DOES E TCH TTCH ATTENTION Prompt only appears when a linear ETCL TTCL actuation is selected at prompt IN1TYPE W TO H FOR EXAMPLE JTCL WTCL r KTCH 100 PT If input 1 is a 4 to 20 mA signal but the signal represents 10010 a type K thermocouple select K TC H and the controller NNM H 200 PT will characterize the 4 to 20 mA signal so that it is treated NNM L 500 PT as a type K thermocouple input high range NM90 H RAD RH Parameter
232. lection Setting TUNING PROP BD ss ALGORTHM CONT ALG PIDA or TIMER DISABL GAIN 1 000 PERIOD 0 01 or START KEY GAINVALn Read Only L DISP REM RATE MIN 0 00 INP ALG1 NONE RSET MIN 1 00 MATH K B or CALC HI RSET RPM 22 CALC LO 24 0 ALG1 INA PROPBD2 ALG1 INB or ALG1 INC GAIN 2 1 000 PCT CO 0 200 RATE2MIN 0 00 RSET2MIN 1 00 He OUT ALG OUT ALG CURRNT RSET2RPM 2 4 20 RNG 100 CYC SEC 20 RLYSTATE 10F20N RLY CYC SX3 20 ae BEG 20 INPUT 1 1 TYPE 0 10mV CYC2 SX3 20 riri a 0 SECURITY 0 IN1 LO 0 LOCKOUT CALIB RATIO 1 100 AUTO ENABLE BIAS IN1 0 SP SEL ENABLE FILTER 1 0 RUN HOLD ENABLE BURNOUT1 NONE EMMISIV1 0 00 SP RAMP SP RAMP DISABL IE MS 3 INPUT 2 IN2 TYPE 0 10mV FINAL SP 1000 XMITTER2 LINEAR SP RATE DISABL NS HIE 1000 EU HR UP 0 IN2 LO EU HR DN 0 RATIO 2 1 00 SP PROG DISABL BIAS IN2 0 FILTER 2 0 ACCUTUNE FUZZY DISABL BURNOUT2 NONE ACCUTUNE DISABL EMMISIV2 0 00 ATERROR Read Only NONE 72 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Group Function Value or Factory Group Function Value or Factory Prompt Prompt Selection Setting Prompt Prompt Selection Setting CONTROL PV SOURC INP 1 COM ComSTATE DISABL PID SETS 1 ONLY Com ADDR 0 SW VALUE 0 00 SHEDTIME 0 LSP S 1 ONLY PARITY ODD RSP SRC NONE BAUD 2400 AUTOBIAS DISABL DUPLEX HALF SP TRACK NONE TX DELAY 1 PWR MODE MANUAL SHEDMODE LAST PWR OUT LAST SHEDSP TO LS
233. lectrical considerations Controller grounding Control alarm circuit wiring Electrical Noise Precautions The controller is considered rack and panel mounted equipment per EN 61010 1 Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement Control and Laboratory Use Part 1 General Requirements Conformity with 72 23 EEC the Low Voltage Directive requires the user to provide adequate protection against a shock hazard The user shall install this controller in an enclosure that limits OPERATOR access to the rear terminals PROTECTIVE BONDING grounding of this controller and the enclosure in which it is installed shall be in accordance with National and local electrical codes To minimize electrical noise and transients that may adversely affect the system supplementary bonding of the controller enclosure to a local ground using a No 12 4 mm copper conductor is recommended The insulation of wires connected to the Control Alarm terminals shall be rated for the highest voltage involved Extra Low Voltage ELV wiring input current output and low voltage Control Alarm circuits shall be separated from HAZARDOUS LIVE gt 30 Vac 42 4 Vpeak or 60 Vdc wiring per Table 2 3 Electrical noise is composed of unabated electrical signals which produce undesirable effects in measurements and control circuits Digital equipment is especially sensitive to the effects of electrical noise Your controller has built in circ
234. lose to the controller within easy reach of the operator The switch or circuit breaker should be marked as the disconnecting device for the controller 4 mm Applying 90 264 Vac to a controller rated for 24 Vac dc will severely damage the controller and is a fire and smoke hazard When applying power to multiple instruments make sure that sufficient current is supplied Otherwise the instruments may not start up normally due to the voltage drop caused by the in rush current Figure 2 5 shows the wiring connections for line voltage Figure 2 5 Line Voltage Wiring Voltage 22607 PROTECTIVE BONDING grounding of this controller and the enclosure in which it is installed shall be in accordance with National and local electrical codes To minimize electrical noise and transients that may adversly affect the system supplementary bonding of the controller enclosure to a local ground using No 12 4 mm copper conductor is recommended Provide a switch and non time delay North America quick acting high breaking capacity Type F Europe 1 2 A 250 V fuse s or circuit breaker for 90 264 V or 1 A 125 V fuse or circuit breaker for 24 Vac dc operation as part of the installation 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 19 Input 1 Input 2 Figure 2 6 shows the wiring connections for Input 1 and Input 2 connections Figure 2 6 Input 1 Input 2 Connections INPUT 2 Refer to
235. ly applicable when Dewpoint is selected Enter a value for the percentage of Hydrogen content that is applicable ALG2BIAS 999 to 9999 floating in INPUT ALGORITHM 2 BIAS Does not apply to engineering units selections FFWR2 FFWM2 HI SEL or LO SEL 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 99 Figure 4 1 Example of Mass Flow Compensation using Multiplier Divider Algorithm Example Mass Flow Compensation A gas flow rate of 650 SCFM develops a differential pressure of 90 across an orifice plate at reference conditions of 30 psig and 140 F Compensate this gas flow for temperature and pressure variations DP P Flow K Fr f flowing conditions Tt Pret ref reference conditions in absolute units Apply Multiplier Divider Algorithm PV K Input A x Ratio A Biasa x Input C x Ratioc Bias c X IcHI Cal Input B x RatioB Bias B pai alaro Assign inputs using Engineering units Let Input A DP IN1 H 20 Input T IN2 Bias2 IN2 F 460 R Input C P IN3 Bias3 IN3psig 14 7 psia Tref 140 F 460 600 R Prot 30 psig 14 7 44 7 psia Cale i 560 0 gt Flow in SFCM at Reference Conditions Calc 0 0 K to be determined next Note If temperature and pressure signals are already ranged in absolute units no Bias is required for inputs B and C PV Qsorm DPrx INS 14 7 2 460
236. ly and automatically cont d COUNTS1 0 9999 1 1000 counts for Shows the value of Counter 1 Read only output relays 1 and 2 COUNTER2 Same as COUNTER1 Counter 2 counts the number of times the selected event has occurred COUNTS2 Same as COUNTS1 Shows the value of Counter 2 Read only COUNTER3 Same as COUNTER1 Counter 3 counts the number of times the selected event has occurred COUNTS3 Same as COUNTS1 Shows the value of Counter 3 Read only RESET ID 0 9999 RESET ID Entering the designated RESET ID resets to zero the timer or counter specified by Reset Type To designate a number as the Reset ID 1 Set all timers and counters to DISABL 2 Enter the desired RESET ID 0 9999 3 Select a Reset Type next prompt The Reset ID goes into effect when you press FUNC that is you can use it to reset the counters and timers RES TYPE RESET TYPE Select which timers and or counters will be reset to zero when the RESET ID is entered NONE NONE No values will be reset TIMER1 TIMER 1 will be reset TIMER2 TIMER 2 will be reset TIMER3 TIMER 3 will be reset ALL TM ALL TIMERS will be reset COUNT1 COUNTER 1 will be reset COUNT2 COUNTER 2 will be reset COUNT3 COUNTER 3 will be reset ALL CO ALL COUNTERS will be reset ALL TC ALL TIMERS AND COUNTERS will be reset 4 19 Introduction Status Test Data The prompts used here are for determining the reason for a controller failure Refer to the Section 8 Troubleshooting in this manu
237. meter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection TOTALIZE TOTALIZER FUNCTION calculates and displays the total flow volume as measured by Input 1 or applied to either Input Algorithm 1 or Algorithm 2 to totalize the compensated flow rate being calculated by the algorithm Displayed value is eight digits with a configurable scale factor DISABL DISABLE Disables the totalizer function INPUT 1 Totalizer is applied to Input 1 IN AL1 IN AL1 Totalizer is applied to Input Algorithm 1 IN AL2 IN AL2 Totalizer is applied to Input Algorithm 2 ATTENTION The totalizer should always be reset to initialize the counters whenever it is enabled Otherwise the sigma display will blink XXXXXXXX YX En READ ONLY Current Scale Factor Upper Display Actual Current Totalized Value Lower Display TOT SCAL EO 1 x 100 1 TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR Selects the desired Scale E1 21x10 10 Factor i e Multiplier 2 The desired factor is applied to the calculated value to 2 1 104 100 1 3 extend the maximum flow range that can be displayed 1 x 10 1 000 E4 1 x 104 10 000 E5 1 x 10 100 000 E6 1 x 106 1 000 000 TOT SEC TOTALIZER RESET LOCK Allows the totalizer to be reset UNLOCK UNLOCK Allows the totalizer value to be reset LOCK LOCK Prevents the totalizer value from being reset Y RSET TOTALIZER RESET Appears only if the totalizer is unlocked NO NO No Reset YES YES Resets on n
238. mputer setpoints except ramping setpoints i e cannot be done during SP Ramp or SP Program or when using remote setpoint X X Tuning is done in automatic mode X X Tuning can be monitored or reconfigured using communications option X X Tuning can be enabled via digital inputs X X Tuning can be aborted by going to manual mode or disabling via configuration X X When tuning is in progress a large T appears in the upper display and disappears as soon as tuning is completed X X Can tune two independent loops X Setpoint changes can be made during operation The setpoint at the time tuning starts is captured and Tune runs until completion then proceeds to the new SP value following the completion of tuning SP ADAPT not available on Basic Model DC330B How TUNE demand tuning works TUNE tuning provides virtually foolproof trouble free on demand tuning in the UDC 3300 controller No knowledge of the process is required at start up The operator simply enters the desired setpoint and initiates the tuning The controller immediately starts controlling to the setpoint while it identifies the process calculates the tuning constants and enters them into the Tuning group and begins PID control with the correct tuning parameters This works with any process including integrating type processes and allows returning at a fixed setpoint The tuning sequence will cycle the controller s output two full cycles between 0 and 100 or con
239. munications SHED or when NO BURNOUT is configured and input 1 fails ATTENTION At power up the Loop 2 Output is set to the Failsafe Output 2 value 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 125 4 13 Introduction Option group prompts Options Set Up Group Configure the remote mode switch Digital Inputs to a specific contact closure response or configure the Auxiliary Output to be a specific selection with desired scaling Table 4 12 lists all the function prompts in the Options Set Up group and their functions Table 4 12 Options Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection AUX OUT AUXILIARY OUTPUT SELECTION FOR ONE LOOP or or CUR OUT2 AUXILIARY OUTPUT SELECTION FOR TWO LOOPS ATTENTION Prompts This selection provides an mA output representing one of for the Auxiliary Output several control parameters The display for auxiliary output Selection appear only if viewing will be in engineering units for all but output one of the Auxiliary Output will be displayed in percent Output boards is installed Other prompts affected by these selections 4mA VAL and 20mA VAL ATTENTION When the controller is configured for Two Loop operation and the Loop 2 Output selection requires a current output the Auxiliary Output selection is automatically set to Output 2 and all other selections are locked out Output cann
240. n auxiliary output current range of from 0 to 21 milliamperes and can be calibrated at 4 mA for 0 of output and 20 mA for 100 of output or any other values between 0 and 21 mA Equipment needed You will need a standard shop type milliammeter with whatever accuracy is required capable of measuring 0 to 20 milliamps Calibrator connections Referring to Figure 8 2 wire the controller according to the procedure given in Table 8 4 Table 8 4 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Auxiliary Output Step Action 1 Apply power and allow the controller to warm up 30 minutes before you calibrate 2 Tag and disconnect the field wiring at the rear of the controller from terminals 16 and 17 See Figure 8 2 3 Connect a milliammeter across these terminals Figure 8 2 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Auxiliary Output Milliammeter 22636 234 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Procedure The procedure for calibrating the Auxiliary Output is listed in Table 8 5 Make sure LOCKOUT in the Tuning Set Up group is set to NONE See Section 3 Configuration Table 8 5 Auxiliary Output Calibration Procedure Step Description Press Action 1 Enter Calibration Mode until you see SET UP Upper Display Lower Display 2 Calibrate 096 FUNCTION You Mi 1 2 peer Display a value between 0 and 4095 Lower Display or GY until the desired 0 output
241. ndition exists the controller monitors the process response for 1 and 1 2 process cycles around the setpoint to determine whether there has been a true process change or a momentary upset Process retuning occurs as the process dynamics are learned When the process is being learned with possible retune a t is shown in the upper left display digit SP PV Tuning not available on Basic Model DC330B 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 49 Function prompts Table 3 6 lists the function prompts in the Accutune Set Up group Table 3 6 Accutune Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display FUZZY Fuzzy Overshoot DISABL DISABL Section Suppression ENABLE 4 5 ENABL2 ENAB12 ACCUTUNE Accutune Loop 1 DISABL DISABL TUNE Demand Tuning SP SP Tuning TUN PV SP PV ACCUTUN2 Accutune Loop 2 DISABL DISABL TUNE Demand Tuning SP SP Tuning TUN PV SP PV SP CHANG Setpoint Change Value 5 to 15 Input Span 10 Loop 1 KPG Process Gain Loop 1 0 10 to 10 00 1 00 SP CHAN2 Setpoint Change Value 5 to 15 Input Span 10 Loop 2 KPG 2 Process Gain Loop 2 0 10 to 10 00 1 00 CRITERIA Tuning Criteria Loop 1 NORMAL FAST FAST CRITERA2 Tuning Criteria Loop 2 NORMAL FAST FAST AT ERROR Accutune Error Codes Read Only or RUNING Accutune process in AT ERR 2 operation
242. nfigurable parameters listed in Section 3 Configuration If you are not familiar with these parameters this section gives you the parameter prompt the selection or range of setting that you can make and a definition of how each parameter setting affects controller performance It will also refer you to any other prompts that might be affected by your selection What s in this The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section They are section listed in the order of their appearance in the controller Topic See Page 4 1 Overview 77 4 2 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 78 4 3 Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 82 4 4 Setpoint Ramp Rate Programming Set Up Group 83 4 5 Accutune Set Up Group 86 4 6 Algorithm Data Set Up Group 90 4 7 Output Algorithm Set Up Group 107 4 8 Input 1 Set Up Group 110 4 9 Input 2 Set Up Group 113 4 10 Input 3 Set Up Group 114 4 11 Loop 1 Control Set Up Group 115 4 12 Loop 2 Control Set Up Group 121 4 13 Options Set Up Group 126 4 14 Communications Set Up Group 132 4 15 Alarms Set Up Group 135 4 16 Display Parameters Set Up Group 139 4 17 Calibration Data 140 4 18 Maintenance Set Up Group 140 4 19 Status Test Data 142 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 77 4 2 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group Introduction Set this group last Tuning group prompts Tuning consists of establishing the appr
243. ng information Topic See Page 2 1 Overview 7 Specifications 9 2 2 Model Number Interpretation 12 2 3 Mounting 13 2 4 Wiring 15 2 5 Wiring Diagrams 18 Composite Wiring Diagram 18 Line Voltage 19 Input 1 Input 2 20 Two HLAI 21 Time Proportional Output Electromechanical 22 Solid State 23 10 amp Solid State 24 Open Collector 25 Current Output Universal Output Two Current or Two Relay 26 One Current Auxiliary and Three Relay 27 Position Proportional Output 28 Auxiliary Output 29 Digital Inputs 29 Communications RS422 485 Modbus 30 DMCS 31 Transmitter Power for 4 20 mA 2 wire Transmitter Using Open Collector Alarm 2 Output 32 Using Auxiliary Output 33 2 6 Control and Alarm Relay Contact Information 34 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual Pre installation information CE conformity special conditions Europe Specifications If the controller has not been removed from its shipping carton inspect the carton for damage and remove the controller Inspect the unit for any obvious shipping damage and report any damage due to transit to the carrier Make sure that the carton with the controller includes e a bag containing mounting hardware and abag containing input resistors Check that the model number shown on the inside of the case agrees with what you have ordered Shielded twisted pair cables are required for all Analog I O Process Variable RTD Thermocouple dc millivolt
244. nput 2 Set from the front of the controller DISABL ENABLE DISABL LANGUAGE Display Language ENGLIS FRENCH GERMAN SPANIS ITALAN ENGLIS Section 4 16 68 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 21 Calibration Group Calibration data The prompts used here are for field calibration purposes Refer to Section 7 Calibration in this manual for complete information and instructions 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 69 3 22 Maintenance Set Up Group Introduction Function prompts The Maintenance group prompts are part of the HealthWatch feature These prompts let you count and time the activity of discrete events such as relays alarms control modes and others to keep track of maintenance needs Table 3 18 lists all the function prompts in the Maintenance Set Up group Table 3 18 Maintenance Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display TIME1 TIMER 1 DISABL DISABL Section LASTR 4 18 AL1SP1 AL1SP2 AL2SP1 AL2SP2 MANUAL GSOAK SOOTNG DIGIN1 DIGIN2 MAN2 HRS MIN1 ELAPSED TIME 1 Read only OR DAYS HRS1 TIME2 TIMER 2 Same as TIME1 DISABL HRS MIN2 ELAPSED TIME 2 Read only OR DAYS HRS2 TIME3 TIMER 3 Same as TIME1 DISABL HRS MIN3 ELAPSED TIME 3 Read only OR DAYS HRS3 70 UDC 3300 Process Controller Produ
245. ns Table 6 3 lists all the functions required to run and monitor the program Table 6 3 Run Monitor Functions Function Press Result Set the Local Setpoint SETPOINT SELECT You will see Upper Display Lower Display Local Setpoint Value to set the Local Setpoint value to where you want the program to start out Run State RUN HOLD Initiates the setpoint program An R appears in the upper display indicating that the program is running Hold State RUN HOLD Holds the setpoint program An H appears in the upper display indicating that the program is in the HOLD state The setpoint holds at the current setpoint External Hold If Remote Switching Digital Input option is present on your controller contact closure places the controller in the HOLD state if the setpoint program is running The in the upper display will blink indicating external hold is in effect ATTENTION The keyboard takes priority over external switch for the RUN HOLD function Contact reopening runs program Changing a Segment while in Hold These keys will operate and allow you to change the segment number while in HOLD If a different segment is selected it will be started at the beginning when placed in RUN If the original segment is brought back the program will continue from the point placed in HOLD NOTE Changing a segment n
246. nual mode 3 Adjust the A to adjust the output value and ensure that the final control element is output functioning correctly or Upper Display shows the PV value Lower Display H snos OUT and the output value in 4 Enter the local Upper Displa setpoint LOWER DISPLAY shows the PV Value Lower Display se and the local setpoint value to adjust the local setpoint to the value at which you want the process variable maintained or The local setpoint cannot be changed if the Setpoint Ramp function is running R appears in the upper display 5 Select MANUAL until A indicator is ON Automatic AUTO The controller is in Automatic mode Mode The controller will automatically adjust the output to maintain the process variable at setpoint if the controller is properly tuned 6 Tune the Tuning is required on the first startup First enable TUNE selection in the controller SET UP Accutune Group Refer to Tuning Set Up group to ensure that the proper selections for PROP BD or GAIN RATE MIN and RSET MIN or RSET RPM have been entered Use Accutune to tune the controller see the procedure in this section For 2 loop or Cascade control refer to the Loop 2 Tuning Set Up group parameters To tune your controller manually see Appendix A 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 151 5 6 Operating Modes Available modes The controller can operate in any of three basic modes Manual One or Two
247. o 5096 Relay controls cool current controls heat Other prompts affected 4 20 RNG 4 20 RNG 50 PCT 100PCT CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE ALGORITHM Used with Output Algorithm selections CUR D CUR TI or TI CUR CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE SPLIT This setting should be used for Relay Current and Current Relay Duplex Outputs It can also be used for Current Duplex when an Auxiliary Output board is present This enables the normal control current output to provide heat control and the auxiliary current output to provide cool control To enable this AUX OUT in the Options Set Up group must be selected for Output The Auxiliary Current Output is scaled as desired for 0 5096 controller output Deadband for this configuration only applies to the Current Output The Auxiliary Output must have the Deadband scaled in FOR EXAMPLE If a 2 Deadband is desired then enter 2 0 for the Deadband selection in the Control Algorithm group This will apply Deadband to the Current Output In the Options group set the Auxiliary Output 4mA VAL selection to 49 0 and the 20mA VAL selection to 0 0 CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE FULL enables the Current Output to provide both heat and cool functions for control over 0 100 of the controller output The PID heat parameters apply when the output is greater than 5096 and the PID cool parameters apply when the output is less than 50 The second current output is not required for this type of d
248. o HLAI Refer to Table 2 4 High Level Analog Input Connections See Below 1 5V Connections Input 3 Source Power Supply Q The 2500 load resistors are supplied by Honeywell with the controller when the input is 24161 specified These items must be installed when you wire the controller before start up Input 2 jumper Table 2 4 shows the location of the second input jumper and the input types available for each jumper position Table 2 4 Input 2 Jumper Selections Jumper Location 2nd Input we Power Input PWA B 24162 Jumper W1 W2 None remove jumper Position Input Types Slidewire Thermocouple RTD mV Two HLAI replace LLAI Available Radiamatic Carbon Oxygen 4 20 mA 0 20 mA 1 5V 0 5V 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 21 Time proportional There are three types of Time Proportional outputs available on the output UDC 3300 Electromechanical Relay Output Model DC330X EE XXX Figure 2 8 Solid State Relay Output Model DC330X AA SS XXX Figures 2 9 Open Collector Output Model DC330X TT XXX Figure 2 11 The Alarm wiring connections are the same for all three outputs For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information see Tables 2 7 and 2 8 Figure 2 8 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models with Electromechanical Relay Output Figure 2 8 Electromechanical Relay Output Model DC330X EE XXX Time Proportional Simplex Output T Re
249. o a Set Up group prompt more quickly hold the SET UP key in To get to a Function prompt more quickly hold the FUNCTION key in The display will scroll through the parameters ATTENTION The prompting scrolls at a rate of 2 3 seconds when the SET UP or FUNCTION key is held in Also 4 V keys will move group prompts forward or backward at a rate twice as fast Changing values quickly When changing the value of a parameter you can use a single A or V key Hold the key in to increase the rate of change Stop pressing the key for 1 2 second then press again to restart at a slow rate When changing the value of a parameter you can adjust a more significant digit in the upper display by holding in one key A or V and pressing the other A or V at the same time The adjustment will move one digit to the left Press the key again and you will move one more digit to the left Holding the 4 and V keys down will change the value twice as quickly Restoring to the original value When you change the value or selection of a parameter while in Set Up mode and decide not to enter it press RUN HOLD once the original value or selection will be recalled Exiting SET UP mode To exit Set Up mode press the LOWER DISPLAY key This returns the display to the same state it was in immediately preceding entry into the Set Up mode Timing out from Set Up mode If you are in Set Up mode
250. oard operation LOW PV PV not changed sufficiently or the PV has NONE After a period of about five minutes increased by more than 496 and dead time the SP adaptive tuning will be retried not determined automatically with a larger output step RUNING Informational prompt indicating that SP NONE Does not apply to PV Adapt 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 197 5 22 Introduction Features Diagram Carbon Potential Figure 5 6 shows a UDC 3300 controller being used to control the carbon potential of a furnace s atmosphere A carbon probe consisting of a ZrO2 sensor and a thermocouple to measure the temperature at the sensor provides two inputs to the controller The microprocessor based controller computes the atmosphere s actual carbon potential from these two inputs and compares the computed value with the desired setpoint As an on off or PID control algorithm determines the controller output necessary to keep the actual carbon potential at the setpoint Usually only one output is used to add more or less enriching gas typically natural gas to the furnace s base atmosphere which has a relatively low carbon potential The enriching gas then raises the carbon potential to the desired level however there are occasions when it is necessary to add dilution air to lower the carbon potential instead of enriching gas to raise it In those instances a second output from the controller provides thi
251. ocal control you want when the controller is shed from the communications link LAST SAME MODE AND OUTPUT The controller will return to the same mode manual or automatic at the same output level that it had before shed TO MAN MANUAL MODE SAME OUTPUT The controller will return to manual mode at the same output level that it had before shed FSAFE MANUAL MODE FAILSAFE OUTPUT The controller will return to manual mode at the output value selected at Control prompt FAILSAFE ToAUTO AUTOMATIC MODE LAST SP The controller will return to the automatic mode and the last setpoint used before shed SHED SP TO LSP TO CSP SHED SETPOINT RECALL TO LSP Controller will use last local or remote setpoint used TO CSP When in slave mode the controller will store the last host computer setpoint and use it at the Local setpoint When in monitor mode the controller will shed to the last UDC Local or Remote setpoint used and the LSP is unchanged 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 133 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection UNITS COMMUNICATION UNITS This selection determines how the controller values are expressed on both loops RS422 485 ASCII only during communications PERCNT PERCENT OF SPAN ENG ENGINEERING UNITS CSP RATO 20 0 to 20 0 LOOP 1 COMPUTER SETPOINT RATIO Computer s
252. oduction The troubleshooting procedures are listed in numerical order as they appear in Table 9 7 Each procedure lists what to do if you have that particular failure and how to do it or where to find the data needed to accomplish the task A WARNING SHOCK HAZARD N TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS AND SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE SERVICING Equipment needed You will need the following equipment in order to troubleshoot the symptoms listed in the tables that follow DC Milliammeter mAdc Calibration sources T C mV Volt etc Voltmeter Procedure 1 Table 9 8 explains how to troubleshoot power failure symptoms Table 9 8 Troubleshooting Power Failure Symptoms Step What to do How to do it 1 Check the AC line voltage Use a voltmeter to measure the AC voltage across terminals L1 and L2 on the rear terminal panel of the controller Check the earth ground connection 2 Make sure the chassis plugs into Withdraw the chassis and visually the rear of the case properly inspect the controller board and the inside of the case 3 Check the system for Brown outs Refer to Section 2 Installation heavy load switching etc and conformance to installation instructions 4 Change PS Input board Refer to Table 9 20 5 Change MCU Output board Refer to Table 9
253. of PV Select the proper set of formulas from Table 11 2 Use the values of Gain or PB and time in minutes in the formulas to arrive at the controller s tuning parameters settings 268 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Step Action 10 Enter the values of GAIN or PB RATE and RESET in minutes or repeats adequate TO REDUCE OVERSHOOT per minute into the UDC 3300 controller and verify that the PV response is Make additional trimming adjustments if necessary to fine tune the controller per the guidelines shown below Less Gain more PB perhaps a longer Rate time TO INCREASE OVERSHOOT OR INCREASE SPEED OR RESPONSE More Gain less PB perhaps shorter Rate time Manual tuning formulas Table 11 2 lists the formulas used in the procedure listed in Table 11 1 Table 11 2 Manual Tuning Formulas Units GAIN PROPORTIONAL BAND and and RESET TIME in Minutes RESET ACTION in Repeats Repeat Minutes Proportional P only Use PD MR Algorithm i e No Reset GAIN Measured Gain x 0 5 RESET TIME 50 00 minimum reset RATE 0 PB Measured PB x 2 RESET ACTION 0 02 repeats minute RATE 0 Proportional Reset PI No Rate GAIN Measured Gain x 0 5 RESET TIME Measured Time M R 1 2 RATE 0 PB Measured PB x 2 2 RESET ACTION 1 2 R M Measured Time RATE 0 Proportional Reset Rate PID GAIN Measured Gain x
254. on 184 Digital inputs 1 and 2 combination selections 184 Digital inputs connections 29 Digital output status 109 Dimensions 3 Direct acting control 118 124 Disconnect the field wiring 275 Display Parameters Set Up Group 139 Displays and indicators 3 DMCS Communications board 262 Duplex 33 Duplex Heat Cool applications 82 E Eight segment characterizer 103 104 Eight segment characterizer 102 Eight segment characterization 180 Electrical considerations 15 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 271 Index Electrical noise 15 Electromechanical Relay Output 22 Emissivity 112 End segment number 202 Exploded view 265 External program reset 2 0 External setpoint program reset 129 F Failsafe mode 119 124 Failsafe output value 119 125 Feedforward multiplier 95 Feedforward summer 94 Filter 111 Flow totalizer 180 Function Prompts 36 37 Fuzzy overshoot suppression 189 Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression 49 G Gain 78 Gain 2 79 Gain scheduling 116 Gain Value for Gain Scheduling 8 grounding 5 Guaranteed soak 202 HealthWatch counters 140 timers 140 High output limit 124 High scaling factor 96 High select 95 Hysteresis output relay 119 I Input 1 actuation type 110 Input 1 high range value 111 Input 1 low range value 111 Input 1 Input 2 connections 20 Input 2 actuation type 113 Input 3 actuation type 114 Input algorithm selections
255. on or Selection IN3 TYPE INPUT 3 ACTUATION TYPE This selection determines ATTENTION Changing what actuation you are going to use for Input 3 the input type will result DISABL DISABL Disables Input 3 ini INe Oss or piel 0 20mA 0 20 0 to 20 milliamperes Calibration values and 4 4 20mA 4 to 20 milliamperes will restore Factory 0 5V 0 5 V 0 to 5 volts Calibration values 1 5V 1 5 V 1 to 5 volts XMITTER2 Input 3 ranges and Refer to Input 1 parameters for definitions IN3 HI selections are same as for IN3 LO Input 1 except Burnout and RATIO 3 Emissivity are not available BIAS IN3 FILTER 3 114 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 4 11 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group Introduction Control group prompts The functions listed in this group deal with how the Single Loop process controller or Loop 1 of a Two Loop process controller will control the process including PV source Number of tuning parameter sets Setpoint source Tracking Power up recall Setpoint limits Output direction rate and limits Power up preset outputs Dropoff Deadband and Hysteresis Table 4 10 lists all the function prompts in the Control Set Up group and their definitions Table 4 10 Control Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection PV SOURCE PROCESS VARIABLE SOURCE Select the source of the Process Va
256. on HOLD the held setpoint can be changed by the and v keys However the ramp time remaining and original ramp rate is not changed Therefore when returning to RUN mode the setpoint will ramp at the same rate as previous to the local setpoint change and will stop if the final setpoint is reached before the time expires If the time expires before the final setpoint is reached it will jump to the final setpoint ATTENTION SP RAMP and SP RATE will cause the SP portion of Accutune to abort PV Tune will continue to function normally Ramp is placed into HOLD while tuning TUNE configuration SP RATE SP Rate parameters EU HR UP EU HR DN EU HRUP2 EU HRDN2 appear when Rate is enabled and SP Ramp and SP Programming are disabled DISABL ENABLE ENABL2 ENAB12 SETPOINT RATE Lets you configure a specific rate of change for any local setpoint change SP Ramp and SP Programming must be disabled DISABLE SETPOINT RATE Disables the setpoint rate option ENABLE SETPOINT RATE Allows the SP rate feature for Loop 1 ENABLE SETPOINT RATE 2 Allows the SP rate feature for Loop 2 ENABLE SETPOINT RATE 12 Allows the SP rate feature for Loop 1 and Loop 2 EU HR UP 0 to 9999 in engineering units per hour RATE UP Rate up value for Loop 1 When making a setpoint change this is the rate at which the controller will change from the original setpoint up to the new one The ramping current setpo
257. ontact closure forces the loop to Manual mode with the output set to the Output High Limit configuration MAN blinks and the Output value is shown on the lower display Opening the switch has no effect NOTE 1 DIG IN 1 LoFIRE MAN LT REStot LOW FIRE Contact closure forces the loop to Manual mode with the output set to the Output Low Limit configuration MAN blinks and the Output value is shown on the lower display Opening the switch has no effect NOTE 1 MANUAL LATCHING Contact closure transition forces the loop to Manual mode Opening the switch has no effect If the MANUAL AUTO key is pressed while the switch is closed the loop will return to Automatic mode RESET TOTALIZER Contact closure transition resets the accumulated totalizer value Opening the switch has no effect DIG 1 COM DISABL PID2 ToDIR ToSP2 DISAT TOSP1 DIGITAL INPUT 1 COMBINATION SELECTIONS All selections are available in combination with Input 1 DISABLE Disables combination function Any Digital Input Selection PLUS PID2 Contact closure selects PID Set 2 Any Digital Input Selection PLUS DIRECT ACTION Contact closure selects direct controller action Any Digital Input Selection PLUS SETPOINT 2 Contact closure puts the controller into setpoint 2 Any Digital Input Selection PLUS DISABLE ADAPTIVE TUNE Contact closure disables Accutune process on Loop 1 Any Digital Input Selec
258. ontrol feature 186 Auto Manual Station mode 86 Automatic mode 54 Automatic switchover value 22 Auxiliary otuput calibration 234 Auxiliary output 126 Auxiliary Output board 262 Auxiliary output connections 29 Auxiliary Output RS422 485 board 262 B Baud rate 133 Bias 111 Burnout protection 112 Calibration mode 223 Calibration steps 215 Carbon control 199 Carbon potential 97 198 Carbon potential selections 96 CE Conformity Changing current segment time or setpoint in running SP program 2 2 Characterizer 102 103 Cleaning 264 CO compensation 199 Cold junction temperature 224 Communication units 34 Communications option connections 30 Communications selection 132 Communications Set Up Group 132 Composite wiring diagram 8 Configuration Prompt Definitions 77 Control 2 algorithm 92 Control algorithm 90 Controller dropoff value 118 124 Controller failure symptoms 240 Current duplex 708 Current output 2 126 Current output universal output connections 26 Current proportional duplex 270 Current simplex 107 Current time duplex 108 Cycle time cool 79 Cycle time heat 79 Deadband 119 124 Demand Tuning 49 Dewpoint 96 Dewpoint control 199 Diagnostic error messages 150 Digital input combinations 130 Digital Input option 82 Digital input selections 28 Digital inputs remote mode switching 177 Digital inputs 1 and 2 combination operati
259. opriate values for the tuning constants for a single loop controller These parameters are also for Loop 1 of a 2 Loop or Cascade control configuration The Accutune feature automatically selects Gain Rate and Reset This section also contains Keyboard Lockout Security selections Because this group contains functions that have to do with security and lockout we recommend that you configure this group last after all the other configuration data has been loaded Table 4 1 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning Set Up group and their definitions Table 4 1 Tuning Group Prompt Definitions Lower Display Prompt Parameter Definition Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection PROP BD or GAIN or GAINVALn 0 1 to 9999 PROPORTIONAL BAND simplex is the percent of the or range of the measured variable for which a proportional 0 001 to 1000 controller will produce a 100 change in its output GAIN is the ratio of output change over the measured variable change that caused it 100 PB where PB is the proportional band in If the PB is 20 then the Gain is 5 And at those settings a 3 change in the error signal SP PV will result ina 15 change in the controller s output due to proportional action If the Gain is 2 then the PB is 50 Also defined as HEAT Gain on Duplex models for variations of Heat Cool applications The selection of Proportional Band or Gain is made in the CONT
260. or signal Proportional Gain Regulates the controller s output in proportion to the error signal the difference between Process Variable and Setpoint Integral Reset Regulates the controller s output to the size of the error and the time the error has existed The amount of corrective action depends on the value of proportional Gain Derivative Rate Regulates the controller s output in proportion to the rate of change of the error The amount of corrective action depends on the value of proportional Gain PID B Unlike the PID A equation the controller gives only an integral response to a setpoint change with no effect on the output due to the gain or rate action and it gives full response to PV changes Otherwise controller action is as described for the PID A equation See note on PID A PD WITH MANUAL RESET is used whenever integral action is not wanted for automatic control The equation is computed with no integral contribution The MANUAL RESET which is operator adjustable is then added to the present output to form the controller output Switching between manual and automatic mode will be bumpless If you select PD with Manual Reset you can also configure the following variations PD Two Mode control P Single Mode control Set Rate D to 0 Other prompts affected MAN RSET in the Tuning Set Up group 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 91 Lower Displ
261. ormer connections are interchangeable Either may be used on Digital Input Board or the second Input Board 24279 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 259 2nd input board Follow the procedure listed in Table 9 19 to replace the Second Input board P N 30756715 501 Table 9 19 Second Input Board Replacement Procedure Step Action 1 Remove the chassis from the case See Figure 9 1 2 Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis See Figure 9 3 3 Lay the boards flat and identify the 2nd Input board See Figure 9 4 4 Remove the transformer plug from connector J14 5 The 2nd Input board is attached to the Power Input board by three mounting posts Locate these posts under the power input board 6 Use a small pliers and squeeze the ends of each post together and push it up through the board Remove 2nd Input board 7 Orient the new 2nd Input board onto the Power Input board and push the mounting posts down through the Power Input board until they click into place 8 Replace the transformer plug onto connector J14 Make sure the Input 2 jumper W1 W2 is in the correct position Refer to Table 2 4 9 Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis Make sure the connections to the display keyboard assembly are made and that the release points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards 10 Reinstall the chassis into the case Push in hard then tighten screw
262. ot be configured when Three Position Step Control is used DISABL NO AUXILIARY OUTPUT INP 1 INPUT 1 This represents the configured range of input 1 FOR EXAMPLE J Thermocouple 0 to 1600 O F display 0 output 1600 F display 100 output INP 2 INPUT 2 represents the value of the configured range of input 2 INP 3 INPUT 3 represents the value of the configured range of input 3 PV PROCESS VARIABLE Represents the value of the Process Variable PV Input 1 Bias 126 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition AUX OUT DEV OUTPUT SP LSP 1 IN AL1 IN AL2 PV2 DEV 2 OUTPT2 DEVIATION PROCESS VARIABLE MINUS SETPOINT Represents 100 to 100 of the selected PV span in engineering units FOR EXAMPLE Type T Thermocouple PV range 300 to 700 F PV span 1000 F Deviation Range 1000 to 1000 F If PV 500 F and SP 650 F then Deviation Display 150 F Auxiliary Output 42 5 When Deviation is selected only one operating parameter will be entered This value represents the deviation level that will produce 20 mA 100 output Zero deviation will produce a center scale 12 mA or 50 output A negative deviation equal in magnitude to the auxiliary output high value will produce a low end 4 mA or 0 output OUTPUT Represenis the displayed controller ou
263. ou can configure the first order lag time constant from 1 to 120 seconds If you do not want filtering enter 0 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 111 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition BURNOUT NONE UP DOWN NO_FS BURNOUT PROTECTION SENSOR BREAK provides most input types with upscale or downscale protection if the input fails 1 5V 0 10V or 4 20 mA inputs require no burnout or NONE selection NO BURNOUT Pre configured Failsafe output applied if failed input is detected does not apply for an input out of range Error message INPUT 1 FAIL is flashed on the lower display intermittently every 10 seconds UPSCALE BURNOUT will make the PV signal increase to full scale when a sensor fails and flash INPUT 1 FAIL on the lower display intermittently every 10 seconds The controller remains in Automatic control mode and adjusts the controller output signal in response to the full scale PV signal developed by the Burnout circuitry DOWNSCALE BURNOUT will make the PV signal decrease to the lower range value when a sensor fails and flash INPUT 1 FAIL on the lower display intermittently every 10 seconds The controller remains in Automatic control mode and adjusts the controller output signal in response to the zero percent PV signal developed by the Burnout circuitry NO FAILSAFE This selection does not provide input failure detection
264. oups plus prompts for calibration and prompts that show the status of the continuous background tests that are being performed 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 35 3 2 Diagram prompt hierarchy Figure 3 1 Set Up Group Function Prompts Configuration Prompts Overview of UDC 3300 Prompt Hierarchy Figure 3 1 shows an overview of the UDC 3300 Set Up prompts and their associated Function prompts Read from left to right p PROP BD TUNING or GAIN GAINVALn RATE MIN RSET MIN or RSET RPM MAN RSET PROPBD2 RATE2MIN or GAIN 2 RSET2MIN or RSET2RPM Security LOCKOUT AUTO MAN SPSEL RUNHOLD PVEUVALx CYC SEC CYC2 SEC or or cyc sx3 25 3 GAINVALx TUNINGL2 gt PROP3BD GAINVALn RATESMIN RSET3MIN MANRSET3 PROPBD4 RATEAMIN RSETAMIN or GAIN3 or or lt _ lt RSET3RPM GANN4 RSETARPM CYC3 SEC 4 5 PVEUVALx GAINVALx or or CYC3 SX3 CYC4 SX3 SP RAMP Time min FINAL SP SP RATE EUHRUP EUHRDN EUHRUP2 EUHRDN2 E PROG STRTSEG ENDSEG RAMPUNIT RECYCLES SOAK PRoc END STATE SEGxRAMP SEGx SP 1 to 12 Program concludes after segment 12 or Ed LE ul ACCUTUNE 2 AccuruwE ACCUTUN2 SP CH
265. ours 2 minutes For Maintenance Counters for output relays 1 and 2 the setpoint value is in thousands of counts 1 1000 counts This prompt does not appear for Alarm on Manual type alarm For example A1S1TYPE MANUAL A1S2 VAL Value in engineering units ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 VALUE This is the value at which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt A1S2TYPE to actuate The details are the same as A1S1 VAL 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 135 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection A2S1 VAL Value in engineering units ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 VALUE This is the value at which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt A2S1TYPE to actuate The details are the same as A1S1 VAL A2S2 VAL Value in engineering units ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 VALUE This is the value at which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt A2S2TYPE to actuate The details are the same as A1S1 VAL When the associated type is configured for Alarm on Totalizer Value the Alarm SP value represents the four lowest digits for the selected Totalizer Scale Factor When the Totalizer value exceeds the Alarm SP the alarm is activated The range is 0 to 9999 x Totalizer Scale Factor A1S1TYPE NONE INP 1 INP 2 INP 3 PV DEV OUTPUT SHED EV ON EV OFF MANUAL REM SP F SAFE PVRATE PV 2 DEV 2 OUT 2 MAN 2 RSP 2 F SAF2 PVRAT2 BREAK BREAK2 TOTAL
266. p Set Up group contains the Function parameters that let you configure a single setpoint ramp to occur between the current local setpoint and a final setpoint over a time interval SP RAMP The Setpoint Ramp Set Up group also contains the function parameters that let you configure a specific rate of change for any Local Setpoint change SP RATE It includes selections for Rate Up and Rate Down Table 3 5 lists all the function prompts in the SP Ramp Set Up group Table 3 5 SP Ramp Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer aaa ta Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display If SP Rate and SP Programming are disabled SP RAMP Single Setpoint Ramp DISABL DISABL Section Selection ENABLE 4 4 ENABL2 ENAB12 TIME MIN Single Setpoint Ramp Time 0 to 255 minutes 3 SP ramp enabled FINAL SP Single Setpoint Final Enter a value within the setpoint limits 1000 Setpoint SP ramp enabled If SP Ramp and SP Programming are disabled SP RATE Setpoint Rate DISABL DISABL ENABLE ENABL2 ENAB12 EU HR UP Rate Up Value for 0 to 9999 0 Loop 1 SP Rate enabled in engineering units per hour EU HR DN Rate Down Value for 0 to 9999 0 Loop 1 SP Rate enabled in engineering units per hour EU HRUP2 Rate Up Value for 0 to 9999 0 Loop 2 SP Rate enabled in Units per Hour EU HRDN2 Rate Down Value for 0 to 9999 0 Loop 2 SP Rate enabled in Units per Hour If SP
267. put Status and the Current Duplex functionality Table 4 6 lists all the function prompts in the Output Algorithm Set Up group and their definitions Table 4 6 Output Algorithm Group Definitions Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition OUT ALG TIME CURRNT POSITN TIME D The OUTPUT ALGORITHM lets you select the type of output you want Not applicable with Control algorithm prompt 3PSTEP Selections are hardware dependent For example if the controller does not have a current output then none of the prompts for Output Algorithms that need a current output will appear Likewise if the controller does not have a relay output then none of the prompts that need a relay output will appear ATTENTION For all Duplex Output forms PID heat parameters apply for controller output greater than 5096 PID cool parameters apply for controller output less than 50 TIME SIMPLEX This output algorithm uses Digital Output 1 for Time Proportional Control The output is updated per the Loop sampling rate selection Time Proportional Output has a resolution of 4 44 msec Cycle Time is adjustable from 1 to 120 seconds CURRENT SIMPLEX Type of output using one 4 to 20 mA signal that can be fed into a positive or negative grounded load of 0 to 1000 ohms The signal can be recalibrated for any desired range from 4 to 20 mA for 0 to 100 output POSITION PROPORTION
268. r Loop 2 INP 1 INPUT 1 INP 2 INPUT 2 IN AL1 INPUT ALGORITHM 1 IN AL2 INPUT ALGORITHM 2 INP 3 INPUT 3 FORCE MA FORCE MANUAL AUTO links Auto Manual modes If either loop changes mode due to a front panel change digital input action or failsafe action the other loop tracks that mode DISABL DISABL Disables FORCE MA LINK12 LINK12 Links modes for both loops PID SETS NUMBER OF TUNING PARAMETER SETS This selection lets you choose one or two sets of tuning constants gain rate and reset 1 ONLY ONE SET ONLY Only one set of tuning parameters is available Configure the values for Gain proportional band Rate Reset Time Cycle Time if time proportional is used 2KEYBD TWO SETS KEYBOARD SELECTABLE Two sets of tuning parameters can be configured and can be selected at the operator interface or by using the Digital Inputs Press LOWER DISPLAY key until you see PID SET3 or PID SETA to switch between sets Configure the values for Gain 8 Rate 3 Reset 3 Cycle 3 Time Gain 4 Rate 4 Reset 4 Cycle 4 Time See Subsection 5 10 for procedure 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 121 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition PID SETS continued 2PV SW 25 SW GAIN S TWO SETS PV AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER When the process variable is GREATER than the value set at prompt SW VALUE Switchover Value the controller will use Gain 3
269. riable INP 1 INPUT 1 INP 2 INPUT 2 IN AL1 INPUT ALGORITHM 1 IN AL2 INPUT ALGORITHM 2 INP 3 INPUT 3 PID SETS NUMBER OF TUNING PARAMETER SETS This selection lets you choose one or two sets of tuning constants gain rate and reset 1 ONLY ONE SET ONLY Only one set of tuning parameters is available Configure the values for Gain proportional band Rate Reset Time and Cycle Time if time proportional is used 2KEYBD TWO SETS KEYBOARD SELECTABLE Two sets of tuning parameters can be configured and can be selected at the operator interface or by using the Digital Inputs Press LOWER DISPLAY key until you see PID SET1 or PID SET2 to switch between sets Configure the values for Gain Rate Reset Cycle Time Gain 2 Rate 2 Reset 2 Cycle 2 Time See Subsection 5 10 for procedures 2PV SW TWO SETS PV AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER When the process variable is GREATER than the value set at prompt SW VALUE Switchover Value the controller will use Gain Rate Reset and Cycle Time The active PID SET can be read in the lower display When the process variable is LESS than the value set at prompt SW VALUE the controller will use Gain 2 Rate 2 Reset 2 and Cycle 2 Time The active PID SET can be read in the lower display Other prompts affected SW VALUE 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 115 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection PID SETS 2SP SW TWO SETS SP AU
270. rical shock This symbol warns the user of a potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms 42 4 Vpeak or 60 Vdc may be accessible Failure to comply with these instructions could result in death or serious injury ATTENTION Electrostatic Discharge ESD hazards Observe precautions for handling electrostatic sensitive devices Protective Earth PE terminal Provided for connection of the protective earth green or green yellow supply system conductor Functional earth terminal Used for non safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement NOTE This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements Earth Ground Functional earth connection NOTE This connection shall be bonded to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements Chassis Ground Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local electrical code requirements F DOD 9b iv UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Table of Contents SECTION 1 OVERVIEW 2 22 2 ccnsecesecesasetecscuestecctescecssstcescieectcecesnerseueceectecttcs 1 1 1 Introductio enero eee E e eds 1 1 2 Operator Int rface cei vei en ee dede nda 3 SECTION 2
271. ring units 5 A1S1TYPE Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type NONE INP 1 INP 2 INP 3 PV Loop 1 Process Variable DEV Loop 1 Deviation OUTPUT Loop 1 Output SHED Both Loops EV ON Event On SP Program EV OFF Event Off SP Program MANUAL Loop 1 REM SP Loop 1 Remote Setpoint F SAFE Loop 1 Failsafe PVRATE Loop 1 PV Rate of Change PV 2 Loop 2 Process Variable DEV 2 Loop 2 Deviation OUT 2 Loop 2 Output MAN 2 Loop 2 Manual RSP 2 Loop 2 Remote Setpoint F SAF2 Loop 2 Failsafe PVRAT2 Loop 2 PV Rate of Change BREAK BREAK2 TOTAL TIMER1 HealthWatch Maintenance Timer 1 2 HealthWatch Maintenance Timer 2 TIMERS HealthWatch Maintenance Timer 3 COUNT1 Counter 1 COUNT2 Counter 2 COUNT3 Counter 3 HealthWatch Maintenance HealthWatch Maintenance HealthWatch Maintenance Section 4 15 66 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer rower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display A1S2TYPE Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 Type Same as A1S1TYPE NONE A2S1TYPE Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 Type Same as A1S1TYPE NONE A2S2TYPE Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 Type Same as A1S1TYPE NONE A1S1 HL Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 State LOW HIGH Section HIGH 4 15 A1S1 EV SP Programming Event BEGIN Alarm State for Alarm 1 END Se
272. rm on various controller parameters There are two alarm output selections High and Low You can configure each setpoint to alarm either High or Low These are called single alarms You can also configure the two setpoints to alarm on the same event and to alarm both high and low A single adjustable Hysteresis of 0 to 100 is configurable for the alarm setpoint See Table 2 8 in the Installation section for Alarm relay contact information The prompts for the Alarm Outputs appear whether or not the alarm relays are physically present This allows the Alarm status to be shown on the display and or sent via communications to a host computer Table 4 14 lists all the function prompts in the Alarms Set Up group and their definitions Table 4 14 Alarms Group Definitions Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Parameter Range of Setting Definition or Selection A1S1 VAL Value in engineering units ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 VALUE This is the value at which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt A1S1TYPE to actuate The value depends on what the setpoint has been configured to represent NO setpoint is required for Communications SHED For SP Programming the value is the segment number for which the event applies For Maintenance Timers the setpoint value is HOURS TENTHS OF HOURS Example setpoint value 4 2 means 4 hours 12 minutes Be aware that the value of the Timer itself is displayed in HOURS MINUTES Example 4 2 means 4 h
273. roller according to your requirements Figure 2 4 Composite Wiring Diagram Digital Inputs Terminals See Figure 2 16 Outputs and Alarms Terminals AC Line Voltage Time Proportional Output Terminals See Figure 2 5 eM Current Output Universal Input 2 Terminals eS 9 Output See Figure 2 6 171 Seri See Figures 2 12 2 13 Two HLAI Terminals E LLL uL See Figure 2 7 109 e lt Position Proportional PELLI Output Input 1 oS See Figure 2 14 Terminals See Figure 2 6 FAI T For Control and Alarm Relay mie I Li Contact information See Tables 2 7 and 2 6 Transmitter Power for T Auxiliary Output 4 20 mA 2 wire shield ground Transmitters Do not use f Terminals o not use for Communications shield See Figure 2 15 Using Alarm 2 Output See Figure 2 19 Communications Terminals Using Auxiliary Output See Figures See Figure 2 20 2 17 2 18 24158 18 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Line voltage wiring This equipment is suitable for connection to 90 264 Vac or 24 Vac dc 50 60 Hz power supply mains It is the user s responsibility to provide a switch and non time delay North America quick acting high breaking capacity Type F Europe 1 2 A 250 V fuse s or circuit breaker for 90 264 V or 1 A 125 V fuse or circuit breaker for 24 Vac dc operation as part of the installation The switch or circuit breaker should be located c
274. rom 0001 to 4095 and enter it when the lockout level is configured as NONE Thereafter that selected number must be used to change the lockout level from something other than NONE NJ Write the number on the Configuration Record Sheet in the configuration section so you will have a permanent record Use the procedure in Table 5 3 to enter a security code Table 5 3 Procedure for Entering a Security Code Step Press Action 1 until you see SET UP Upper Display Lower Display TUNING 2 until you see FUNCTION Upper Display 2 Lower Display SEC URITY to enter a four digit number in the upper display 1 to 4095 This will be your security code 146 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 5 4 Monitoring Your Controller Operator interface The indicators and displays on the operator interface let you see what is happening to your process and how the controller is responding Figure 5 1 is a view of the operator interface A description of the displays and indicators is included Figure 5 1 Operator Interface Upper Display six characters Normal Operation four digits dedicated to display the process variable Configuration Mode displays parameter value or selection Lower Display eight characters Normal Operation displays operating parameters and values Configuration Mode displays function groups and parameters T Accutune in progre
275. rompts there are failure symptoms that can be identified by noting how the controller displays and indicators are reacting Symptoms Compare your symptoms with those shown in Table 9 7 and refer to the troubleshooting procedure indicated to correct the problem Table 9 7 Controller Failure Symptoms Upper Lower Indicators Controller Probable Trouble Display Display Output Cause shooting Procedure Blank Blank Off None Power Failure 1 OK OK Current 2 Proportional Output OK Displayed OK Controller Position 3 Output Output disagrees disagrees utput OK with Controller OK with Displayed Time Proportional 4 Output Output Output OK OK Current Time 5 Proportional Output OK OK OK External Alarm Malfunction in 6 function does alarm output not operate properly Display does not function when a key is pressed Keyboard 7 Malfunction Controller fails to go into Slave operation during communications Communications 8 Failure Other symptoms If a set of symptoms or prompts other than the one you started with appears while troubleshooting re evaluate the symptoms This may lead to a different troubleshooting procedure If the symptom still persists refer to the installation section in this manual to ensure proper installation and proper use of the controller in your system 246 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 9 7 Troubleshooting Procedures Intr
276. rter cycle times DO NOT use this setting unless cycle times of less than 1 second are required The Lockout selection must be set to NONE in order to view this selection 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 109 4 8 Input 1 Parameters Set Up Group Introduction Input 1 group prompts These are the parameters required for Input 1 actuation transmitter characterization high and low range values in engineering units ratio bias filter burnout and emissivity Table 4 7 lists all the function prompts in the Input 1 Set Up group and their definitions Table 4 7 Input 1 Group Definitions Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection IN1TYPE INPUT 1 ACTUATION TYPE This selection determines ATTENTION Changing what actuation you are going to use for Input 1 the input type will result DISABL DISABLE Disables Input in the loss of Field BTC B TC B Thermocouple Calibration values and ETCH E TC H E Thermocouple High will restore Factory ETCL E TC L E Thermocouple Low Calibration values J TCH J TC H J Thermocouple High JTCL J TC L J Thermocouple Low K TC H K TC H K Thermocouple High KTCL K TC L K Thermocouple Low NNM H H Ni Ni Moly Thermocouple High NNM L NNM L Ni Ni Moly Thermocouple Low NM90 H NM90 H NiMo NiCo Thermocouple High NM90 L NM90 L NiMo NiCo Thermocouple Low NIC TC NIC TC Nicrosil Nisil Thermocoup
277. s Normal Operation displays operating parameters and values Configuration Mode displays function groups and parameters T Accutune in progress t PV tune in progress L Loop 2 display l Cascade control C Computer setpoint active O Output override active R Run SP ramp program H Hold SP ramp program Indicator definition when lit F Fahrenheit being used MAN controller in manual mode MAN and A off C Centigrade being used A controller in automatic mode communications option active Indicator definition when lit ALM Alarm conditions exist DI Digital input active 3 LSP 3 active RSP Remote SP or SP2 active OUT Control relay 1 or 2 on Deviation Bargraph Center bar indicates PV is within 1 of setpoint Next bar will light if PV is between 1 but less than 2 in deviation If PV is equal to or greater than 10 deviation the center bar plus all ten deviation bars will light Keys See Table 1 1 ut Sepa Ban tel ME FEMA r 24157 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual Function of keys Table 1 1 shows each key on the operator interface and defines its function Table 1 1 Function of Keys Key Function SET UP Places the controller in the Configuration Set Up group select mode Sequentially displays Set Up groups and allows the FUNCTION key to display individual functions in each Set Up group
278. s 999 to 9999 floating in engineering 0 000 units 8SEG CH1 Eight Segment Characterizer DISABL DISABL If Characterizer 1 is INPUT1 enabled the following Xn INPUT2 VALUE and Yn VALUE L1 OUT parameters appear L2 OUT X0 VALUE Xn Input Value X Axis 0 to 99 99 0 X1 VALUE R X2 VALUE n 0 through 8 X3 VALUE X4 VALUE X5 VALUE X6 VALUE X7 VALUE X8 VALUE YO VALUE Yn Output Value Y Axis 0 to 99 99 0 Y1VALUE Y2VALUE n 0 through 8 Y3VALUE Y4VALUE Y5VALUE Y6VALUE Y7VALUE Y8 VALUE 8SEG CH2 Eight Segment Characterizer DISABL DISABL 2 INPUT1 If Characterizer 2 is INPUT2 enabled the following Xn L1 OUT VALU2 and Yn VALU2 L2 OUT parameters appear 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 53 Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Lower Display Name Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display X0 VALU2 Xn Input Value X Axis 0 to 99 99 0 X1 VALU2 B X2 VALU2 n 0 through 8 X3 VALU2 X4 VALU2 X5 VALU2 X6 VALU2 X7 VALU2 X8 VALU2 YO VALU2 Yn Output Value Y Axis 0 to 99 99 0 Y1 VALU2 _ Y2 VALU2 n 0 through 8 Y3 VALU2 Y4 VALU2 Y5 VALU2 Y6 VALU2 Y7 VALU2 Y8 VALU2 TOTALIZE Totalization Function DISABL DISABL INPUT1 IN AL 1 IN AL2 Current Scale Factor Y En m upper display Actual Current Totalized Where Value lower display n Totalizer Scale Factor Value TOT SCAL Totalizer Scale Factor EO EO E1 E2 4
279. s affected DEADBAND PIDLOOPS 1 LOOP 2LOOPS CASCAD Only available on Expanded Model DC330E PID LOOPS This is the PID loop selection 1 LOOP Select to use one loop of control 2 LOOPS Select to use two PID loops of control each with two sets of tuning parameters and a set of control parameters CASCADE Select for Cascade Control In a cascade control system the output of one PID loop is used to adjust the setpoint of the second control loop and the second loop s output actually adjusts the final control element ATTENTION To enable a cascade loop hold in the SETPOINT SELECT key until the RSP Annunciator lights and an T appears as the upper display s leftmost character to indicate Cascade mode Pressing the key again disables the Cascade Loop and the annunciators turn off CONT2ALG The CONTROL 2 ALGORITHM lets you select the type of control for Loop 2 that is best for your process Only available if the controller is configured for Cascade or 2 Loop control 3PStep and On Off are not available for the second control loop 92 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition PIDA ATTENTION PID A should not be used for Proportional only action i e no integral reset action Instead use PD MR with rate set to 0 PID B PD MR PID A is normally used
280. s configured for Event On Off ALARM 1 SEGMENT EVENT 1 Select whether you want the alarm type chosen in prompt A1S1TYPE to alarm the beginning or end of a segment in setpoint Ramp Soak programming BEGINNING OF SEGMENT END OF SEGMENT ATTENTION Alarms configured for events will not operate on Setpoint Program segments of zero length A1S2HL A1S2 EV HIGH LOW BEGIN END ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 STATE Same as 151 ALARM 1 SEGMENT EVENT 2 Same as 151 EV A2S1 HL A2S1 EV HIGH LOW BEGIN END ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 STATE Same as 151 ALARM 2 SEGMENT EVENT 1 Same as 151 EV 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 137 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection A2S2HL HIGH ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 STATE Same as A1S1 HL LOW A2S2 EV BEGIN ALARM 2 SEGMENT EVENT 2 Same as A1S1 EV END AL HYST 0 0 to 100 0 of span or full ALARM HYSTERESIS A single adjustable hysteresis is output as appropriate provided on alarms such that when the alarm is OFF it activates at exactly the alarm setpoint when the alarm is ON it will not deactivate until the variable is 0 0 to 100 away from the alarm setpoint Configure the hysteresis of the alarms based on INPUT signals as a of input range span Configure the hysteresis of the alarm based on OUTPUT signals as a of the full scale output range ALM OUT1 LATCHI
281. s function When proportional control is used a different set of PID tuning constants is used for the dilution air than those used for the enriching gas Direct calculation of carbon percentage with seven different manufacturers probes Advanced Atmosphere Control Corporation AACC Corning Cambridge Instruments Marathon Monitors Furnace Control Corporation MacDhui Barber Colman Bricesco 0 02 accuracy No nomographs no mistakes Two controller outputs are available for duplex control Probe temperature input type is selectable from complete input menu Three different local setpoints standard feature Duplex control with second set of PID constants for dilution air control Process factor adjustment capability Automatic sooting warning via flashing display New Dewpoint algorithm is available Range 50 F to 100 F New Oxygen algorithm is available Range 0 to 40 Figure 5 6 is a diagram illustrating the application of the UDC 3300 for carbon potential control 198 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Figure 5 6 Carbon Potential Control Sensor Carburizing Input 3 Furnace Optional Online CO Compensation UDC 3300 24185 ATTENTION For Carbon control set Input Algorithm 1 to the proper carbon sensor used and set the PV source to IN AL 1 Input 1 will automatically become CARBON For Oxygen control set Input Algorithm
282. s otherwise noted TO RUN R indicator blinks Starts a stopped SP Program Reopening contact puts the controller in Hold mode This selection applies to either loop ToBEGN Resets the Setpoint Program back to the beginning of the first segment in the program and places the program into the Hold mode Reopening the contact has no effect This selection applies to either loop STOP Disables PID Integral 1 action MAN FS MAN blinks Unit goes to manual mode output goes to the failsafe value This will cause a bump in the output when switching from AUTO to MANUAL The switch back from MANUAL to AUTO is bumpless ToLOCK LOCKED when a key is Disables all keys pressed ToAout Output is forced to value set at control prompt AUTO OUT when controller is in automatic mode Reopening contact returns the controller to the normal output This selection is only available on Loop 1 TIMER Starts timer momentary Reopening switch has no effect Timer clock 0 time appear lower display AM STA Causes switch to Auto Manual Station mode Refer to Figure 5 5 in Section 5 19 for auto manual station information This selection is only available on Loop 1 ToTUNE TUNE ON in lower Starts the Accutune process Opening the switch has no effect display SPinit Forces the SP to initialize at the current PV value TRACK1 O blinks Allows Output 1 to track Input 2 TRACK2 O blinks Allows Output 2 to track Input 2 ToOUT2 O blinks Allows Output
283. s tests the reason for their failure and how to correct the failure have been changed due to the change in input type Table 9 5 Status Tests Test Definition Upper Reason for Failure How to Correct the Failure Lower Display Display FAILSAFE Failsafe Fault NO No Failure FAILSF2 YES Burnout configured for none 1 Step through the rest of the STATUS Loop 2 and input fails check to identify the particular failure RAM TEST failed CONFTEST failed Also see Table 9 6 Background tests CALTEST failed RAM TEST RAM test run at PASS No Failure RAM test passed power up 4 FAIL RAM Failure 1 Power cycle to see if the error clears CONF Configuration PASS No Failure Configuration checksum passed TEST Checksum 7 ME FAIL Configuration data is in 1 Step through STATUS tests the error controller will recalculate the checksum 2 Check all configuration prompts for accuracy See Section 3 Configuration CAL TEST Working PASS No Failure Working calibration checksum passed Calibration FAIL The working calibration 1 If the controller has not been field constants in the controller calibrated see Section 3 are in error Configuration and change the input to a different type Enter it loop through the status tests then return the input type to the original one 2 If the controller has been field calibrated recalibrate the controller FACT CRC Factory PASS No Failure
284. setpoint will ramp at the same rate as prior to local setpoint changes and will stop if the final setpoint is reached before time expires If the time expires before the final setpoint is reached it will jump to the final setpoint End the Ramp When the final setpoint is reached the R changes to in the upper display and the controller operates at the new setpoint ATTENTION Any time the local setpoint is different from the final setpoint value and the RUN HOLD key is pressed the ramp will start again Disable the setpoint ramp function SET UP until you see Upper Display Lower Display SP RAMP FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 You will see Upper Display DISABL Disables SP Ramp Lower Display ENABLE Enables SP Ramp for Loop 1 ENABL2 Eenables SP Ramp for Loop 2 SP RAMP ENAB12 Enabies Sp Ramp tor Loops 1 and 2 until you see Upper Display DISABL Lower Display SP RAMP Return to normal operating mode LOWER DISPLAY 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 163 5 10 Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants Introduction You can use two sets of tuning constants for single output types and 2 loop or cascade control and choose the way they are to be switched Does not apply for Duplex control The sets can be keyboard selected automatically switched when a predetermined process variable value is reached automatically switched
285. splay function DISABL bisables SP Ramp ower Display ENABLE Enables SP Ramp for Loop 1 NABL2 Enables SP Ramp for Loop 2 12 Sp Ramp for Loops 1 and 2 3 Enable Setpoint A to enable the setpoint ramp function Choose Ramp the loop s on which you want the ramp to operate ATTENTION You cannot change the current local setpoint if the setpoint ramp function is enabled Make sure SP RATE is disabled 4 Set the Ramp Function Until you see Time L1 L2 Upper Display The ramp time in minutes Lower Display TIME MIN A to change the upper display value to the or number of minutes in which you want the wv final setpoint to be reached Setting Range 1 to 255 minutes ATTENTION entering will imply an immediate step change to the final SP 160 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Step Operation Press Action 5 Set the Final EUNGHON Upper Display Setpoint value 11 2 The final Setpoint value Lower Display A to change the upper display value to the desired final setpoint value Setting Range within the setpoint limits 6 Exit CONES To exit configuration Configuration DISPLAY 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 161 Running the setpoint Running a Setpoint Ramp includes starting holding viewing the ramp ramp time ending the ramp and disabling it Procedure Table 5 15 lists the pro
286. ss t PV tune in progress L Loop 2 display l Cascade control C Computer setpoint active O Output override active R Run SP ramp program H Hold SP ramp program Indicator definition when lit F Fahrenheit being used MAN controller in manual mode MAN and A off C Centigrade being used A controller in automatic mode communications option active Indicator definition when lit ALM Alarm conditions exist DI Digital input active 3 LSP active RSP Remote SP or SP2 active OUT Control relay 1 or 2 on Deviation Bargraph Center bar indicates PV is within 1 of setpoint Next bar will light if PV is between 1 but less than 2 in deviation I PV is equal to or greater than 10 deviation the center bar plus all ten deviation bars will light Keys See Table 1 1 De leet hee P Pe e ied e ties Mad bat Manly aie fee um 24157 Decimal point position each display when decimal place is configured the right most character is blank When a single decimal position has been configured and values greater than 1000 are displayed the right most character is blank but the decimal point will be lit 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 147 Annunciators The following annunciator functions have been provided A visual indication of each alarm ALM 12 Blinking 1 indicates alarm latched and needs to be acknowle
287. ssssseeeee eee 57 Inp t 9 Group FUNCION si error t tits eet de e temen Adie 58 Control Group Function 59 Control 2 Group Function 61 Options Group Function Prompts enne nennen 63 Communications Group Function Prompts sse 64 Alarms Group Function enne 66 Display Group Function Prompts sse enne 68 Maintenance Group Function 70 Tuning Group Prompt Definitions 78 Loop 2 Tuning Group 82 Setpoint Ramp Rate Group 2 2 44400 83 Accutune Group Definitions sessi enn 86 Algorithm Group Definitions sssssssseseseeeeeeee enne nennen 90 Output Algorithm Group 107 Inp t i Group 110 Input 2 Group Definitions sssssssesssseeeeee ener enne 113 Input 3 Group Definitions essssssssssesesseeeenennnne ener enne 114 Control Group Definitions sisri iin iii iii iaie entente nnne nnne 115 Control 2 Group 121 Options Group Definitions s
288. sssssssssssssseseseeeen enne enne nnne nene 126 Communications Group Definitions 131 amp amp an aa nnne nnne nens 134 Display Group 138 Maintenance Group Definitions essen 140 Power Up Diagnostic Tests 144 Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys 145 Procedure for Entering a Security 146 Lower Display Key 149 Error Messages iei ata Rai bie Ai a eles qe 150 Procedure for Starting Up the 2 2 151 Operating Mode 222 nennen ener 152 Changing Operating Modes ssssssssssssseeeseeeennnnren nennen nennen nnne nene 153 Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual 154 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual ix Table 5 10 Table 5 11 Table 5 12 Table 5 13 Table 5 14 Table 5 15 Table 5 16 Table 5 17 Table 5 18 Table 5 19 Table 5 20 Table 5 21 Table 5 22 Table 5 23 Table 5 24 Table 5 25 Table 5 26 Table 5 27 Table 5 28 Table 5 29 Table 5 30 Table 5 31 Table 5 32 Table 5 33 Table 5 34 Table 5 35 Table 5 36 Table 5 37 Table 5 38 Table 5 39 Table 6 1 Table 6 2 Table 6 3 Table 6 4 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4
289. st failures Troubleshooting When power is applied the controller will run three diagnostic tests All the displays will light and then the controller will go into automatic mode Table 5 1 lists the three diagnostic tests Table 5 1 Power Up Diagnostic Tests Prompt on Lower Display Condition RAM TEST Check RAM CONFTEST Check Non volatile Memory CAL TEST Check Calibration If one or more of these tests fail the controller will go to the Fail safe Manual Mode and FAILSAFE will flash in the lower display If the output type is Position Proportional and AUTO CAL has never been done a prompt CAL will appear suggesting that the controller be calibrated Refer to STATUS TESTS in Section 9 Troubleshooting to identify and correct the problem 144 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Check the displays and Use the procedure in Table 5 2 to run the display and key test keys Table 5 2 Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys Press Result The controller will run a display test All the displays will SETUR light for 8 seconds then the displays will look like this and hold in Upper Display FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 Lower Display at the same time Press each key to see if it When the key is pressed the lower display will indicate the works name of the key pressed Key Pressed Lower Display FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 FUNCTION
290. st the Output to a value above 5096 and at least 596 lower than the normal heating setpoint value Let the PV stabilize Press the MANUAL AUTO key to start tuning for Heat zone The controller will switch to automatic mode and the process will start to move toward the setpoint and will line out with the proper Heat tuning constants A large T appears on the left side of the upper display to indicate that SP tuning is in progress When the T disappears tuning is completed and final values are entered for PID set 1 parameters in the Tuning group Cool Zone Adjust the Output to a value below 5096 and at least 596 above the normal cooling setpoint value Let the PV stabilize Press the MANUAL AUTO key to start tuning for Cool zone The controller will switch to automatic mode and the process will start to move toward the setpoint and will line out with the proper Cool tuning constants A large T appears on the left side of the upper display to indicate that SP tuning is in progress When the T disappears tuning is completed and final values are entered for PID set 2 parameters in the Tuning group SP tuning after start up SP tuning will occur whenever the controller is in automatic mode and a setpoint change occurs which is greater than the previously configured minimum setpoint change value Aborting SP tuning The controller will delay using any setpoint changes for 30 seconds to enable it to ca
291. start up mode to be used when no knowledge of the process tuning values is available In the Start up mode and after enabling ACCUTUNE the operator simply lines out the process variable in manual mode selects the desired SP value and switches to automatic mode DEMAND TUNING PLUS PV ADAPTIVE TUNE This selection provides TUNE On Demand tuning plus PV Adaptive tuning whenever a PV process disturbance of 0 3 span or greater occurs It will take 1 1 2 process cycles around setpoint before any process recognition and re tuning can occur due to PV disturbances SETPOINT TUNING PLUS PV ADAPTIVE TUNE This selection tunes on setpoint changes but also whenever a PV process disturbance of 0 3 span or greater occurs It will take 1 1 2 process cycles around setpoint before any process recognition and re tuning can occur due to PV disturbances ACCUTUN2 DISABL TUNE SP TUN PV SP PV ACCUTUNE for Loop 2 Available only if configured for 2 Loop or Cascade control DISABLE ACCUTUNE Disables the Accutune function for Loop 2 DEMAND TUNING Same as ACCUTUNE SETPOINT TUNING Same as ACCUTUNE DEMAND TUNING PLUS PV ADAPTIVE TUNE Same as ACCUTUNE SETPOINT TUNING PLUS PV ADAPTIVE TUNE Same as ACCUTUNE SP CHANG 5 to 15 SETPOINT CHANGE LOOP 1 The minimum setpoint change on Loop 1 that will result in re tuning must be configured between 5 and 15 i e If the range is 0 to 2400 and 5
292. stor across Input 1 terminals 25 R and 27 or Input 2 terminals 22 R and 24 See Figure 7 3 4 Subtract the millivolt value for 77 F 25 C from the zero and span value for your range see Table 7 1 for zero and span values and use the adjusted value when calibrating Figure 7 3 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Precision Resistor Input 2 Copper Leads Precision 500 Ohm Resistor Millivolt Source 9 Caution The accuracy of the controller is directly affected by the accuracy of this resistor Ata minimum use a 0 1 25ppm resistor 24175 218 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 RTD inputs Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of Input 1 or 2 See Figure 7 4 Figure 7 4 Wiring Connections for RTD r Input 2 Input 1 Decade Resistance Box Copper Leads equal length 24176 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 219 Radiamatic millivolts Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of or volts except 01010 Input 1 2 or 3 See Figure 7 5 volts inputs Figure 7 5 Wiring Connections for Radiamatic Millivolts or Volts except 0 to 10 Volts Input 3 0 5 1 5r volts only 1 Millivolt Volt Source 24177 Copper Leads Terminals for Input 3 are
293. t Two local setpoints One local setpoint and one remote setpoint Three local setpoints Two local setpoints and one remote setpoint To scroll through the setpoint type menu press and hold in the SETPOINT SELECT key Release when the desired setpoint selection is displayed KEY ERROR will appear in the lower display if You choose either local setpoint 2 or 3 or remote setpoint and your choice has not been configured as the setpoint source You attempt to change the setpoint while a setpoint ramp is enabled Setpoint ramp rate will apply if enabled Use the procedure in Table 5 10 to select a local setpoint source Table 5 10 Procedure for Selecting the Local Setpoint Source Step Operation Press Action 1 Enter Set Up until the displays read LOWER 3 mode DISPLAY Upper Display Upper Display Lower Display Lower Display forLoop1 2 2 Display Local Until the displays read Setpoint Source LOOP 1 2 Upper Display selections Setpoint source selections 1 ONLY Lower Display TWO THREE 3 Select the A to select the desired setpoint source in the desired source v upper display 4 Return to control The controller will assume normal control LOWER DISPLAY 156 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Changing local setpoint Use the procedure in Table 5 11 to change any of the local setpoint 1 2 or 3 values After changing
294. t SP to determine the sign of the error ERROR PV SP The ON OFF algorithm operates on the sign of the error signal In Direct Acting Control when the error signal is positive the output is 100 and when the error signal is negative the output is 0 If the control action is reverse the opposite is true An adjustable overlap Hysteresis Band is provided between the on and off states Other prompts affected OUT HYST DUPLEX ON OFF is an extension of this algorithm when the output is configured for Duplex It allows the operation of a second ON OFF output There is a deadband between the operating ranges of the two inputs and an adjustable overlap hysteresis of the on and off states of each output Both Deadband and Hysteresis are separately adjustable With no relay action the controller will read 5096 Other prompts affected OUT HYST and DEADBAND 90 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition CONT ALG PIDA ATTENTION PID A should not be used for Proportional only action i e no integral reset action Instead use PD MR with rate set to 0 PID B PD MR PID A is normally used for three mode control This means that the output can be adjusted somewhere between 100 and 0 It applies all three control actions Proportional P Integral I and Derivative D to the err
295. t be 100 ohm RTD inputs ATTENTION The Relative Humidity selection will automatically force both Analog Input actuations to the 100 ohm low setting The controller will indicate measured Relative Humidity as a Process Variable PV with a setpoint range of 0 to 100 RH SUMMER PV Input A x Ratio A Bias SUMMER WITH RATIO AND BIAS The following formula applies A Input B x Ratio B Bias B Input C x Ratio C Bias C HI SEL INPUT HIGH SELECT WITH RATIO AND BIAS This selection specifies the PV or SP as the higher of Input 1 or Input 2 The following formula applies PV higher of Input A x Ratio A Bias A or Input B x Ratio B Bias B LO SEL PV lower of Input INPUT LOW SELECT WITH RATIO AND BIAS This selection specifies the PV or SP as the lower of Input 1 or Input 2 The following formula applies A x Ratio A Bias A or Input B x Ratio B Bias B MuDIV note 2 Input A x Ratio A Bias A x Input C x Ratio C Bias C MULTIPLIER DIVIDER WITH SQUARE ROOT The following formula applies x Calc Hi Calc Lo Input B x Ratio B Bias B See Figure 4 1 at the end of this section for an example of Mass Flow Compensation using Multiplier Divider Algorithm MULT note 2 MULTIPLIER WITH SQUARE ROOT The following formula applies Ratio A Bias A x Input C x Ratio C Bias C x Input B x Ratio B Bias B x Calc Hi Calc Lo M
296. t is checked for 136 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition minimum and maximum limits When this occurs a timer begins and if the output has not caused the PV to be corrected by a pre determined amount and time the alarm activates For loop break alarms the timer value may be changed only for loops configured for On Off control A1S2TYPE Same as A1S1 TYPE ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 TYPE Select what you want Setpoint 2 of Alarm 1 to represent The selections are the same as A1S1TYPE A2S1TYPE Same as A1S1 TYPE ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 TYPE Select what you want Setpoint 1 of Alarm 2 to represent The selections are the same as A1S1TYPE ATTENTION Not applicable with Relay Duplex or Position Proportional outputs A2S2TYPE Same as A1S1 TYPE ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 TYPE Select what you want Setpoint 2 of Alarm 2 to represent The selections are the same as A1S1TYPE ATTENTION Not applicable with Relay Duplex or Position Proportional outputs A1S1HL A1S1 EV HIGH LOW BEGIN END If Setpoint Programming is disabled or if the Alarm Type is not configured for Event On Off ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 STATE Select whether you want the alarm type chosen in prompt A1S1TYPE to alarm High or Low HIGH ALARM LOW ALARM If Setpoint Programming is enabled and if the Alarm Type i
297. t will cycle between 0 and 50 or low output limit A large T appears in the upper display until tuning is completed and final Cool parameters are entered for PID set 2 in the Tuning group SP tuning will continually adjust the Gain or Proportional Band P Reset D and Rate D tuning constants in response to setpoint changes SP tuning is not available on Basic Model DC330B SP tuning handles all Local and Computer setpoint changes It uses time domain analysis and the rule based expert system techniques to identify the two most dominant process lags plus any dead time It then automatically readjusts the PID parameters as necessary It does this while controlling to setpoint in automatic closed loop control mode These calculated PID values can be changed if desired whenever the tuning is not active Tuning can be aborted by pushing the MANUAL AUTO key to return to the manual mode Two criteria are available Normal and Fast through configuration During start up or whenever the setpoint changes beyond the SP Change value SP tuning employs time domain analysis to tune the process at any desired setpoint without any prior initialization or process knowledge 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 193 Using SP tuning at After SP or PV PV has been enabled use the procedure in Table 5 37 to Start up use SP tuning at start up Table 5 37 Procedure for Using SP Tuning at Start up Step Action
298. ter than ending segment Background 9 6 SOOTING Percent Carbon falls outside sooting boundary Background 9 6 SW FAIL Position Proportional slidewire input failure Background 9 6 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 239 Controller failure symptoms Check Installation Customer support Determining the software version Other failures may occur that deal with the Power Output or Alarms Refer to the controller failure symptom in Table 9 7 to determine what is wrong and the troubleshooting procedures to use to correct the problem If a set of symptoms still persists refer to Section 2 Installation and ensure proper installation and proper use of the controller in the system If you cannot solve the problem using the troubleshooting procedures listed in this section you can get technical assistance by dialing 1 800 423 9883 USA and Canada An engineer will discuss your problem with you Please have your complete model number serial number and Software version available The model and serial numbers can be found on the chassis nameplate The software version can be viewed under Setup Group Status See Table 9 2 If it is determined that a hardware problem exists a replacement controller or part will be shipped with instructions for returning the defective unit Do not return your controller without authorization from Honeywell s Technical Assistance Center or until the replacement has been received For a list
299. tered from the keyboard TWO LOCAL SETPOINTS This selection lets you switch between two local setpoints using the SETPOINT SELECT key THREE LOCAL SETPOINTS This selection lets you switch between three local setpoints using the SETPOINT SELECT key LSP 3 is mutually exclusive with RSP or Internal Cascade 122 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition RSP SRC NONE INP 2 IN AL1 IN AL2 INP 3 REMOTE SETPOINT SOURCE This selection determines what your remote setpoint source will be when toggled by the SETPOINT SELECT and RUN HOLD keys or Digital Input NONE No remote setpoint INPUT 2 Remote Setpoint is Input 2 INPUT ALGORITHM 1 Remote Setpoint using Input 1 algorithm INPUT ALGORITHM 2 Remote Setpoint using Input 2 algorithm INP 3 Remote Setpoint is Input 3 ATTENTION To cycle through the available local setpoints and remote setpoint press and hold in the SETPOINT SELECT key When the key is released the setpoint selection currently displayed will be the new setpoint selection AUTOBIAS ENABLE DISABL AUTO BIAS is used for bumpless transfer when transferring from local setpoint to remote setpoint Auto Bias calculates and adds a bias to the remote setpoint input each time a transfer is made Available for any analog input RSP source and if no trac
300. tes properly depending the controller in manual mode Vary on what you have set at prompt the input to raise and lower the PV AxSxTYPE around the setpoint Listen for a click M from the relay as the PV moves in If it does check the field wiring either direction and note that the proper ALM1 or ALM2 is lit EXAMPLE If the alarm is set for MANUAL put the controller into manual mode The alarm light is ON Put the controller into automatic mode and the alarm light is OFF 3 Check the field wiring Make sure the NO or NC contact wiring is correct on the alarm output terminals Refer to Section 2 Installation for details 4 Change MCU Output board Refer to Table 9 23 252 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Procedure 7 Table 9 14 explains how to troubleshoot a Keyboard failure Table 9 14 Troubleshooting a Keyboard Failure Step What to do How to do it 1 Make sure the keyboard is Withdraw the chassis from the case connected properly to the MCU output and power input boards and visually inspect the connection Controller Keyboard or specific keys may be LOCKED OUT via the security code Use your four digit security code number to change the lockout level Refer to Section 3 Configuration ATTENTION Using 1000 asa security code number will override the 4 digit code previously entered Run the keyboard test Press the SET UP key and hold in then pr
301. this method An alternate approach is to rely on a tuning technique In practice tuning techniques usually do not give exactly the type of response desired thus some final adjustments to the tuning parameters must be made However you should at least obtain a reasonable starting point from which the desired response characteristics can be obtained There are three procedures for tuning the controller Time Position or Current Proportional simplex control Duplex Time or Current Proportional control Two sets of tuning constants for single output operation The suggested procedures describe how to establish and store values of Gain PB Rate and Reset time constants for your process You must know the type of control and algorithm your controller has A graphic recorder such as Honeywell model DPR DR4500 or VP131 connected to the process variable will make it easier to determine when the oscillations are constant and also the time for one oscillation If a recorder is not available you can use a stop watch to time the oscillation of the process variable displayed on the controller 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 267 11 2 Time Position or Current Proportional Simplex Control Procedure The procedure listed in Table 11 1 gives you the steps for manually tuning a controller with Time Position or Current proportional simplex control Table 11 1 Manual Tuning Procedure for Simplex Control Step
302. tion PLUS SETPOINT 1 Contact closure puts the controller into setpoint 1 130 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Input 1 Combinations Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection RUN Any Digital Input Selection PLUS RUN SETPOINT PROGRAM RAMP Contact closure starts SP Program Ramp if enabled DIG IN 2 Same selections as for DIGITAL INPUT 2 SELECTIONS Digital Input 1 DIG2 COM Same selections as Digital DIGITAL INPUT 2 COMBINATIONS For the Output Tracking selections when the switch is open the output is in accordance with its pre defined functionality When the switch is closed the output value in percent will track the Input 2 percent of range value When the switch is reopened the output will start at this last output value and normal PID action will then take over control The transfer is bumpless NOTE 1 Does not apply to Three Position Step Control 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 131 4 14 Communications Set Up Group Introduction Communications group prompts This option allows the controller to be connected to a host computer via RS 422 485 or Modbus protocol The controller looks for messages from the computer at regular intervals If these messages are not received within the configured shed time the controller will SHED from the communications link and return to stand alone operation
303. tion the motor will be in when powered up or in the failsafe position LAST OUTPUT At power up in automatic mode the motor position will be the last one prior to power down When the unit goes into FAILSAFE it will stay in automatic mode motor will not be driven to the configured failsafe position FAILSAFE OUTPUT At power up in manual mode the motor will be driven to either the 096 or 10096 output position whichever is selected at prompt FAILSAFE For Burnout None when the unit goes into FAILSAFE it will go to manual mode motor will be driven to the configured failsafe position 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 117 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection SP HiLIM 0 to 100 of PV span in SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT This selection prevents the engineering units local and remote setpoints from going above the value selected here The setting must be equal or less than the upper range of the inputs SP LoLIM 0 to 100 of PV span in SET POINT LOW LIMIT This selection prevents the engineering units local and remote setpoints from going below the value selected here The setting must be equal or greater than the lower range of the inputs ACTION CONTROL OUTPUT DIRECTION Select direct or DIRECT REVRSE reverse acting DIRECT ACTING CONTROL The controller s output increases as the process variable increases REVERSE ACTING CONTROL
304. to 20 00 1 000 floats to 3 decimal places BIAS IN1 Input 1 Bias 999 to 9999 0 in engineering units FILTER 1 Input 1 Filter 0 to 120 seconds 0 BURNOUT1 Burnout Protection NONE NONE UP DOWN NO FS EMISSIV1 Emissivity 0 01 to 1 00 0 00 56 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 13 Introduction Function prompts Input 2 Parameters Set Up Group This data deals with various parameters required to configure Input 2 Table 3 10 lists all the function prompts in the Input 2 Set Up group Table 3 10 Input 2 Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Function Selections or Factory Refer Range of Setting Setting to Upper Display IN2 TYPE Input 2 Actuation Type DISABL NM90 L 500 PT 0 10mV Section BTC NIC TC RAD RH 4 9 ETCH RTC RAD RI ETCL S TC 0 20mA JTCH TTCH 4 20mA JTCL TTCL 0 10mV K TC H WTC H 0 50mV KTCL WTCL 0 5 V NNM H 100 PT 1 5 V NNM L 100 LO 0 10 V NM90 H 200 PT SLIDEW XMITTER2 Transmitter Characterization B TC STC LINEAR ETCH TTCH ETCL TTCL J TC H W TCH JTCL WTCL K TC H 100 PT KTCL 100LO NNM H 200 PT NNML 500 PT NM90 H RAD RH NM90 L RAD RI NIC TC LINEAR R TC SQROOT IN2 HI Input 2 High Range Value 999 to 9999 floating 1000 Linear Inputs only in engineering units IN2 LO Input 2 Low Range Value 999 to 9999 floating 0 Linear Inputs only in engineering units RATIO 2 Input 2 Ratio 20 00 to 20 00 1 000 BIAS IN
305. to 99 99 Y3 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y4 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 Y4 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y5 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 Y5 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y6 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 Y6 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y7 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 Y7 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS Y8 VALUE 0 00 to 99 99 Y8 INPUT VALUE Y AXIS 102 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection 8SEG CH2 8 SEGMENT CHARACTERIZER 2 A second eight segment characterizer can be applied to either Input 1 Input 2 Output 1 or Output 2 DISABL DISABLE Disables characterizer INPUT1 INPUT 1 Characterizer applied to Input 1 INPUT2 INPUT 2 Characterizer applied to Input 2 L1 OUT LOOP 1 OUTPUT Characterizer applied to Loop 1 Output NOTE 1 L2 OUT LOOP 2 OUTPUT Characterizer applied to Loop 2 Output There are eight Xn Input values and eight Yn Output values to be selected The following rules apply When Input 2 is used Input 2 Ratio and Bias are applied to the Xn Values When one of the Loop outputs are selected the Xn Input values are the Output from the control algorithm and the Yn Output is the final control element action This application is useful for non linear control elements or Process Variable A simple example is shown in Figure 4 2 ATTENTION The X values below should be entered as increasing values from 0 to 100 from 0 to 8
306. to exceed Use 0 to 100 for digital output type Use 5 to 105 for current output Local Setpoint will automatically adjust itself to be within the setpoint limit range For example if SP 1500 and the SP HiLIM is changed to 1200 the new Local Setpoint will be 1200 I Hi LIM Within the range of the HIGH RESET LIMIT This is the highest value of output output limits beyond which you want no reset to occur I Lo LIM Within the range of the LOW RESET LIMIT This is the lowest value of output output limits beyond which you want no reset to occur DROPOFF 5 to 105 of output CONTROLLER DROPOFF VALUE Output value below which the controller output will drop off to the low output limit value set in prompt OUTLOoLIM DEADBAND 5 0 to 5 0 DEADBAND is an adjustable gap between the operating ranges of output 1 and output 2 in which neither output operates positive value or both outputs operate negative value FAILMODE FAILSAFE MODE NO LAT NON LATCHING Controller stays in last mode automatic or manual output goes to failsafe value LATCH LATCHING Controller goes to manual mode output goes to failsafe value 124 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection FAILSAFE 0 to 100 FAILSAFE OUTPUT 2 VALUE The value used here will also be the output level when you have Com
307. tpoint 1 A1S2HL Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 State LOW LOW HIGH A1S2 EV SP Programming Event BEGIN E Alarm State for Alarm 1 END Setpoint 2 A2S1 HL Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 State LOW HIGH HIGH A2S1 EV SP Programming Event BEGIN a Alarm State for Alarm 2 END Setpoint 1 A2S2 HL Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 State LOW LOW HIGH A2S2 EV SP Programming Event BEGIN Alarm State for Alarm 2 END Setpoint 2 AL HYST Alarm Hysteresis 0 0 to 100 0 of output or span as 0 1 appropriate ALM OUT1 Latching Alarm for Output 1 NO LAT NO LAT LATCH BLOCK Alarm Blocking DISABL DISABL BLOCK1 BLOCK2 BLK 12 For CE conformity Performance Criterion A select NO LAT 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 67 3 20 Introduction Function prompts Display Parameters Set Up Group This data deals with the Decimal Place Units of Temperature Power Frequency and Process ID Tag Table 3 17 lists all the function prompts in the Display Set Up group Table 3 17 Display Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Lower Display Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Upper Display Factory Setting Refer to DECIMAL Control Loop 1 Decimal Place ATTENTION Auto ranging will occur to whichever decimal place has been selected XXXX DECIMAL2 Control Loop 2 Decimal Place XXXX TEMPUNIT Control Loop 1 Temperature Units NONE PWR FREQ Power Frequency 60 HZ RATIO 2 Ratio for I
308. tpoint rate 47 84 Setpoint Select key lockout 80 Setpoint selection indication 158 Setpoint tracking 117 Setpoint tracking 123 Shed controller mode and output level 133 Shed time 32 Shock hazard warning 213 227 247 Single Setpoint Ramp 47 Soak segments 202 Software version 240 Solid State Relay Output Connections 23 SP programming tips 272 SP Tuning 49 Start segment number 202 Summer with ratio and bias 95 T Technical Assistance iii Three Position Step 92 Three Position Step Control algorithm 178 Time duplex 107 Time proportional output 107 Time simplex 107 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 273 Index Timer 94 Totalizer displays 180 Totalizer function 105 180 Totalizer reset via digital input 181 Transmitter characterization 111 Tuning 2 Set Up group 45 Tuning constant values 165 Tuning parameter sets 15 Tuning parameter sets Loop 2 121 Tuning parameters 175 Two HLAI replace second LLAI connections 27 W WARNING SHOCK HAZARD 213 227 247 Weighted average ratio 96 Wiring diagram 19 274 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Honeywell Sensing and Control Honeywell 11 West Spring Street Freeport IL 61032 51 52 25 86 1000 Printed in USA www honeywell com sensing
309. tput in percent 96 Cannot be used with 3 Position Step Control SETPOINT Represents the value of the setpoint in units of PV LOCAL SETPOINT ONE Auxiliary output represents local setpoint one regardless of active setpoint INPUT ALGORITHM 1 OUTPUT Represents the output from input algorithm 1 INPUT ALGORITHM 2 OUTPUT Represents the output from input algorithm 2 PROCESS VARIABLE 2 Represents the value of the Process Variable for Loop 2 DEVIATION 2 PROCESS VARIABLE MINUS SETPOINT Represents 100 to 100 of the selected PV span in engineering units for Loop 2 When Deviation is selected only one operating parameter will be entered This value represents the deviation level that will produce 20 mA 100 output Zero deviation will produce a center scale 12 mA or 50 output A negative deviation equal in magnitude to the auxiliary output high value will produce a low end 4 mA or 0 output OUTPUT 2 Represents the displayed controller output in percent for Loop 2 SP L2 LSP1 2 SETPOINT 2 Represents the value of the setpoint in units of PV for Loop 2 LOCAL SETPOINT 2 Represents the value of local setpoint 1 in units of PV for Loop 2 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 127 Lower Display Upper Display Parameter Prompt Range of Setting Definition or Selection 4mA VAL Low Scale Value within the AUXILIARY OUTPUT LOW SCALING FACTO
310. trol P Single Mode control Set Rate D to 0 Other prompts affected MANRSET3 OUT OVRD DISABL HI SEL LO SEL OUTPUT OVERRIDE SELECT This selection lets you select high or low output override Only available if the controller is configured for 2 Loop operation NOTE 1 ATTENTION Loop 1 must be in Automatic for this selection to work While the output is being overridden an O appears as the leftmost digit of the upper display DISABLE Disables Output Override HIGH SELECT The controller will select the higher of output 1 or output 2 and direct it to output 1 rear terminals LOW SELECT The controller will select the lower of output 1 or output 2 and direct it to output 1 rear terminals 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 93 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition TIMER ENABLE DISABL TIMER allows you to enable or disable the timer option The timer option allows you to configure a timeout period and to select timer start by either the keyboard RUN HOLD key or Alarm 2 A digital input can also be configured to start the timer When the timer is enabled it has exclusive control of the alarm 1 relay any previous alarm configuration is ignored At timeout the timer is ready to be re activated by whatever action has been configured Alarm 1 is activated at the end of the timeout period PERIOD
311. ts RPM MIN MIN 60 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 3 16 Introduction Function prompts Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group The functions listed in this group define how Loop 2 of a Two Loop process controller will control the process Only available on Expanded Controller Model DC330E XX XXX Table 3 13 lists all the function prompts in the Control 2 Set Up group Table 3 13 Control 2 Group Function Prompts Function Prompt Lower Display Function Name Selections or Range of Setting Upper Display Factory Refer Setting to PV 2 SRC Process Variable Source INP 3 INP 2 Section 4 12 FORCE MA Force Manual DISABL LINK12 DISABL PID SETS Tuning Parameter Sets 1 ONLY 2KEYBD 2PV SW 25 SW GAIN S Gain scheduling automatically disables Accutune for this loop 1 ONLY SW VALUE Automatic Switchover Value Value in engineering units within PV or SP range limits LSP S Local Setpoint Source 1 ONLY TWO THREE Selection automatically disables RSP SRC 1 ONLY RSP SRC Remote Setpoint Source NONE INP 2 IN AL1 IN AL2 INP 3 NONE AUTOBIAS Automatic Bias ENABLE DISABL DISABL SPTRACK Local Setpoint Tracking NONE PV RSP NONE SP HiLIM Setpoint High Limit 0 to 100 of PV span input in engineering units 1000 SP LoLIM Setpoint Low Limit 0 to 100 of PV span input in eng
312. uDIV Input A x Ratio A Bias A x Input C x Ratio C Bias C MULTIPLIER DIVIDER The following formula applies x Calc Hi Calc Lo Input B x Ratio B Bias B MULT PV Input A x Ratio A Bias A x Input C x Ratio C MULTIPLIER The following formula applies Bias C x Input B x Ratio B Bias B x Calc Hi Calc Lo CARB A CARBON POTENTIAL A Make this selection if you have a Cambridge or Marathon monitor type Zirconium Oxide sensor 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 95 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition CARB B CARBON POTENTIAL B Make this selection if you have a Corning type Zirconium Oxide sensor This algorithm requires a temperature range within the region of 1400 to 2000 F CARB C CARBON POTENTIAL C Make this selection if you have an A A C C type Zirconium Oxide sensor This algorithm requires a temperature range within the region of 1400 to 2000 F CARB D CARBON POTENTIAL D Make this selection if you have a Barber Coleman MacDhui or Bricesco type Zirconium Oxide sensor This algorithm requires a temperature range within the region of 1400 to 2000 F FCC CARBON POTENTIAL FCC Make this selection if you have a Furnace Controls Corp Accucarb type Zirconium Oxide sensor This algorithm requires a temperature range within the region of 1400 to
313. uits to reduce the effect of electrical noise from various sources If there is a need to further reduce these effects e Separate External Wiring separate connecting wires into bundles see Table 2 3 and route the individual bundles through separate conduits or metal trays Use Suppression Devices for additional noise protection you may want to add suppression devices at the external source Appropriate suppression devices are commercially available ATTENTION For additional noise information refer to document number 5 52 05 01 How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 15 Permissible wire bundling Identify your wiring requirements Table 2 3 shows which wire functions should be bundled together NOTE For installation where high EMI RFI noise cannot be avoided we recommend you use shielded twisted pair wires for the signals in bundle 2 Table 2 3 Permissible Wiring Bundling Bundle No Wire Functions 1 Line power wiring Earth ground wiring Control relay output wiring Line voltage alarm wiring Analog signal wire such as Input signal wire thermocouple 4 to 20 mA etc 4 20 mA output signal wiring Slidewire feedback circuit wiring Digital input signals Communications Low voltage alarm relay output wiring Low voltage wiring to solid state type control circuits To determine the
314. umber may affect the alarms events 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 209 Function Press Result External Program Reset If Remote Switching Digital Input option is present on your controller contact closure resets the SP Program back to the start of the first segment Program cycle number is not affected Reopening the contact has no effect and places the program in HOLD mode The setpoint is changed to what the setpoint was when the program was first started HOLD restarts the Setpoint Program Keyboard Reset LOWER DISPLAY until you see Upper Display Lower Display ToBEGIN Press A key to reset program to beginning at Hold state Viewing the present ramp or soak segment number LOWER DISPLAY until you see Upper Display and time R and the PV value Lower Display For Ramp segments RA XX XX m Time Hours Minutes or a Rate EU MIN or EU HR Indicates Ramp segment Segment Number odd only For Soak segments SK XX XX Time remaining in segment in Hrs Minutes including current partially completed minute Indicates Soak segment Segment Number even only 210 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Power up state Function Press Result Viewing the number of cycles left in the program LOWER DISPLAY until you see Upper Display and the PV value Lower Display a RECYC XX Remaining Cycl
315. uplex operation 108 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 Lower Display Prompt Upper Display Range of Setting or Selection Parameter Definition OUT2 ALG NONE TIME CURRNT CUR D CUR TI TI CUR The OUTPUT ALGORITHM lets you select the type of output you want for the second control loop See OUT ALG for definitions NONE TIME SIMPLEX CURRENT SIMPLEX AUX OUT CURRENT DUPLEX AUX OUT CURRENT TIME DUPLEX TIME CURRENT DUPLEX ATTENTION If Time Duplex or TPSC is selected as the first control loop output then TIME CUR TI and TI CUR are not available as the second control loop output RLYSTATE 1OF20F 1 2 1 2 1 2 DIGITAL OUTPUT STATUS AT 0 OUTPUT allows the following selections 1OF20F Output 1 de energized Output 2 de energized 1ON20F Output 1 energized Output 2 de energized 1 2 Output 1 de energized Output 2 energized 1 2 Output 1 energized Output 2 energized RLY TYPE MECHAN SOL ST RELAY CYCLE TIME INCREMENT selection is used only for Time Simplex and Duplex output configurations and affects both loops This configuration sets the increment size of the relay cycle times in the Tuning and Tuning 2 Set Up groups ELECTROMECHANICAL RELAY Cycle time in one second increments SOLID STATE RELAY Cycle time in 1 3 second increments This is useful for solid state relay applications that require sho
316. urrent sources OFF ON while connected to the UDC 3300 input 216 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 7 4 Input 1 Thermocouple inputs using an ice bath Table 7 3 Figure 7 2 2 or 3 Set Up Wiring Referring to Figure 7 2 wire the controller according to the procedure given in Table 7 3 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath Step Action 1 Connect the copper leads to the calibrator 2 Connect a length of thermocouple extension wire to the end of each copper lead and insert the junction points into the ice bath 3 Connect the thermocouple extension wires to the terminals for Input 1 or Input 2 See Figure 7 2 4 Connect a cold junction resistor to terminals 25 and 27 for Input 1 or terminals 22 and 24 for Input 2 See Figure 7 2 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath Input 1 T C Extension Wire C J Resistor Millivolt Source Copper Leads Ice Bath 24174 10 00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 217 Thermocouple inputs Referring to Figure 7 3 wire the controller according to the procedure using a precision given in Table 7 4 resistor Table 7 4 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Precision Resistor Step Action 1 Connect the copper leads to the calibrator 2 Disconnect the cold junction resistor 3 Install a 500 ohm precision resi
317. ut Algorithm Set Up group function prompt OUT ALG POSITN Refer to Section 3 Configuration Check the field wiring Refer to Section 2 Installation for Position Proportional Wiring information Check the output Put the controller into Manual mode and change the output from 0 to 100 Check whether the motor drives in both directions If it does go to Step 6 See the Position Proportional calibration procedure in Section 8 for motor slidewire calibration Check whether the motor drives in either direction If the motor drives in one direction check the slidewire If the motor does not drive in either direction check the motor Refer to the motor instructions Check the output voltage to the slidewire Should equal from 1 3 to 1 0 volts See wiring in the installation section for terminal designations The feedback slidewire output voltage must vary with the valve position Make sure the output relays are actuating properly Put the controller into Manual mode Vary the output above and below the present value Observe OUT indicator on the operator interface If they are not working properly check the field wiring then go to Step 5 If they are go to Step 8 Recalibrate the controller Refer to Section 8 Output Calibration Change MCU Output board Refer to Table 9 23 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 249 Procedure
318. ut board 13 Reinstall the WG connector and the transformer connectors to the Digital Input board and Auxiliary Output Communications board if present 14 Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis Make sure the connections to the display keyboard assembly are made and that the release points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards 15 Reinstall the chassis into the case Push in hard then tighten the screw 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 263 9 9 Maintenance Cleaning If you find it necessary to clean the elastomer bezel use mild soapy water 264 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 10 00 Section 10 Parts List 10 1 Exploded View Introduction Figure 10 1 is an exploded view of the UDC 3300 Controller Each part is labeled with a key number The part numbers are listed by key number in Table 10 1 There is a list of parts not shown in Table 10 2 Figure 10 1 UDC 3300 Exploded View 0 9 9 fe 24186 10 00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 265 Parts identification Table 10 1 lists the part numbers for the key numbers shown in the exploded view Table 10 1 Parts Identification Key Part Number Description Quantity Number 1 30756667 526 Bezel Assembly Gray 1 2 30756672 501 Display Keyboard Printed Wiring Assembly 1 3 30756687 501 Auxiliary Output Printed Wiring Board 1 30756
319. uts controller in HOLD mode This selection applies to either loop ToBEGN STOP MAN FS EXTERNAL SP PROGRAM RESET Contact closure resets SP Program back to the beginning of the first segment in the program and places the program in the HOLD mode Program cycle number is not affected Reopening switch has no effect This selection applies to either loop ATTENTION Once the last segment of the setpoint program has timed out the controller enters the mode of action specified in the configuration data and the program cannot be reset to the beginning of the first segment by digital input closure INHIBIT INTEGRAL RESET Contact closure disables PID Integral Reset action MANUAL FAILSAFE OUTPUT Cortroller goes to Manual mode output goes to the Failsafe value ATTENTION This will cause a bump in the output when switching from Automatic to Manual The switch back from Manual to Automatic is bumpless When the switch is closed the output can be adjusted from the keyboard after pressing the MANUAL AUTO key to the put the controller in the Manual mode DIG IN 1 ToLOCK KEYBOARD LOCKOUT Contact closure disables all keys Lower display shows LOCKED if a key is pressed ToAout TIMER AM STA ToTUNE AUTOMATIC OUTPUT Contact closure sends output to the value set at Control prompt AUTO OUT when the controller is in the Automatic mode Reopening the contact returns the controller
320. w to set this value This procedure assumes that you are still in the Control Set Up group from Table 5 16 Table 5 17 Procedure for Setting Switchover Values Step Operation Press Action 1 Select Function until you see Switchover value 1 22 Upper Display function The switchover assuming you value are still in Lower Display Control Set Up SW VALUE group A di to select the switch over value in the upper display v Set tuning constant There are specific tuning constants that must be set for each set The values for each set procedure in Table 5 18 shows you how to access these constants and change their values Table 5 18 Procedure for Setting Tuning Constant Values Step Operation Press Action 1 Select Tuning until you see Set Up Group SET UP Upper Display SETUP Lower Display TUNING 2 Select the tuning Function tO successively display the following constants LOOP 1 2 constants Upper Display The tuning constant value Lower Display lt lt PROP BD or GAIN RATE RSET CYC SEC or CYC SX3 PROP BD2 or GAIN2 RATE 2 RSET2 CYC2 SEC or CYC2 SX3 A To change the value of any of the above y listed prompts in the lower display PIDSETI will be used when PV or SP whichever is selected is greater than the switch over value PIDSET2 will be used when PV or SP whichever is selected is less than the switch over value
321. will need a screwdriver to connect these devices to your controller Table 7 2 Equipment Needed Type of Input Equipment Needed Thermocouple Inputs Ice Bath A calibrating device with 0 02 accuracy for use as a signal source such as a millivolt source Thermocouple extension wire that corresponds with the type of thermocouple that will be used with the controller input Two insulated copper leads for connecting the thermocouple extension wire from the ice baths to the precision calibrator Two containers of crushed ice Thermocouple Inputs Precision Resistor A calibrating device with 0 02 accuracy for use as a signal source such as a millivolt source Two insulated copper leads for connecting the calibrator to the controller A precision 500 ohm resistor 0 1 connected across input 1 terminals 25 and 27 or input 2 terminals 22 R 24 RTD Resistance Thermometer Device A decade box with 0 02 accuracy capable of providing stepped resistance values over a minimum range of 0 to 1400 ohms with a resolution of 0 1 ohm Three insulated copper leads for connecting the decade box to the controller Milliampere Millivolt Volts and Radiamatic A calibrating device with 0 02 accuracy for use as a signal source Two insulated copper leads for connecting the calibrator to the controller Place current source at zero before switching ON Do not switch c
322. wing order installation related problems application related problems hardware and software related problems and use the information presented in this section to solve them If a replacement of any part is required follow the procedures listed under Parts Replacement Procedures What s in this section The following topics are covered in this section Topic See Page 9 1 Overview 237 9 2 Troubleshooting Aids 239 Overall Error Messages 239 Controller Failure Symptoms 240 Customer Support 240 Determining the Software Version Number 240 9 3 Power up Tests 241 9 4 Status Tests 242 9 5 Background Tests 244 9 6 Controller Failure Symptoms 246 9 7 Troubleshooting Procedures 247 Power Failure 247 Current Proportional Output Failure 248 Position Proportional Output Failure 249 Time Proportional Output Failure 250 Time Current Current Time Proportional Output Failure 251 Alarm Relay Output Failure 252 Keyboard Failure 253 Communications Failure 254 9 8 Parts Replacement Procedures 255 How to remove the chassis 256 How to replace the display keyboard assembly 257 How to remove printed wiring boards from the chassis 258 Printed wiring board identification 259 2nd input board replacement procedure 260 Power input board replacement procedure 260 Digital input board replacement procedure 261 Aux output commun board replacement procedure 262 MCU output board repla
323. zero and span The value in the upper display is in the tenths of a degree calibration procedures did It is the current reading of the temperature as measured at not bring the controller the thermocouple terminals and recognized by the within the specified controller You can change this value if it is in error using accuracy requirements the 07 key ATTENTION When calibrating T C inputs using a precision 500 ohm resistor calibrate the cold junction as 77 F 25 5 Exit the Calibration Mode The controller will store the calibration constants and exit FUNCTION LOOP 1 2 calibration mode 224 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 10 00 7 6 Restoring Factory Calibration How to restore it The factory calibration constants for all the input actuation types that can be used with the controller are stored in its nonvolatile memory Thus you can quickly restore the Factory Calibration for a given input actuation type by simply changing the actuation type to another type and then changing it back to the original type See Table 7 6 for the procedure Procedure Table 7 6 lists the procedure for restoring factory calibration Table 7 6 Restoring Factory Calibration Step Operation Press Action Result 1 Set LOCKOUT SET until you see NONE S or UP Upper Display Lower Display TUNING TE until you see LOOP 1 2 Upper Display One of the following NONE Lower Display CALIB CON

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

HQ W8-65050N air filter    J132/J132a Bedienungsanleitung  Menu CMI - Technische Alternative  44965 HBZ Corsair SAFE RTF.indb  HANSEN P4 - Hansen Industrial Transmissions  Synchronous Operation Manual - Fuji Electric Corp. of America  Black Box UCCSM27H-14C  votre téléviseur est-il compatible avec la norme de protection hdcp  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file